United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park NC 27711
EPA-450/4-86-005a
June 1986
Air
Industrial Source
Complex (ISC)
Dispersion Model
User's Guide —
Second Edition
Volume I.
-------
EPA-450/4-86-005a
Industrial Source Complex
(ISC) Dispersion Model
User's Guide — Second Edition
Volume I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Region 5, Library (PL-12J)
77 West Jackson Boulevard, 12th Floor
Chicago, IL 60604-3590
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
Office of Air and Radiation
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
June 1986
-------
DISCLAIMER
This report has been reviewed by the Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, EPA, and approved for
publication. Mention of trade names or commercial products is not intended to constitute endorsement or
recommendation for use.
-------
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The ISC Model User's Guide was originally written by J.F. Bowers, J.R.
Bjorklund, and C.S. Cheney of the H.E. Cramer Company, Inc., Salt Lake City,
Utah. That work was funded by the Environmental Protection Agency under
Contract No. 68-02-3323, with George Schewe as the Project Officer. This
second edition has been prepared by David J. Wackter and John A. Foster, TRC
Environmental Consultants, Inc., East Hartford, Connecticut. It was funded by
the Environmental Protection Agency under Contract Mo. 68-02-3886 with Russell
F. Lee as Project Officer. Technical reviews and comments provided by Richard
Daye, Alan Cimorelli, James Dicke, Jerome Mersch and Joseph Tikvart are
gratefully acknowledged.
-111-
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME I
SECTION PAGE
1.0 MODEL OVERVIEW 1-1
1.1 Introduction 1-1
1.2 Background and Purpose 1-2
1.3 General Description 1-3
1.4 System Description 1-6
1.4.1 The ISC Short-Term (ISCST) Model Program .... 1-6
1.4.2 The ISC Long-Term (ISCLT) Model Program 1-7
1.5 Summary of Input Data 1-7
1.5.1 The ISC Short-Term (ISCST) Model Program .... 1-7
1.5.2 The ISC Long-Term (ISCLT) Model Program 1-13
2.0 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 2-1
2.1 General 2-1
2.2 Model Input Data 2-1
2.2.1 Meteorological Input Data 2-1
2.2.2 Source Input Data 2-10
2.2.3 Receptor Data 2-14
2.3 Plume Rise Formulas 2-19
2.3.1 Wind Profile 2-19
2.3.2 Stack Downwash 2-19
2.3.3 Buoyancy Flux 2-20
2.3.4 Unstable or Neutral — Crossover Between Momentum
and Buoyancy 2-20
2.3.5 Unstable or Neutral — Buoyancy Rise 2-21
2.3.6 Unstable or Neutral — Momentum Rise 2-22
2.3.7 Stability Parameter 2-22
2.3.8 Stable — Crossover Between Momentum and Buoyancy 2-22
2.3.9 Stable — Buoyancy Rise 2-23
2.3.10 Stable — Momentum Rise 2-23
2.3.11 All Conditions — Distance Less Than Distance to
Final Rise - (Gradual Rise) 2-24
2.4 The ISC Short-Term Dispersion Model Equations . . . 2-25
2.4.1 Stack Emissions 2-25
2.4.2 Area, Volume and Line Source Emissions 2-54
2.4.3 The ISC Short-Term Dry Deposition Model 2-60
2.5 The ISC Long-Term Dispersion Model Equations . . . 2-62
2.5.1 Stack Emissions 2-62
2.5.2 Area, Volume and Line Source Emissions 2-67
2.5.3 The ISC Long-Term Dry Deposition Model 2-68
2.6 Example Problem 2-70
2.6.1 Description of a Hypothetical Potash Processing
Plant 2-70
2.6.2 Example ISCST Problem 2-70
2.6.3 Example ISCLT Problem 2-77
-v-
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME I
(CONTINUED)
SECTION PAGE
3.0 USER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ISC SHORT-TERM (ISCST)
MODEL PROGRAM 3-1
3.1 Summary of Program Options, Data Requirements and
Output 3-1
3.1.1 Summary of ISCST Program Options 3-1
3.1.2 Data Input Requirements 3-6
3.1.3 Output Information 3-24
3.2 User's Instructions for the ISCST Program 3-26
3.2.1 Program Description 3-26
3.2.2 Data Deck Setup 3-29
3.2.3 Input Data Description 3-29
3.2.4 Program Output Data Description 3-55
3.2.5 Program Run Time, Page and Tape Output Estimates 3-61
3.2.6 Program Diagnostic Messages 3-66
3.2.7 Program Modification for Computers Other Than
UNIVAC 1100 Series Computers 3-67
4.0 USER'S INSTRUCTION FOR THE ISC LONG-TERM (ISCLT)
MODEL PROGRAM 4-1
4.1 Summary of Program Options, Data Requirements and
Output 4-1
4.1.1 Summary of ISCLT Program Options 4-1
4.1.2 Data Input Requirements 4-5
4.1.3 Output Information 4-29
4.2 User's Instructions for the ISCLT Program 4-31
4.2.1 Program Description 4-31
4.2.2 Data Deck Setup 4-32
4.2.3 Input Data Description 4-34
4.2.4 Program Output Data Description 4-59
4.2.5 Page and Tape Output Estimates 4-61
4.2.6 Program Diagnostic Messages 4-66
4.2.7 Program Modifications for Computers Other Than
UNIVAC 1100 Series Computers 4-66
5.0 REFERENCES 5-1
-vi-
-------
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME II
APPENDICES
A COMPLETE FORTRAN LISTING OF THE INDUSTRIAL SOURCE COMPLEX
SHORT TERM MODEL (ISCST) COMPUTER PROGRAM
B COMPLETE FORTRAN LISTING OF THE INDUSTRIAL SOURCE COMPLEX
LONG TERM MODEL (ISCLT) COMPUTER PROGRAM
C EXAMPLE EXECUTIONS OF THE ISC SHORT-TERM MODEL (ISCST)
COMPUTER PROGRAM
D EXAMPLE EXECUTIONS OF THE ISC LONG-TERM MODEL (ISCLT)
COMPUTER PROGRAM
E LOGIC FLOW DESCRIPTION OF THE ISC SHORT-TERM MODEL
(ISCST) COMPUTER PROGRAM
F LOGIC FLOW DESCRIPTION OF THE ISC LONG-TERM MODEL (ISCLT)
COMPUTER PROGRAM
G CODING FORMS FOR CARD INPUT TO THE ISC SHORT-TERM MODEL
{ISCST) COMPUTER PROGRAM
H CODING FORMS FOR CARD INPUT TO THE ISC LONG-TERM MODEL
(ISCLT) COMPUTER PROGRAM
-vii-
-------
LIST OF FIGURES
VOLUME I
FIGURE PAGE
1-1 Schematic Diagram of the ISC Model Short-Term Computer
Program ISCST „ 1-8
1-2 Schematic Diagram of the ISC Model Long-Term Computer
Program ISCLT 1-9
2-1 The Sixteen Standard 22.5-Degree Wind-Direction Sectors
Used in Star Summaries 2-9
2-2 Example of a Polar Receptor Grid 2-16
2-3 Example of an Irregularly-Spaced Cartesian Receptor Grid . 2-17
2-4 The Method of Multiple Plume Images Used to Simulate Plume
Reflection in the ISC Model 2-43
2-5 Schematic Illustration of (a) Urban and (b) Rural Mixing
Height Interpolation Procedures 2-45
2-6 Illustration of Plume Behavior in Complex Terrain Assumed
by the ISC Model 2-48
2-7 Illustration of Vertical Concentration Profiles for Reflec-
tion Coefficients of 0, 0.5, and 1.0 2-49
2-8 Relationship Between the Gravitational Settling Velocity Vsn
and the Reflection Coefficient yn Suggested by Dumbauld,
et al., (1976) 2-52
2-9 Representation of an Irregularly Shaped Area Source by 11
Square Area Sources 2-55
2-10 Exact and Approximate Representations of a Line Source by
Multiple Volume Sources 2-59
2-11 Plant Layout and Side View of a Hypothetical Potash Process-
ing Plant 2-71
3-1 Input Data Deck Setup for the ISCST Program 3-30
3-2 Four Types of Error Messages Printed by the ISCST Program . 3-68
4-1 Input Data Deck Setup for the ISCLT Program 4-33
-vi11-
-------
LIST OF TABLES
VOLUME I
TABLE PAGE
1-1 Major Features of the ISC Model 1-5
2-1 Hourly Meteorological Inputs Required by the ISC Short-Term
Model Program 2-2
2-2 Default Values for the Wind-Profile Exponents and Vertical
Potential Temperature Gradients 2-2
2-3 Pasguill Stability Categories Used by the ISC Model to
Select Dispersion Coefficients for the Rural and Urban
Modes 2-5
2-4 Meteorological Inputs Required by the ISC Long-Term Model
Program 2-7
2-5 Possible Combinations of Wind-Speed and Pasquill Stability
Categories and Mean Wind Speeds in Each NCDC Star Summary
Wind-Speed Category 2-8
2-6 Source Inputs Required by the ISC Model Programs 2-11
2-7 Parameters Used to Calculate Pasquill-Gifford ay 2-28
2-8 Parameters Used to Calculate Pasquill-Gifford oz 2-29
2-9 Briggs Formulas Used to Calculate McElroy-Pooler ay . . . . 2-31
2-10 Briggs Formulas Used to Calculate McElroy-Pooler oz . . . . 2-31
2-11 Coefficients Used to Calculate Lateral Virtual Distances for
Pasquill-Gifford Dispersion Rates 2-34
2-12 Summary of Suggested Procedures for Estimating Initial Lateral
Dimensions (CTyo) and Inital Vertical Dimensions (azo) for
Volume and Line Sources 2-58
2-13 Emissions Data for a Hypothetical Potash Processing Plant . 2-72
2-14 Particle-Size Distribution, Gravitational Settling Velocities
and Surface Reflection Coefficients for Particulate
Emissions from the Ore Pile and Conveyor Belt 2-72
2-15 Emissions Inventory in Form for Input to the ISC Dispersion
Model 2-75
2-16 Particle Emission Rates for the Ore Pile 2-76
-ix-
-------
LIST OF TABLES
VOLUME I
(CONTINUED)
TABLE PAGE
2-17 Particulate Emission Rates for the Ore Pile and Conveyor
Belt as Functions of Wind Speed and Stability 2-78
2-18 Annual Particulate Emissions for the Ore Pile and Conveyor
Belt as Functions of Wind Speed and Stability 2-79
3-1 Meteorological Data Input Options for ISCST 3-2
3-2 Dispersion-Model Options for ISCST 3-2
3-3 ISCST Output Options 3-5
3-4 ISCST Program Card Input Parameters, FORTRAN Edit Code
(Format) and Description 3-32
3-5 Julian Day to Month/Season or Month to Season Conversion
Chart for Leap Years 3-54
3-6 Preprocessor Output File Record Description 3-56
3-7 Time Period Intervals and Corresponding Hours of the Day . 3-59
4-1 Meteorological Data Input Options for ISCLT 4-2
4-2 Dispersion-Model Options for ISCLT 4-2
4-3 ISCLT Output Options 4-4
4-4 ISCST Program Card Input Parameters, Format and Description 4-35
4-5 Input/Output Tape Format 4-62
4-6 ISCLT Warning and Error Messages 4-68
-x-
-------
SECTION 1
MODEL OVERVIEW
1.1 Introduction
EPA is involved in updating and revising air quality dispersion models for
use in regulatory applications. The revisions are made to correct and improve
technical features and to make the models more appropriate for specific
applications. The Industrial Source Complex (ISC) Model has undergone several
revisions since first being issued (Bowers, et al, 1979). This second edition
of the ISC User's Guide has been prepared to provide the user with a full set
of updated documentation describing the mathematical formulations and
procedures for computer applications.
The new user's guide (an edited version of the first edition) is
comprehensive and self-contained so that new users of ISC will not need to
refer back to the original user's guide. Previous users of ISC will find the
following new features:
• a third urban option which uses the Briggs fit, as contained in
Gifford (1976), to the McElroy-Pooler urban dispersion coefficients
• an option for buoyancy induced dispersion
• a "regulatory default option" switch for use in regulatory
applications
• an optional treatment for calm winds (only ISCST)
• a revised plume rise algorithm
• receptors at elevations below plant grade are treated in the same
manner as receptors above plant grade
• revised default wind profile exponents for each rural and urban
option
• computations for source-receptor distances less than 100 meters
• terrain truncation algorithm
1-1
-------
• an option to print input data as soon as it is entered
• allowance for input of receptor elevations in feet or meters.
• allowance for printing of 3rd high tables.
Each of these new features is described more completely in Section 2.
1.2 Background and Purpose
Air quality impact analyses for pollutant sources other than emissions
from isolated stacks often require consideration of factors such as fugitive
emissions, aerodynamic wake effects, gravitational settling and dry
deposition. The Industrial Source Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model consists of
two computer programs that are designed to consider these and other factors so
as to meet the needs of those who must perform complicated dispersion model
analyses. The ISC Model computer programs are designed to be flexible,
economical and as easy to use as possible without sacrificing the model
features required to address complicated problems. Two evaluation studies of
the ISC model have been published (Bowers and Anderson, 1981; Bowers et al.,
1982).
Cautionary Mote — The ISC Model contains a number of options that are
designed to consider complicated source configurations and special atmospheric
effects. These options include: site-specific wind-profile exponents and
vertical potential temperature gradients, time-dependent exponential decay of
pollutants, stack-tip downwash, building wake effects, plume rise calculated
as a function of downwind distance, buoyancy induced dispersion, and dry
deposition. If one or more of these options is not specified by the user, the
programs will assign preselected default values to various parameters. For
regulatory applications, the use of the "regulatory default option" is
recommended. If the user believes that the use of site-specific or
1-2
-------
source-specific parameters is appropriate, their use should be discussed with
the responsible air pollution control agency prior to the model calculations.
Also, because proper application of many of the ISC Model features requires a
fundamental knowledge of the concepts of atmospheric transport and dispersion,
the user should seek expert advice before using any ISC Model feature that is
not fully understood. Finally, because a comprehensive model is required to
address complicated problems, the ISC Model is not necessarily the model of
choice for all applications. Simpler and less expensive computerized models
such as the Single Source (CRSTER) Model (EPA, 1977) should be used for
applications that do not require at least one of the ISC Model features.
The ISC Model computer programs are suitable for application to pollutant
sources in the following types of studies:
• Stack design studies
• Combustion source permit applications
• Regulatory variance evaluation
• Monitoring network design
• Control strategy evaluation for SIP's
• Fuel (e.g., coal) conversion studies
• Control technology evaluation
• New source review
• Prevention of significant deterioration
1.3 General Description
The Industrial Source Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model combines and enhances
various dispersion model algorithms into a set of two computer programs that
can be used to assess the air quality impact of emissions from the wide
variety of sources associated with an industrial source complex. For plumes
comprised of particulates with appreciable gravitational settling velocities,
the ISC Model accounts for the effects on ambient particulate concentrations
of gravitational settling and dry deposition. Alternatively, the ISC Model
can be used to calculate dry deposition. The ISC short-term model (ISCST), an
1-3
-------
extended version of the Single Source (CRSTER) Model (EPA, 1977), is designed
to calculate concentration or deposition values for time periods of 1, 2, 3,
4, 6, 8, 12, and 24 hours. If used with a year of sequential hourly
meteorological data, ISCST can also calculate annual concentration or
deposition values. The ISC long-term model (ISCLT) is a sector-averaged model
that extends and combines basic features of the Air Quality Display Model
(AQDM) and the Climatological Dispersion model (CDM). The long-term model
uses statistical wind summaries to calculate seasonal (quarterly) and/or
annual ground-level concentration or deposition values. Both ISCST and ISCLT
use either a polar or a Cartesian receptor grid. The ISC Model computer
programs are written in Fortran 77 and require approximately 75,000 words of
memory. The major features of the ISC Model are listed in Table 1-1.
The ISC Model programs accept the following source types: stack, area and
volume. The volume source option is also used to simulate line sources. The
steady-state Gaussian plume equation for a continuous source is used to
calculate ground-level concentrations for stack and volume sources. The area
source equation in the ISCST Model programs is based on the equation for a
continuous and finite cross-wind line source. In the ISCLT Model program, the
area source treatment uses a virtual point source approximation. The
generalized Briggs (1969, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1975) plume-rise formulas are used
to calculate final as well as gradual plume rise. Procedures suggested by
Huber and Snyder (1976) and Huber (1977) are used to evaluate the effects of
the aerodynamic wakes and eddies formed by buildings and other structures on
plume dispersion. A wind-profile exponent law is used to adjust the observed
mean wind speed from the measurement height to the emission height for the
plume rise and concentration calculations. Procedures utilized by the Single
Source (CRSTER) Model are used to account for variations in terrain height
over the receptor grid. Except for Urban Mode 3, the Pasquill-Gifford curves
1-4
-------
TABLE 1-1
MAJOR FEATURES OF THE
ISC MODEL
Polar or Cartesian coordinate systems
Rural or one of three urban options
Plume rise due to momentum and buoyancy as a function of downwind distance
for stack emissions (Briggs, 1969, 1971, 1972, 1973, and 1975)
Procedures suggested by Huber and Snyder (1976) and Huber (1977) for
evaluating building wake effects.
Procedures suggested by Briggs (1974) for evaluating stack-tip downwash.
Separation of multiple point sources
Consideration of the effects of gravitational settling and dry deposition
on ambient particulate concentrations
Capability of simulating point, line, volume and area sources
Capability to calculate dry deposition
Variation with height of wind speed (wind-profile exponent law)
Concentration estimates for 1-hour to annual average
Terrain-adjustment procedures for elevated terrain including a terrain
truncation algorithm
Consideration of time-dependent exponential decay of pollutants
The method of Pasguill (1976) to account for buoyancy-induced dispersion.
A regulatory default option to set various model options and parameters to
EPA recommended values.
Procedure for calm-wind processing
1-5
-------
(Turner, 1970) are used to calculate lateral (ay) and vertical (a2)
plume spread. The ISC Model has one rural and three urban options. In the
Rural Mode, rural mixing heights* and the ay and az values for the
indicated stability category are used in the calculations. In Urban Mode 1,
the stable E and F stability categories are redefined as neutral D stability.
In Urban Mode 2, the E and F stability categories are combined and the ay
and o, values for the stability category one step more unstable than the
indicated stability category (except A) are used in the calculations (see
Section 2.2.1.1). In Urban Mode 3, the Briggs urban dispersion coefficients
derived from McElroy-Pooler observations are used. Urban mixing heights are
used in all three urban modes.
1.4 System Description
1.4.1 The ISC Short-Term (ISCST) Model Program
Figure 1-1 is a schematic diagram of the ISC Model short-term computer
program (ISCST). As shown by the figure, ISCST directly accepts the
preprocessed meteorological data tape produced by the RAMMET preprocessor.
This meteorological preprocessor program is described in the User's Manual for
Single-Source (CRSTER) Model (EPA, 1977), as updated by Catalano (1986).
Alternatively, hourly meteorological data may be input by card deck. Program
control parameters, source data and receptor data are input by card deck. The
program produces printouts of calculated concentration or deposition values.
* The mixing height is the height above the surface at which an elevated
stable layer restricts vertical mixing and confines pollutant emissions
within the mixing layer.
1-6
-------
1.4.2 The ISC Long-Term (ISCLT) Model Program
Figure 1-2 is a schematic diagram of the ISC Model long-term computer
program (ISCLT). As shown by the figure, program control parameters,
meteorological data, source data and receptor data are input by card deck.
The program produces printouts of calculated concentration or deposition
values. Additionally, all input data and the results of all calculations may
be stored on an optional master tape inventory which can be used as input to
update future runs. The master tape file stores the concentration or
deposition calculated for each source at each receptor. Sources may be added,
deleted or altered in update runs using card input for the affected sources.
Concentration or deposition calculations are then made for those sources only
and the concentration or deposition values calculated for each source are
resummed to obtain an updated estimate of the concentration or deposition
produced at each receptor by all sources.
1.5 Summary of Input Data
1.5.1 The ISC Short-Term (ISCST) Model Program
The input requirements for the ISC Model short-term computer program
(ISCST) consist of four categories:
• Meteorological data
• Source data
• Receptor data
• Program control parameters
a. Meteorological Data. Meteorological inputs reguired by the ISCST
program include hourly estimates of the wind direction, wind speed, ambient
air temperature, Pasguill stability category, mixing height, wind-profile
exponent and vertical potential temperature gradient. The magnetic tape
1-7
-------
H
CO
U
CO
a
m
tj
60
o
3
CL
S
O
cj
B
01
iJ
I
OJ
H
l-
O
CO
-------
Source data
cards
ISCLT program
control and
option data
cards
ISCLT Long-Tera
Computer Program
Seasonal and/or annual
average ground-level con-
centration
Seasonal and/or annual
total ground-level
deposition
1
Meteorological
data cards
f
Receptor
data cards
Printed
Concentration
or
Deposition
Tables
Optional
output
tape
/Optional \
Input
Tape
FIGURE 1-2. Schematic diagram of the ISC Model long-term computer program
1-9
-------
output of the meteorological data preprocessor program and the program default
values for the wind-profile exponent and the vertical potential temperature
gradient satisfy all ISCST hourly meteorological data requirements.
Alternatively, hourly meteorological data can be input by means of a card
deck. When this is done, the use of the calm processing feature (described in
Section l.S.l.d) is not permitted. The number of hours for which
concentration or deposition calculations can be made ranges from 1 to 8,784
(i.e., up to every hour of a 366—day year).
b. Source Data. The ISCST program accepts three source types: stack,
area and volume. For each source, input data requirements include the source
location with respect to a user-specified origin, the source elevation (if
terrain effects are to be included in the model calculations) and the
pollutant emission rate. For each stack, additional source input requirements
include the physical stack height, the stack inner diameter, the stack exit
temperature, the stack exit velocity and — if the stack is adjacent to a
building and aerodynamic wake effects are to be considered — the length,
width and height of the building. The horizontal dimensions and effective
emission height are required for each area source or volume source. If the
calculations are to consider particulates with appreciable gravitational
settling velocities, source inputs for each source also include the mass
fraction of particulates in each gravitational settling-velocity category as
well as the surface reflection coefficient and settling velocity of each
settling-velocity category. Because industrial pollutant emission rates are
often highly variable, emission rates for each source may be held constant or
varied as follows:
1-10
-------
• By hour of the day
• By season or month
• By hour of the day and season
• By stability and wind speed (applies to fugitive sources of
wind-blown particulates)
c. Receptor Data. The ISCST program uses either a polar (r, 9) or a
Cartesian (X,Y) coordinate system. The typical polar receptor array consists
of 36 radials (one for every 10 degrees of azimuth) and five to ten downwind
ring distances for a total of 180 to 360 receptors. However, the user is not
restricted to a 10-degree angular separation of receptors. The polar receptor
array is always centered at X=0, Y=0. Receptor locations in the Cartesian
coordinate system may be given as Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
coordinates or as X (east-west) and Y (north-south) coordinates with respect
to a user-specified origin. Discrete receptor points corresponding to the
locations of air quality monitors, elevated terrain or other points of
interest may also be used with either coordinate system. If terrain effects
are to be included in the calculations, the elevation of each receptor is also
required.
d. Program Control Parameters and Options. The ISCST program allows the
user to select from a number of model options. The program parameters for
these options are discussed in detail in Section 3.2.3. The available options
include:
• Concentration/Deposition Option — Directs the program to
calculate average concentration or total deposition
• Receptor Grid System Option — Selects a Cartesian or a polar
receptor grid system
1-11
-------
• Discrete Receptor Option — Allows the user to arbitrarily place
receptors at any points using either a Cartesian or a polar
coordinate system
• Receptor Terrain Elevation Option — Allows the user to specify an
elevation for each receptor (level terrain is assumed if this
option is not exercised)
• Tape/file Output Option — Directs the program to output the
results of all concentration or deposition calculations to
tape/file
• Print Input Data Option — Directs the program to print program
control parameters, source data and receptor data; the user may
also direct the program to print the hourly meteorological data if
this option is exercised. This option prints all input data after
all input data has been read.
• Output Tables Option — Specifies which of the five types of
output tables are to be printed (see Section 3.1.3)
• Meteorological Data Option — Directs the program to read hourly
data from either the meteorological preprocessor format or a card
image format. When card image format is selected, the calm
processing feature, and the regulatory default option are not used.
• Rural/Urban Option — Specifies whether the concentration or
deposition calculations are made in the Rural Mode, Urban Mode 1,
Urban Mode 2, or Urban Mode 3 (see Section 2.2.1.1)
• Wind-Profile Exponent Option — Directs the program to read
user-provided wind-profile exponents or to use the default values
• Vertical Potential Temperature Gradient Option — Directs the
program to read user-provided vertical potential temperature
gradients or to use the default values
• Source Combination Option — Allows the user to specify the
combinations of sources for which concentration or deposition
estimates are required
• Single Time Period Interval Option — Directs the program to print
concentration or deposition values for a specific time interval
within a day (for example, the third 3-hour period)
• Variable Emission Rate Option — Allows the user to specify
scalars which are multiplied by the source's average emission
rate; the scalars may vary by season or month, by hour of the day,
by season and hour of the day, or by wind speed and stability
• Plume Rise as a Function of Distance Option — Allows the user to
direct the program to calculate plume rise as a function of
downwind distance or to calculate final plume rise at all downwind
distances
1-12
-------
• Stack-Tip Downwash Option — Allows the user to direct the program
to use the Briggs (1974) procedures to account for stack-tip
downwash for all stack sources
• Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion Option — Allows the user to direct
the program to use the Pasguill (1976) method to parameterize the
growth of plumes during the plume rise phase
• Regulatory Default Option — Allows the user to direct the program
to use the following features generally recommended by EPA for
regulatory applications:
1) Tape/file meteorological input assumed
2) Final plume rise at all receptor locations
3) Stack-tip downwash
4) Buoyancy-induced dispersion
5) Default wind profile coefficients (urban or rural)
6) Default vertical potential temperature gradients
7) Calm wind processing
8) A decay half life of 4 hours for S02, urban; otherwise the
half life is set to infinity
In ISCST all other options remain available to the user, except
that if card image meteorological data input is used, the calm
processing and regulatory default option features are not used.
• Calm Processing Option — Allows the user to direct the program to
exclude hours with persistent calm winds in the calculation of
concentrations for each averaging period
• Terrain-truncation Algorithm — Terrain is automatically truncated
to an elevation of .005 meters below stack top when a receptor
elevation exceeds stack top elevation
• Input Debug Option — Directs the program to print input data as
soon as it is read. This option is useful for debugging input
data. Note, this option differs from the Print Input Data Option,
which prints input data after all input data has been read
• Half-life — A non-zero value directs the program to consider
pollutant decay using the input half-life in seconds
• Wake Effects — Non-zero values for source building dimensions
automatically exercises the building wake effects option
1.5.2 The ISC Long-Term (ISCLT) Model Program
The input requirements for the ISC Model long-term computer program
(ISCLT) consist of four categories:
• Meteorological data
• Source data
• Receptor data
• Program control parameters
1-13
-------
Each of these data categories is discussed separately below.
a. Meteorological Data. Seasonal or annual "STAR" summaries (statistical
tabulations of the joint frequency of occurrence of wind-speed and
wind-direction categories, classified according to the Pasguill stability
categories)* are the principal meteorological inputs to ISCLT. The program
accepts STAR summaries with six Pasguill stability categories (A through F) or
five stability categories (A through E with the E and F categories combined).
ISCLT is not designed to use the Climatological Dispersion Model (CDM) STAR
day/night summaries which subdivide the neutral D stability category into day
and night D categories. Additional meteorological data requirements include
seasonal average maximum and minimum heights and ambient air temperatures.
b. Source Data. The ISCLT source data requirements are the same as those
given in the previous section for the ISCST program.
c. Receptor Data. The ISCLT receptor data requirements are the same as
those given in the previous section for the ISCST program.
d. Program Control Parameters and Options. The ISCLT program allows the
user to select from a number of model and logic options. The program control
parameters for these options are discussed in detail in Section 4.2.3. The
available options include:
• Concentration/Deposition Option — Directs the program to
calculate average concentration or total deposition
• Receptor Grid System Option — Selects a Cartesian or a polar
receptor grid system
* STAR summaries are available from the National Climatic Data Center (NCDC),
Asheville, North Carolina.
1-14
-------
• Discrete Receptor Option — Allows the user to place a receptor at
any point using either a Cartesian or polar coordinate reference
system
• Receptor Terrain Elevation Option — Allows the user to specify an
elevation for each receptor (level terrain is assumed by the
program if this option is not exercised)
• Tape/File Input/Output Option — Directs the program to input
and/or output results of all concentration or deposition
calculations, source data and meteorological data from and/or to
magnetic tape or other data file
• Print Input Option — Directs the program to print program control
parameters, source data, receptor data and meteorological data.
This option prints all input data after all input data has been
read
• Print Seasonal/Annual Results Option — Directs the program to
print seasonal and/or annual concentration or deposition values,
where seasons are normally defined as winter, spring, summer and
fall
• Print Results from Individual/Combined Source Option — Directs
the program to print the concentration or deposition values for
individual and/or combined sources, where the combined source
output is the sum over a select group of sources or all sources
• Rural/Urban Option — Specifies whether the concentration or
deposition calculations are to be made in the Rural Mode, Urban
Mode 1, Urban Mode 2, or Urban Mode 3 (see Section 2.2.1.1)
• Plume Rise as a Function of Distance Option — Allows the user to
direct the program to calculate plume rise as a function of
downwind distance or to calculate final plume rise at all downwind
distances
• Print Maximum 10/A11 Receptor Points Option — Specifies whether
the program is to print the maximum 10 concentration (deposition)
values and receptors or to print the results of the calculations
at all receptors without maximums or both
• Automatic Determination of Maximum 10 Option — Directs the
program to calculate the maximum 10 values of concentration
(deposition) from the set of all receptors input; also, directs
the program to display the 10 values of each contributing source
at the locations determined by the maximum 10 values of the
combined sources or to display the maximum 10 values and
locations of each source individually
• User Specified Maximum 10 Option — Allows the user the option of
specifying up to 5 sets of 10 receptor points, one set for each
seasonal and annual calculation or a single set of 10 receptor
points, at which each source contribution as well as the total
concentration (deposition) values for the combined sources are
displayed
1-15
-------
• Print Unit Option — Allows the user to optionally direct the
print output to any output device
• Tape/File Unit Option — Allows the user to optionally select the
logical unit numbers used for magnetic tape input and output
• Print Output Option — This option is provided to minimize paper
output; if selected, the program does not start a new page with
each new table, but continues printing
• Lines per Page Option — This option is provided to enable the
user to specify the exact number of lines printed per page
• Size Options — These are parameters that allow the user to
specify the number of sources input via data card, the sizes of
the X and Y receptor axes if used, the number of discrete receptor
points if used, the number of seasons (or annual only) in the
meteorological input data, and the number of wind-speed, Pasguill
stability and wind-direction categories in the input
meteorological data
• Combined Sources Option — Allows the user the option of
specifying, by source number, multiple sets of sources to use in
forming combined sources output or the option of using all sources
in forming combined sources output
• Units Option — Allows the user the option of specifying the input
emissions units and/or output concentration or deposition units
• Variable Emissions Option — Allows the user the option of varying
emissions by season, by wind speed and season, by Pasguill
stability category and season or by wind speed, Pasguill stability
category and season (season is either winter, spring, summer, fall
or annual only)
• Stack-Tip Downwash Option — Allows the user to direct the program
to use the Briggs (1974) procedures for evaluating stack-tip
downwash for all sources
• Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion Option — Allows the user to direct
the program to use the Pasguill (1976) method to parameterize the
growth of plumes during the plume rise phase
• Regulatory Default Option — Allows the user to direct the program
to use the following features generally recommended by EPA for
regulatory applications:
1) Final plume rise at all receptor locations
2) Stack-tip downwash
3) Buoyancy-induced dispersion
4) Default wind profile coefficients (urban or rural)
5) Default vertical potential temperature gradients
6) A decay half life of 4 hours for S02, urban; otherwise the
decay half life is set to infinity
1-16
-------
In ISCLT, all other options remain available to the user under the
regulatory default option.
• Terrain-truncation Option — Terrain is automatically truncated to
an elevation of .005 meters below stack top when a receptor
elevation exceeds stack top elevation
• Input Debug Option — Directs the program to print input data as
soon as it is read. This option is useful for debugging input
data. Mote, this option differs from the Print Input Data Option,
which prints input data after all input data has been read
1-17
-------
SECTION 2
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2.1 General
The Industrial Source Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model is an advanced
Gaussian plume model. The technical discussion contained in this section
assumes that the reader is already familiar with the theory and concepts of
Gaussian plume models. Readers who lack a fundamental knowledge of the basic
concepts of Gaussian plume modeling are referred to Section 2 of the User's
Manual for the Single Source (CRSTER) Model (EPA, 1977 and Catalano, 1986) or
to other references such as Atmospheric Science and Power Production
(Randerson, 1984) or the Workbook of Atmospheric Dispersion Estimates (Turner,
1970).
2.2 Model Input Data
2.2.1 Meteorological Input Data
2.2.1.1 Meteorological Inputs for the ISC Short-Term (ISCST) Mode1 Prog_ram
Table 2-1 gives the hourly meteorological inputs required by the ISC Model
short-term computer program (ISCST). These inputs include the mean wind speed
measured at height z\, the direction toward which the wind is blowing, the
wind-profile exponent, the ambient air temperature, the Pasguill stability
category, the vertical potential temperature gradient and the mixing layer
height. In general, these inputs are developed from concurrent surface and
upper-air meteorological data by the RAMMET preprocessor program as used by
the Single Source (CRSTER) Model (EPA, 1977 and Catalano, 1986). If the
preprocessed meteorological data are used, the user may input, for each
combination of wind-speed and Pasguill stability categories, site-specific
values of the wind-profile exponent and the vertical potential temperature
2-1
-------
TABLE 2-1
HOURLY METEOROLOGICAL INPUTS REQUIRED BY THE ISC
SHORT-TERM MODEL PROGRAM
Parameter
Definition
Ui Mean wind speed in meters per second (m/sec) at height
zi (default value for z\ is 10 meters)
AFVR Average random flow vector (direction toward which the
wind is blowing)
p Wind-profile exponent (default values assigned on the
basis of stability; see Table 2-2)
Ta Ambient air temperature in degrees Kelvin (°K)
Hm Depth of surface mixing layer (meters), developed from
twice-daily mixing height estimates by the meteorological
preprocessor program
Stability Pasquill stability category (1 = A, 2 = B, etc.)
86 Vertical potential temperature gradient in degrees Kelvin
3z per meter (default values assigned on the basis of
stability category; see Table 2-2)
TABLE 2-2
DEFAULT VALUES FOR THE WIND-PROFILE EXPONENTS AND VERTICAL
POTENTIAL TEMPERATURE GRADIENTS
Pasguill Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
E
F
Urban
Wind-Profile
Exponent p
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.30
Rural
Wind-Profile
Exponent p
0.07
0.07
0.10
0.15
0.35
0.55
Vertical
Potential
Temperature
Gradient (°K/m)
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.020
0.035
2-2
-------
gradient. If the user does not input site-specific wind-profile exponents and
vertical potential temperature gradients, the ISC Model uses the default
values given in Table 2-2. The inputs listed in Table 2-1 may also be
developed by the user from observed hourly meteorological data and input by
card deck. In these cases, the direction from which the wind is blowing must
be reversed 180 degrees to conform with the average flow vector (the direction
toward which the wind is blowing) generated by the meteorological preprocessor
program.
It should be noted that concentrations calculated using Gaussian
dispersion models are inversely proportional to the mean wind speed and thus
the calculated concentrations approach infinity as the mean wind speed
approaches zero (calm). Also, there is no basis for estimating wind direction
during periods of calm winds. The meteorological preprocessor program
arbitrarily sets the wind speed equal to 1 meter per second if the observed
wind speed is less than 1 meter per second and, in the case of calm winds,
sets the wind direction equal to the value reported for the last non-calm
hour. EPA has developed a procedure for treating these periods of calm
winds. The procedure is available in ISCST as a user-defined option. With
this option selected, calm processing is performed if the program encounters
two consecutive hours which have the same unrandomized wind direction, and the
wind speed of the latter hour is equal to 1.0 meter per second. The program
sets the concentration equal to 0.0 at all receptors when calms are
identified. The routine then recalculates concentrations for each averaging
time using the sum of non-calm hour concentrations divided by the number of
non-calm hours in the period. The denominator (number of non-calm hours in
the period) is limited to a minimum value of 2, 3, 3, 4, 6, 9, and 18 hours
for the 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, and 24 hour averaging periods, respectively.
Because unrandomized wind directions are necessary for use with the calm
2-3
-------
processing routine, the model will not allow the calm processing option when
meteorology is input with cards.
The ISCST program also allows for the use of the calm processing option
when run in the deposition mode. In this case, a minimum divisor is not
used. Simply, if an hour is determined as being calm, depositions for all
source-receptor pairs are set to 0 for this hour.
The ISCST program has a rural and three urban options. In the Rural Mode,
rural mixing heights and the Pasquill Gifford (P-G) ay and az values
for the indicated stability category are used in the calculations. Urban
mixing heights are used in the urban modes. In Urban Mode 1, the stable E and
F categories are redefined as neutral (D) stability, and the P-G ay and
0Z values are used. In Urban Mode 2, the E and F stability categories are
combined and the P-G oy and CTZ values for the stability category one
step more unstable than the indicated category are used in the calculations.
For example, the P-G oy and oz values for C stability are used in
calculations for D stability in Urban Mode 2. In Urban Mode 3, stability
categories are not combined, but urban dispersion curves of Briggs are used.
These curves, as reported by Gifford (1976), where derived from the St. Louis
Dispersion Study (McElroy-Pooler, 1968). Table 2-3 gives the dispersion
coefficients used in each mode.
The Rural Mode is usually selected for industrial source complexes located
in rural areas. However, the urban options may also be considered in modeling
an industrial source complex located in a rural area if the source complex is
large and contains numerous tall buildings and/or large heat sources (for
example, coke ovens). An urban mode is appropriate for these cases in order
to account for the enhanced turbulence generated during stable meteorological
conditions by the surface roughness elements and/or heat sources. If an urban
mode is appropriate, Urban Mode 3 is recommended by EPA for regulatory
2-4
-------
TABLE 2-3
PASQUILL STABILITY CATEGORIES USED BY THE ISC MODEL
TO SELECT DISPERSION COEFFICIENTS FOR THE RURAL AND URBAN MODES
Actual Pasquill
Stability Category*
A
B
C
D
E
F
Pasguill
Values
Rural Mode
A
B
C
D
E
F
Stability
Category for the ay, az
Used in ISC Model Calculations
Urban Mode
A
B
C
D
D
D
1 Urban Mode 2 Urban Mode 3**
A A
A B
B C
C D
D E
D F
* The ISCST program redefines extremely stable G stability as very stable F
stability.
** The Briggs urban dispersion curves combine A and B into one "very unstable"
category, and E and F into one "stable" category.
2-5
-------
applications. Modes 1 and 2 are generally not used but are available to the
user for historical interest and model evaluation.
2.2.1.2 Meteorological Inputs for the ISC Long-Term (ISCLT) Model Program
Table 2-4 lists the meteorological inputs required by the ISC Model
long-term computer program (ISCLT). Seasonal or annual STAR summaries are the
principal meteorological inputs to the ISCLT program. A STAR summary is a
tabulation of the joint frequency of occurrence of wind-speed and
wind-direction categories, classified according to the Pasguill stability
categories. Table 2-5 identifies the combinations of wind-speed and Pasguill
stability categories that are possible following the Turner (1964) procedures
of using airport surface weather observations to estimate atmospheric
stability. The wind-speed categories in Table 2-5 are in knots because the
National Weather Service (NWS) reports airport wind speeds to the nearest
knot. The default values of the wind speeds in meters per second, and knots,
assigned by ISCLT to each wind-speed category are shown at the bottom of Table
2-5. The sixteen standard 22.5-degree wind-direction sectors used in STAR
summaries are shown in Figure 2-1. ISCLT accepts STAR summaries with six
stability categories (A through F) or five stability categories (A through E
with the E and F categories combined). ISCLT is not designed to use the
Climatological Dispersion Model (COM) STAR summaries which divide the neutral
D stability category into day and night D categories. STAR summaries are
available for most NWS surface weather stations from the National Climatic
Data Center (NCDC).
The ISCLT user must specify ambient air temperatures by stability and
season and mixing heights by stability and/or wind-speed and season. It is
suggested that the average seasonal maximum daily temperature be assigned to
the A, B and C stability categories; the average seasonal minimum daily
2-6
-------
TABLE 2-4
METEOROLOGICAL INPUTS REQUIRED
BY THE ISC LONG-TERM MODEL PROGRAM
Parameter Definition
fi,j,k,a Frequency of occurrence of the ith wind-speed category
and jth wind-direction category by stability category k
for the ^th season (STAR summary)
ui Mean wind speed in meters per second (m/sec) at height
zi for each wind-speed category (default values based on
STAR wind-speed categories)
PJ;k Wind-profile exponent for each combination of wind-speed
and stability categories (default values are assigned on
the basis of stability; see Table 2-2)
Ta;k,4 Ambient air temperature for the kth stability category
and ^th season in degrees Kelvin (°K)
89/9zi,k Vertical potential temperature gradient in degrees Kelvin
per meter (°K/m) for each combination of wind-speed and
stability categories (default values are assigned on the
basis of stability category; see Table 2-2)
Hm;i,k,4 Mixing height in meters for the ith wind-speed category,
kth stability category and ^th season
2-7
-------
TABLE 2-5
POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS OF WIND-SPEED AND PASQUILL STABILITY CATEGORIES*
AND MEAN WIND SPEEDS IN EACH NCDC STAR SUMMARY WIND-SPEED CATEGORY
Wind Speed (kt)
Pasguill Stability
Category 0-3 4-6 7-10 11-16 17-21 >21
A X
B X
C X
D X
E
F X
ISCLT Wind Speed
(m/sec) 1.50
(knots) 2.91
X
X X
X X X X X
X X X X X
X X
X
2.50 4.30 6.80 9.50 12.50
4.86 8.35 13.21 18.45 24.28
* Based on Turner (1964) definitions of the Pasguill stability categories.
2-8
-------
'90 180
FIGURE 2-1. The sixteen standard 22.5-degree wind direction sectors used
in STAR summaries.
2-9
-------
temperature be assigned to the E and F stability categories; and the average
seasonal temperature be assigned to the D stability category. In urban areas,
common practice is to assign the mean afternoon mixing height given by
Holzworth (1972) to the B and C stability categories, 1.5 times the mean
afternoon mixing height to the A stability category, the mean early morning
mixing height to the E and F stability categories, and the average of the mean
early morning and afternoon mixing heights to the D stability category. In
rural areas, the applicability of Holzworth early morning urban mixing heights
is questionable. Consequently, ISCLT in the Rural Mode currently assumes that
there is no restriction on vertical mixing during hours with E and F
stabilities. It is suggested that Holzworth mean afternoon mixing heights be
assigned to the B, C and D stability categories in rural areas and that 1.5
times the mean afternoon mixing height be assigned to the A stability
category. If sufficient climatological data are available, wind-profile
exponents and vertical potential temperature gradients can be assigned by the
user to each combination of wind-speed and stability categories in order to
make the long-term model site specific. In the absence of site-specific
wind-profile exponents and vertical potential temperature gradients, the
default values given in Table 2-2 are automatically used by the ISCLT program.
The ISCLT program contains a rural mode and three urban modes. A
discussion of these modes and guidance on their use is given in Section
2.2.1.1.
2.2.2 Source Input Data
Table 2-6 summarizes the source input data requirements of the ISC
Dispersion Model computer programs. As shown by the table, there are three
source types: stack, volume and area. The volume source option is also used
to simulate line sources. Source elevations above mean sea level and source
2-10
-------
TABLE 2-6
SOURCE INPUTS REQUIRED BY THE ISC MODEL PROGRAMS
Parameter
Definition
Stacks
X, Y
Zs
h
vs
d
Ts
Vsn
hb
w
L
Volume Source
(Line Source)
Q
Pollutant emission rate for concentration calculations
(mass per unit time)
Total pollutant emissions during the time period t for
which deposition is calculated (mass)
Pollutant decay coefficient (seconds'1)
X and Y coordinates of the stack (meters)
Elevation of base of stack (meters above mean sea level)
Stack height (meters)
Stack exit velocity (meters per second)
Stack inner diameter (meters)
Stack exit temperature (degrees Kelvin)
Mass fraction of particulates in the nth settling-
velocity category
Gravitational settling velocity for particulates in the
nth settling-velocity category (meters per second)
Surface reflection coefficient for particulates in the
nth settling-velocity category
Height of building adjacent to the stack (meters)
Width of building adjacent to the stack (meters)
Length of building adjacent to the stack (meters)
Same definition as for stacks
Same definition as for stacks
Same definition as for stacks
2-11
-------
TABLE 2-6
(CONTINUED)
SOURCE INPUTS REQUIRED BY THE ISC MODEL PROGRAMS
Parameter Definition
Volume Source
(Line Source) (Continued)
X, Y X and Y coordinates of the center of the volume source or
of each volume source used to represent a line source
(meters)
Zs Elevation of the ground surface at the point of the center
of each volume source (meters above mean sea level)
H Height of the center of each volume source above the
ground surface (meters)
oyo Initial horizontal dimension (meters)
0IO Initial vertical dimension (meters)
4>n Same definition as for stacks
Vsn Same definition as for stacks
Yn Same definition as for stacks
Area Source
QA Pollutant emission rate for concentration calculations
(mass per unit time per unit area)
QAT Total pollutant emissions during the time period t for
which deposition is calculated (mass per unit area)
n Same definition as for stacks
Vsn Same definition as for stacks
Yn Same definition as for stacks
-------
locations with respect to a user-specified origin are required for all
sources. If the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinate system is used
to define receptor locations, UTM coordinates can only be used to define
source locations if a Cartesian receptor array is used. With a polar receptor
array, the origin is at (X=0, Y=0). The X and Y coordinates of the other
sources with respect to this origin are then obtained from a plant layout
drawn to scale. The x axis is positive to the east and the y axis is positive
to the north. Note that the origin of the polar receptor array is always at
X=0, Y=0.
The pollutant emission rate is also required for each source. If the
pollutant is depleted by any mechanism that can be described by time-dependent
exponential decay, the user may enter a decay coefficient Y. Note that if
SOz is modelled in the urban mode, and the regulatory default option is
chosen, a decay half life of 4 hours is automatically assigned. The
parameters <|>n, Vsn, and y» are only input if concentration or
deposition calculations are being made for particulates with appreciable
gravitational settling velocities (diameters greater than about 20
micrometers). Particulate emissions from each source can be divided by the
user into a maximum of 20 gravitational settling-velocity categories.
Emission rates used by the short-term model program ISCST may be held constant
or may be varied as follows:
• By hour of the day
• By season or month
• By hour of the day and season
• By wind-speed and stability categories (applies to fugitive
sources of wind-blown dust)
Emission rates used by the long-term model program ISCLT may be annual average
rates or may be varied by season or by wind-speed and stability categories.
2-13
-------
Additional source inputs required for stacks include the physical
stack height, the stack exit velocity, the stack inner diameter, and the
stack exit temperature. For an area source or a volume source, the
dimensions of the source and the effective emission height are entered in
place of these parameters. If a stack is located on or adjacent to a
building and the stack height to building height ratio is less than 2.5,
the length (L) and width (W) of the building are required as source
inputs in order to include aerodynamic wake effects in the model
calculations. The building wake effects option is automatically
exercised if building dimensions are entered.
2.2.3 Receptor Data
The ISC Dispersion Model computer programs allow the user to select
either a Cartesian (X, Y) or a polar (r, 9) receptor grid system. In
the Cartesian system, the x-axis is positive to the east of a
user-specified origin and the y-axis is positive to the north. In the
polar system, r is the radial distance measured from the origin (X=0,
Y=0) and the angle 9 (azimuth bearing) is measured clockwise from
north. If the industrial source complex is comprised of multiple sources
that are not located at the same point, a Cartesian coordinate system is
usually more convenient than the polar coordinate system. Additionally,
if the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinate system is used to
define source locations and/or to extract the elevations of receptor
points from USGS topographic maps, the UTM system can also be used in the
ISC Model calculations. Discrete (arbitrarily placed) receptor points
corresponding to the locations of air quality monitors, elevated terrain
features, the property boundaries of the industrial source complex or
other points of interest can be used with either coordinate system.
2-14
-------
In the polar coordinate system, receptor points are usually spaced at
10-degree intervals on concentric rings. Thus, there are 36 receptors on
each ring. The radial distances from the origin to the receptor rings
are user selected and are generally set equal to the distances to the
expected maximum ground-level concentrations for the major pollutant
sources under the most frequent stability and wind-speed combinations.
Estimates of these distances can be obtained from the PTPLU computer
program (Pierce and Turner, 1982) or from preliminary calculations using
the ISCST computer program. The maximum number of receptor points is
determined by factors such as the number of sources and the desired
output (see Equation (3-1) for the short-term model and Equations (4-1),
(4-2), and (4-3) for the long-term model). An example of a polar
receptor array is shown in Figure 2-2.
In the Cartesian coordinate system, the X and Y coordinates of the
receptors are specified by the user. The spacing of grid points is not
required to be uniform so that the density of grid points can be greatest
in the area of the expected maximum ground-level concentrations. For
example, assume that an industrial source complex is comprised of a
number of major sources, contained within a 1-kilometer square, whose
maximum ground-level concentrations are expected to occur at downwind
distances ranging from 500 to 1000 meters. The Cartesian receptor grid
(X and Y = 0, +200, +400, +600, +800, +1000, +1200, +1500, +2000, +3000)
illustrated in Figure 2-3 provides a dense spacing of grid points in the
areas where the highest concentrations are expected to occur. As shown
by Figure 2-3, use of the Cartesian system requires that some of the
receptor points be located within the property of the source complex. If
a receptor is located within 1 meter of a source, or within 3 building
heights (or 3 building widths, if the width is less than the height) of a
2-15
-------
* •. •
• •
•
• •
t
•
FIGURE 2-2. Example of a polar receptor grid. The stippled area shows the
property of a hypothetical industrial source complex.
2-16
-------
3UVJU
2000
1000
0
-1000
-2000
-3000
-30
•
00 -2000 -1000
-•
:~-:
•t ••
•'v
1
.-
"•~ •:
-j,v'
:•.--
*j.
V.
•'-.
.•.
--••
^.
,
,f
0
1000 2000 3O
FIGURE 2-3. Example of an irregularly-spaced Cartesian receptor grid. The
stippled area shows the property of a hypothetical industrial
source complex.
2-17
-------
source, a warning message is printed and concentrations are not
calculated for the source-receptor combination. The user should be
cautioned, however, that while the dispersion curves have been
extrapolated down from 100m to 1m, predicted concentrations at these very
close source-receptor distances may be suspect. Comparison of Figures
2-2 and 2-3 shows that, for the hypothetical industrial source complex
described above, the Cartesian receptor array is more likely to detect
the maximum concentrations produced by the combined emissions from the
various sources within the industrial source complex than is the polar
receptor array.
As noted above, discrete (arbitrarily spaced) receptor points may be
entered using either a polar or a Cartesian coordinate system. In
general, discrete receptor points are placed at the locations of air
quality monitors, the boundaries of the property of an industrial source
complex or at other points of interest. However, discrete receptor
points can be used for many purposes. For example, assume that a
proposed coal-fired power plant will be located approximately 30
kilometers from a National Park that is a Class I (pristine air quality)
area and that it is desired to determine whether the 3-hour and 24-hour
Class I Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Increments for
SOz will be exceeded on more than 18 days per year. The angular
dimensions of the areas within which the 3-hour and 24-hour Class I PSD
Increments of SOz are exceeded are usually less than 10 degrees. It
follows that a polar coordinate system with a 10-degree angular
separation of receptors is not adequate to detect all occurrences of
3-hour and 24-hour SOz concentrations above the short-term Class I
SOz Increments. The user may therefore wish to place discrete
receptors at 1-degree intervals along the boundary of and within the
Class I areo.
2-18
-------
If model calculations are to be made for an industrial source complex
located in terrain exceeding the height of the lowest stack, the elevation
above mean sea level of each receptor must be input. If the elevation of any
receptor exceeds the height of any stack or the effective emission height of
any volume source, the elevation of the receptor is automatically reduced to
.005 meters below the stack height (emission height for volume source) for
each stack. After computation from this source, the elevation is set back to
its original value. However, the user is cautioned that concentrations at
these receptors may not be valid.
2.3 Plume Rise JFojrmulas
The Briggs plume rise equations are discussed below. The description
follows Appendix B of the Addendum to the MPTER User's Guide (Chico and
Catalano, 1986) for plumes unaffected by building wakes. The distance
dependent momentum plume rise equations, as described in (Bowers, et al.,
1979) are used with building downwash calculations.
2.3.1 Wind Profile
The wind power lav? is used to adjust the observed wind speed ui from the
measurement height zi (default value of 10 meters) to that at the emission
height h. The equation is of the form:
u = ui (h/Zl)p (2-1)
where p is the wind profile exponent. Values may be provided by the user.
Default values are given in Table 2-2.
2.3.2 Stack-1 ip Downwasjh
In order to consider stack-tip downwash, modification of the physical
stack height is performed (as a user option) following Briggs (1974, p. 4).
2-19
-------
The modified physical stack height h' is found from:
h' = h + 2d [(vs/u) - 1.5] for vs < 1.5 u (2-2)
or
h' = h for vs > 1.5 u
where h is physical stack height, vs is stack gas velocity, m s~l, and d
is inside stack top diameter, m. This h' is used throughout the remainder of
the plume height computation. If stack downwash is not considered, h' = h in
the following equations.
2.3.3 Buoyancy Flux
For most plume rise situations, the value of the Briggs buoyancy flux
parameter, F, in m4 s"3 is needed. The following equation is equivalent
to equation (12), (Briggs, 1975, p. 63):
F = gvs d2AT/4Ts (2-3)
where AT = Ts - Ta, Ts is stack gas temperature (K), and Ta is
ambient air temperature (K).
2.3.4 Unstable or Neutral Crossover Between Momentum and Buoyancy
For cases with stack gas temperature greater than ambient air temperature,
whether the plume rise is dominated by momentum or buoyancy must be
determined. The crossover temperature difference (AT)C is determined for
(1) F less than 55 and (2) F greater than or equal to 55. If the difference
between stack gas temperature and ambient air temperature, AT, exceeds the
(AT)C, the buoyant plume rise equation is used; if less than this amount,
the momentum plume rise equation is used (see below).
2-20
-------
For F less than 55, the crossover temperature difference is found by
setting Equation (5.2) (Briggs, 1969, p. 59) equal to the combination of
Equations (6) and (7) (Briggs, 1971, p. 1031) and solving for AT. The
result is:
(AT)C = 0.0297 Ts vs 1/3/d2/3 (2-4)
For F equal to or greater than 55, the crossover temperature difference is
found by setting Equation (5.2) (Briggs, 1969, p. 59) equal to the combination
of Equation (6) and (7) (Briggs, 1971, p. 1031) and solving for AT. The
result is:
(AT)C = 0.00575 Ts vs 2/3/dI/3 (2-5)
2.3.5 Unstable or Neutral Buoyancy Rise
For situations where AT exceeds (AT)C as determined above, buoyancy
is assumed to dominate. The distance to final rise xf in kilometers, is
determined from the equivalent of Equation (7), (Briggs, 1971, p. 1031), and
the distance to final rise is assumed to be 3.5 x*, where x* is the distance
at which atmospheric turbulence begins to dominate entrainment.
For F less than 55:
xf = 0.049 F5/8 (2-6)
For F equal to or greater than 55:
xf = 0.119 F2/5 (2-7)
The plume height, H, in meters, is determined from the equivalent of the
combination of Equations (6) and (7) (Briggs, 1971, p. 1031):
For F less than 55:
H = h' + 21.425 F3/Vu (2-8)
2-21
-------
For F equal to or greater than 55:
H = h' + 38.71 F3/s/u (2-9)
2.3.6 Unstable or Neutral Momentum Rise
For situations where the stack gas temperature is less than or equal to
the ambient air temperature, the assumption is made that the plume rise is
dominated by momentum. If AT is less than (AT)C from Equation (2-4) or
(2-5), the assumption is also made that the plume rise is dominated by
momentum. The plume height is calculated from Equation (5.2) (Briggs, 1969,
p. 59):
H = h' + 3d vs/u (2-10)
Briggs (1969, p. 59) suggests that this equation is most applicable when
Vs/u is greater than 4. Since momentum rise occurs quite close to the point
of release, the distance to final rise is set equal to zero.
2.3.7 Stability Parameter
For stable situations the stability parameter s is calculated from the
equation (Briggs, 1971, p. 1031):
s = g(39/3z)/Ta (2-11)
As a default approximation, for stability class E, or 5, 36/3z is taken as
0.02 K m~l, and for stability class F, or 6, 36/3z is taken as 0.035 K
m"1.
2.3.8 Stable Crossover Between Momentum and Buoyancy
For cases with stack gas temperatures greater than ambient air
temperature, determining whether the plume rise is dominated by momentum or
buoyancy is necessary. The crossover temperature difference (AT)C is
2-22
-------
found by setting Equation (59) (Briggs, 1975, p. 96) equal to Equation (4.28),
(Briggs, 1969, p. 59) and solving for AT. The result is:
(AT)C = 0.01958 Ta vs s1/2 (2-12)
If the difference between stack gas temperature and ambient air
temperature, AT, exceeds (AT)C, the plume rise is assumed to be buoyancy
dominated; if less than this amount, the plume rise is assumed to be momentum
dominated.
2.3.9 Stable Buoyancy Rise
For situations where AT exceeds (AT)C as determined above, buoyancy
is assumed to dominate. The distance to final rise, in kilometers, is
determined by the equivalent of a combination of Equations (48) and (59) in
Briggs, (1975), p. 96):
xf = 0.00207 u s~1/2 (2-13)
The plume height is determined by the equivalent of Equation (59) (Briggs,
1975, p. 96):
H = h1 + 2.6 (F/us)1/3
2.3.10 Stable Momentum Rise
Where the stack gas temperature is less than or equal to the ambient air
temperature, the assumption is made that the plume rise is dominated by
momentum. If AT is less than (AT)C as determined by (2-12), the
assumption is also made that the plume rise is dominated by momentum. The
plume height is calculated from Equation (4.28) of Briggs ((1969), p. 59):
H = h' + 1.5[vs2d2Ta/(4Tsu)]1/3s~1/s (2-15)
2-23
-------
The equation for unstable-neutral momentum rise (2-10) is also evaluated.
The lower result of these two equations is used as the resulting plume height.
2.3.11 All Conditions — Distance Less Than Distance to Final Rise -
(Gradual Rise)
Where gradual rise is to be estimated for unstable, neutral, or stable
conditions, if the distance upwind from receptor to source x, in kilometers,
is less than the distance to final rise, the equivalent of Equation (2)
(Briggs, 1972, p. 1030) is used to determine plume height:
H = h' + (160 F1/3x2/3)/u (2-16)
This height will be used only for buoyancy dominated conditions; should it
exceed the final rise for the appropriate condition, the final rise is
substituted instead.
Note that the building downwash algorithm always requires the calculation
of a distance dependent momentum plume rise. When building downwash is being
simulated, the following equations (Bowers, et al, 1979) are used to calculate
a distance dependent momentum plume rise:
a) unstable H = h' + [3 Fm x / (fij2 u2)]1/3 (2-17)
conditions
where x is the downwind distance (meters), with a maximum value
defined by xmax as follows:
Xmax = 4d (vs + 3 u)2 / (vs u) for F = 0
or
58 F 5/8 for 0 < F < 55 mVs 3
or
119 F 2/s for F > 55 m4/s3
b) stable H = h' + [3 Fm sin (s1/2 x / u)/(fij2 u s1/2)]I/3 (2-18)
conditions
where x is the downwind distance (meters), with a maximum value
defined by xmax as follows:
2-24
-------
xmax = 0.5 ir u / s1'2 for F = 0
or
ir u / s1/2 for F > 0
where fij = (1/3 + u/vs)
Fm = Ta vs 2 d2 / (4 Ts)
2.4 The ISC Short-Term Dispersion Model Equations
2.4.1 Stack Emissions
The ISC short-term concentration model for stacks uses the steady-state
Gaussian plume equation for a continuous elevated source. For each stack and
each hour, the origin of the stack's coordinate system is placed at the ground
surface at the base of the stack. The x axis is positive in the downwind
direction, the y axis is crosswind (normal) to the x axis and the z axis
extends vertically. The fixed receptor locations are converted to each
stack's coordinate system for each hourly concentration calculation. The
hourly concentrations calculated for each stack at each receptor are summed to
obtain the total concentration produced at each receptor by the combined stack
emissions.
The hourly ground-level concentration at downwind distance x (meters) and
crosswind distance y (meters) is given by:
X = KQDV (iru ay az)"' exp [-0.5 (y/ay)2] (2-19)
where:
Q = pollutant emission rate (mass per unit time)
K = a scaling coefficient to convert calculated concentrations
to desired units (default value of 1 x 106 for Q in
g/sec and concentration in ug/m3)
V = Vertical term (See Equation (2-42))
D = Decay term (See Equation (2-20))
oy, OT - standard deviation of lateral, vertical concentration
distribution (m)
u = mean wind speed (m/sec) at stack height
2-25
-------
Equation (2-19) includes a Vertical Term, a Decay Term, and dispersion
coefficients (oy and oz) as discussed below. It should be noted that
the Vertical Term includes the effects of source elevation, plume rise,
limited mixing in the vertical, and the gravitational settling and dry
deposition of larger particulates (particulates with diameters greater than
about 20 micrometers).
The Decay Term, which is a simple method of accounting for pollutant
removal by physical or chemical processes, is of the form:
D = exp (-vj» x/u) for f = 0. (2-20)
or
= 0. for y = 0. (i.e., decay not considered
when zero is input for y).
where:
^ = the decay coefficient (sec"1)
x = downwind distance (meters)
For example, if Ti/2 is the pollutant half life in seconds, the user can
obtain v{i from the relationship:
Y = 0.693/T1/2 (2-21)
The default value for <|< is zero. That is, decay is not considered in the
model calculations unless y is specified. However, a decay half life of 4
hours (
-------
2.4.1.1 The Dispersion Coefficients
a. Point Source Dispersion_Coeff icients. Equations that approximately
fit the Pasquill-Gifford curves (Turner, 1970) are used to calculate ay
(meters) and az (meters) for urban modes 1 and 2 and the rural mode. The
equations used to calculate oy are of the form:
ay = 465.11628 (x) tan(TH) (2-22)
where:
TH = 0.017453293 (c - d In x) (2-23)
In Equations (2-22) and (2-23) the downwind distance x is in kilometers, and
the coefficients c and d are listed in Table 2-7. The equation used to
calculate a, is of the form:
= axb (2-24)
where the downwind distance x is in kilometers and oz is in meters in
Equation (2-24) and the coefficients a and b are given in Table 2-8.
Tables 2-9 and 2-10 show the equations used to determine oy and az
for Urban Mode 3. These expressions were determined by Briggs as reported by
Gifford (1976) and represent a best fit to urban vertical diffusion data
reported by McElroy and Pooler (1968). The Briggs functions are assumed to be
valid for downwind distances less than 100m. However, the user is cautioned
that concentrations at receptors less than 100m from a source may be suspect.
b. Downwind and Crosswind Distances. As noted in Section 2.2.3, the ISC
Model uses either a polar or a Cartesian receptor grid as specified by the
2-27
-------
TABLE 2-7
PARAMETERS USED TO CALCULATE PASQUILL-GIFFORD ay
Pasguill
Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
E
F
oy (meters) = 465.
TH = 0.017453293
c
24.1670
18.3330
12.5000
8.3330
6.2500
4.1667
11628 (x) tan (TH)
(c - d In x)
d
2.5334
1.8096
1.0857
0.72382
0.54287
0.36191
*Where av is in meters and x is in kilometers
2-28
-------
TABLE 2-8
PARAMETERS USED TO CALCULATE PASQUILL-GIFFORD az
Pasquill
Stability
Category x (km)
A* <.10
0.10 - 0.15
0.16 - 0.20
0.21 - 0.25
0.26 - 0.30
0.31 - 0.40
0.41 - 0.50
0.51 - 3.11
>3.11
B* < .20
0.21 - 0.40
>0.40
C* All
D <.30
0.31 - 1.00
1.01 - 3.00
3.01 - 10.00
10.01 - 30.00
>30.00
az (meters)
a
122.800
158.080
170.220
179.520
217.410
258.890
346.750
453.850
**
90.673
98.483
109.300
61.141
34.459
32.093
32.093
33.504
36.650
44.053
= a xb
b
0.94470
1.05420
1.09320
1.12620
1.26440
1.40940
1.72830
2.11660
**
0.93198
0.98332
1.09710
0.91465
0.86974
0.81066
0.64403
0.60486
0.56589
0.51179
*If the calculated value of oz exceeds 5000 m, az is set to 5000 m.
**oz is equal to 5000 m.
2-29
-------
TABLE 2-8
(CONTINUED)
PARAMETERS
Pasquill
Stability
Category
E
0.
0.
1.
2.
4.
10
20
F
0.
0.
1.
2.
3.
7.
15.
30.
USED TO CALCULATE
x (km)
<.10
10 - 0.30
31 - 1.00
01 - 2.00
01 - 4.00
01 - 10.00
.01 - 20.00
.01 - 40.00
>40.00
<.20
21 - 0.70
71 - 1.00
01 - 2.00
01 - 3.00
01 - 7.00
01 - 15.00
01 - 30.00
01 - 60.00
>60.00
PASQUILL-GIFFORD a,
oz (meters) = a
a
24.260
23.331
21.628
21.628
22.534
24.703
26.970
35.420
47.618
15.209
14.457
13.953
13.953
14.823
16.187
17.836
22.651
27.074
34.219
xb
b
0.83660
0.81956
0.75660
0.63077
0.57154
0.50527
0.46713
0.37615
0.29592
0.81558
0.78407
0.68465
0.63227
0.54503
0.46490
0.41507
0.32681
0.27436
0.21716
2-30
-------
TABLE 2-9
BRIGGS FORMULAS USED TO CALCULATE McELROY-POOLER ay
Pasguill
Stability
Category
oy (meters)*
A
B
C
D
E
F
0.32 x {1.0 + 0.0004 x)
0.32 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)
0.22 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)
-1/2
0.16 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)
0.11 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)
-1/2
0.11 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)
*Where x is in meters.
TABLE 2-10
BRIGGS FORMULAS USED TO CALCULATE McELROY-POOLER az
Pasquill
Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
E
F
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
z (meters)*
.24 x
.24 x
.20 x
.14 x
.08 x
.08 x
(1.0 + 0.001 x)l/2
(1.0 + 0.001 x)1/2
(1.0 + 0.0003 x)"1
(1.0 + 0.0015 x)"1
(1.0 + 0.0015 x)-1
*Where x is in meters.
2-31
-------
user. In the polar coordinate system, the radial coordinate of the point (r,
0) is measured from the user-specified origin and angular coordinate 6 is
measured clockwise from north. In the Cartesian coordinate system, the X axis
is positive to the east of the user-specified origin and the Y axis is
positive to the north. For either type of receptor grid, the user must define
the location of each source with respect to the origin of the grid using
Cartesian coordinates. In the polar coordinate system, where the origin is
always at X=0, Y=0, the X and Y coordinates of a receptor at the point (r,
0) are given by:
X(R) = r sin 9 (2-25)
Y(R) = r cos 9 (2-26)
If the X and Y coordinates of the source are X(S) and Y(S), the downwind
distance x to the receptor is given by:
x = - (X(R) - X(S» sin DD - (Y(R) - Y(S)) cos DD (2-27)
where DD is the direction from which the wind is blowing. If any receptor is
located within 1 meter of a source, a warning message is printed and no
concentrations are calculated for the source-receptor combination. The
crosswind distance y to the receptor (see Eguation (2-19)) is given by:
y = - (Y(R) - Y(S)) sin DD - (X(R) - X(S)) cos DD (2-28)
c. Lateral and Vertical Virtual Distances. The equations in Tables (2-7)
through (2-10) define the dispersion coefficients for an ideal point source.
However, volume sources have initial lateral and vertical dimensions. Also,
as discussed below, building wake effects can enhance the initial growth of
2-32
-------
stack plumes. In these cases, lateral (xy) and vertical (xz) virtual
distances are added by the ISC Model to the actual downwind distance x for the
oy and 0Z calculations. The lateral virtual distance in kilometers
for Urban Mode 1, Urban Mode 2, and the Rural Mode is given by:
xy = (0yo/p)1/q (2-29)
where the stability-dependent coefficients p and g are given in Table 2-11 and
ayo is the standard deviation in meters of the lateral concentration
distribution at the source. Similarly, the vertical virtual distance in
kilometers for Urban Mode 1, Urban Mode 2 and the Rural mode is given by:
xz = <0zo/a)1/b (2-30)
where the coefficients a and b are obtained from Table 2-8 and 0ZO is the
standard deviation in meters of the vertical concentration distribution at the
source. It is important to note that the ISC Model programs check to ensure
that the xz used to calculate 0Z at (x + xz) in Urban Mode 1, Urban
Mode 2, and the Rural Mode is the xz calculated using the coefficients a and
b that correspond to the distance category specified by the quantity (x +
Xz).
To determine the virtual distances when Urban Mode 3 is chosen, the
functions displayed in Tables 2-9 and 2-10 are solved for x. The solutions
are quadratic formulas for the lateral virtual distances; and for vertical
virtual distances the solutions are cubic equations for stability classes A
and B, a linear equation for stability class C, and quadratic equations for
stability classes D, E, and F.
d. Procedures Used to Account for the Effects of Building Wakes on
Effluent Dispersion. The procedures used by the ISC Model to account for the
2-33
-------
TABLE 2-11
COEFFICIENTS USED TO CALCULATE LATERAL VIRTUAL DISTANCES
FOR PASQUILL-GIFFORD DISPERSION RATES
Pasquill
Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
209.14
154.46
103.26
68.26
51.06
33.92
xy = (oyo/p)l/q
q
0.890
0.902
0.917
0.919
0.921
0.919
2-34
-------
effects of the aerodynamic wakes and eddies produced by plant buildings and
structures on plume dispersion follow the suggestions of Huber and Snyder
(1976) and Huber (1977). Their suggestions are principally based on the
results of wind-tunnel experiments using a model building with a crosswind
dimension double that of the building height. The atmospheric turbulence
simulated in the wind-tunnel experiments was intermediate between the
turbulence intensity associated with the slightly unstable Pasguill C category
and the turbulence intensity associated with the neutral D category. Thus,
the data reported by Huber and Snyder reflect a specific stability, building
shape and building orientation with respect to the mean wind direction. It
follows that the ISC Model wake-effects evaluation procedures may not be
strictly applicable to all situations. However, the suggestions of Huber and
Snyder are based on the best available data and are used by the ISC Model as
interim procedures until additional data become available.
The wake-effects evaluation procedures may be applied by the user to any
stack on or adjacent to a building. The first step in the wake-effects
evaluation procedures used by the ISC Model programs is to calculate the plume
rise due to momentum alone at a distance of two building heights using
Equation (2-17) or Equation (2-18). If the plume height, given by the sum of
the stack height (no stack-tip downwash adjustment) and the momentum rise is
greater than either 2.5 building heights (2.5 hb) or the sum of the building
height and 1.5 times the building width (hb + 1.5 hw), the plume is
assumed to be unaffected by the building wake. Otherwise, the plume is
assumed to be affected by the building wake.
When the plume is affected by the building wake, the distance dependent
plume rise is used, even if the user selected final plume rise. The larger
value from the distance dependent buoyant plume rise (equation 2-16) or the
distance dependent momentum plume rise (equation 2-17 or 2-18) is used.
2-35
-------
The ISC Model programs account for the effects of building wakes by
modifying az for plumes from stacks with plume height to building height
ratios greater than 1.2 (but less than 2.5) and by modifying both ay and
a-i for plumes with plume height to building height ratios less than or
equal to 1.2. The plume height used in the plume height to stack height
ratios is the same plume height used to determine if the plume is affected by
the building wake. The ISC Model defines buildings as squat (hw > hb) or
tall (hw < hb). The building width hw is approximated by the diameter
of a circle with an area equal to the horizontal area of the building. The
ISC Model includes a general procedure for modifying oz and ay at
distances greater than 3 hb for squat buildings or 3 hw for tall
buildings. The air flow in the building cavity region is both highly
turbulent and generally recirculating. The ISC Model is not appropriate for
estimating concentrations within such regions. The ISC Model assumption that
this recirculating cavity region extends to a downwind distance of 3 hb for
a squat building or 3 hw for a tall building is most appropriate for a
building whose width is not much greater than its height. The ISC Model user
is cautioned that, for other types of buildings, receptors located at downwind
distances of 3 hb (squat buildings) or 3 hw (tall buildings) may be within
the recirculating region. Some guidance and techniques for estimating
concentrations very near buildings can be found in Barry (1964), Halitsky
(1963) and Vincent (1977) and Budney (1977).
The modified az equation for a squat building is given by:
oz' = 0.7hb + 0.067(x-3hb) for 3hb < x <10hb
or (2-31)
= oz {x + xz} for x > 10hb
2-36
-------
where the building height hb is in meters. For a tall building, Huber
(1977) suggests that the width scale hw replace hb in Equation (2-31).
The modified az equation for a tall building is then given by:
Oz' = 0.7hw + 0.067(x-3hw) for 3hw < x <10hw
or (2-32)
= oz {x + xz} for x > 10 hw
where hw is in meters. It is important to note that oz' is not
permitted to be less than the point source value given in Tables 2-8 or 2-10,
a condition that may occur with the A and B stability categories.
The vertical virtual distance xz is added to the actual downwind
distance x at downwind distances beyond 10hb (squat buildings) or 10hw
(tall buildings) in order to account for the enhanced initial plume growth
caused by the building wake. It is calculated from solutions to the equations
for rural or urban sigmas provided earlier.
As an example for the rural options. Equations (2-24) and (2-31) can be
combined to derive the vertical virtual distance xz for a squat building.
First, it follows from Equation (2-31) that the enhanced az is equal to
1.2hb at a downwind distance of 10hb in meters or 0.01 hb in
kilometers. Thus, xz for a squat building is obtained from Equation (2-24)
as follows:
CTZ {0.01 hb} = 1.2hb = a (0.01hb + xz)b (2-33)
xz = (1.2hb/a)1/b- 0.01hb (2-34)
where the stability-dependent constants a and b are given in Table 2-8.
Similarly, the vertical virtual distance for tall buildings is given by:
xz = (1.2hw/a)1/b -0.01hw (2-35)
2-37
-------
When Urban Mode 3 is selected xz is calculated from solutions to the
equations in Table 2-10 for 10hb
at a downwind distance of 10hb. The lateral virtual distance is then
calculated for this value of ay.
For building width to building height ratios hw/hb greater than 5, the
presently available data are insufficient to provide general equations for
ay. For a building that is much wider than it is tall and a stack located
toward the center of the building (i.e., away from either end), only the
height scale is considered to be significant. The modified 0y equation
for a very squat building is then given by:
0y' = 0.35hb + 0.067 (x - 3hb) for 3hb 10hb
For hw/hb greater than 5 and a stack located laterally within about
2.5 hb of the end of the building, lateral plume spread is affected by the
flow around the end of the building. With end effects, the enhancement in the
initial lateral spread is assumed not to exceed that given by Equation (2-36)
with hw replaced by 5hb. The modified ay equation is given by:
ay' = 1.75hb + 0.067 (x - 3hb) for 3hb 10hb
2-38
-------
The upper and lower bounds of the concentrations that can be expected to occur
near a building are determined respectively using Equations (2-37) and
(2-38). The user must specify whether Equation (2-37) or Equation (2-38) is
to be used in the model calculations. In the absence of user instructions,
the ISC Model uses Equation (2-37) if the building width to building height
ratio hw/hb exceeds 5.
Although Equation (2-37) provides the highest concentration estimates for
squat buildings with building width to building height ratios hw/hb
greater than 5, the equation is applicable only to a stack located near the
v
center of the building when the wind direction is perpendicular to the long
side of the building (i.e., when the air flow over the portion of the building
containing the source is two dimensional). Thus, Equation (2-38) generally is
more appropriate than Equation (2-37). It is believed that Equations (2-37)
and (2-38) provide reasonable limits on the extent of the lateral enhancement
of dispersion and that these equations are adequate until additional data are
available to evaluate the flow near very wide buildings.
The modified ay equation for a tall building is given by:
ay = 0.35hw + 0.067(x - 3hw) for 3hw 10hw
The ISC Model programs print a warning message and do not calculate
concentrations for any source-receptor combination where the source-receptor
separation is less than 1 meter or 3hb for a squat building or 3hw for a
tall building. It should be noted that, for certain combinations of stability
and building height and/or width, the vertical and/or lateral plume dimensions
indicated for a point source by the dispersion curves at a downwind distance
of ten building heights or widths can exceed the values given by Equation
(2-31) or (2-32) and by Equation (2-36), (2-37). Consequently, the ISC Model
2-39
-------
programs do not permit the virtual distances xy and xz to be less than
zero.
It is important to note that the use of a single effective building width
hw for all wind directions is a simplification that is required to enable
the ISC Model computer programs to operate within the constraints imposed on
the programs without sacrificing other desired ISC Model features. The
effective building width hw affects az for tall buildings (hw < hb)
and CTy for squat buildings (hw > hb) with plume height to building
height ratios less than or equal to 1.2. Tall buildings typically have
lengths and widths that are equivalent so that the use of one value of hw
for all wind directions does not significantly affect the accuracy of the
calculations. However, the use of one value of hw for squat buildings with
plume height to building height ratios less than or equal to 1.2 affects the
accuracy of the calculations near the source if the building length is large
in comparison with the building width. For example, if the building height
and width are approximately the same and the building length is equal to five
building widths, the ISC Model at a downwind distance of 10hb underestimates
the centerline concentration or deposition by about 40 percent for winds
parallel to the building's long side and overestimates the centerline
concentration (or deposition) by about 60 percent for winds normal to the
building's long side. Thus, the user should exercise caution in interpreting
the results of concentration (or deposition) calculations for receptors
located near a squat building if the stack height to building height ratio is
less than or equal to 1.2.
The recommended procedure for calculating accurate concentration (or
deposition) values for receptors located near squat buildings consists of two
phases. First, the appropriate ISC Model program is executed using the
effective building width hw derived from the building length and width.
2-40
-------
Second, the ISC Model calculations are repeated for the receptors near the
source with highest calculated concentration (or deposition) values using
receptor-specific values of hw. For example, assume that the ISCST program
is used with a year of sequential hourly data to calculate maximum 24-hour
average concentrations and that the highest calculated concentrations occur at
Receptor A on Julian Day 18 and at Receptor B on Julian Day 352. The
crosswind building width hw associated with the wind directions required to
transport emissions to Receptors A and B may be obtained from a scale drawing
of the building. The ISCST program is then executed for Receptor A only on
Day 18 only using the appropriate hw value for Receptor A. Similarly, the
ISCST program is executed for Receptor B only on Day 352 only using the
appropriate hw value for Receptor B.
e) Procedures Used to Account for Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion
The method of Pasquill (1976) is a user option to account for the initial
dispersion of plumes caused by turbulent motion of the plume and turbulent
entrainment of ambient air. With this method the effective vertical
dispersion (aze) is calculated as follows:
tfze = [
-------
receptor is located beyond the distance to final rise. Thus, if the user
elects to use final plume rise at all receptors the transitional plume rise is
used in the calculation of buoyancy-induced dispersion and the final plume
rise is used in the concentration equations.
2.4.1.2 The Vertical Term
a. The Vertical Term for Gases and Small Particulates. In general, the
effects on ambient concentrations of gravitational settling and dry deposition
can be neglected for gaseous pollutants and small particulates (diameters less
than about 20 micrometers). The Vertical Term is then given by:
00
V = exp[-0.5(H/oz)2] + I (exp[-0.5(Hi/az)2] + exp[-0.5(H2/az)2]} (2-42)
whe re:
H = h + Ah
H! = 2iHm - H
H2 = 2iHm + H
Hm = mixing height
The infinite series term in Equation (2-42) accounts for the effects of the
restriction on vertical plume growth at the top of the mixing layer. As shown
by Figure 2-4, the method of image sources is used to account for multiple
reflections of the plume from the ground surface and at the top of the surface
mixing layer. It should be noted that, if the effective stack height H
exceeds the mixing height Hm/ the plume is assumed to remain elevated and
the ground-level concentration is set equal to zero.
Equation (2-42) assumes that the mixing height in rural and urban areas is
known for all stability categories. As explained below, the meteorological
2-42
-------
MIXING HEIGHT (Hm)
2Hm-H/\ / /
1 /xX \ / /
\ / / / /
y< //
\ / /
/ \ Y /
v Ny v7
FIGURE 2-4. The method of multiple plume images used to simulate plume
reflection in the ISC Model.
2-43
-------
preprocessor program uses mixing heights derived from twice-daily mixing
heights calculated using the Holzworth (1972) procedures. These mixing
heights are believed to be representative, at least on the average, of mixing
heights in urban areas under all stabilities and of mixing heights in rural
areas during periods of unstable or neutral stability. However, because the
Holzworth minimum mixing heights are intended to include the heat island
effect for urban areas, their applicability to rural areas during periods of
stable meteorological conditions (E or F stability) is questionable.
Consequently, the ISC Model in the Rural Mode currently deletes the infinite
series term in Equation (2-42) for the E and F stability categories.
The Vertical Term defined by Equation (2-42) changes the form of the
vertical concentration distribution from Gaussian to rectangular (uniform
concentration within the surface mixing layer) at long downwind distances.
Consequently, in order to reduce computational time without a loss of
accuracy, Equation (2-19) is changed to the form:
X = KQD(2ir)-1/2(uayHm)-1 exp[-0.5(y/ay) 2 ] (2-43)
at downwind distances where the oz/Hm ratio is greater than or equal to
1.6. K is defined in Equation (2-19), and D is defined in Equation (2-20).
The meteorological preprocessor program, RAMMET, used by the ISC
short-term model uses an interpolation scheme to assign hourly rural or urban
mixing heights on the basis of the early morning and afternoon mixing heights
calculated using the Holzworth (1972) procedures. The procedures used to
interpolate hourly mixing heights in urban and rural areas are illustrated in
Figure 2-5, where:
Hm{max} = maximum mixing height on a given day
Hm{min} = minimum mixing height on a given day
2-44
-------
X
o
UJ
X
o
z
X
DAY,.,
(Neutral) ^
^"^ 1
*,'"' '
(Stable)
/
_ I
HJfinln}
I . ,
"~nr^ —
\
(Stable)
\
\
max} \
\
\
\
i
i |
(Neutral) DAY,
"-— ,
(
1
1
/H»
(Stable)
Hj{mln}
1 , ,
^
(Stable)
\
{max} \
\
i
DAYu.,
^ (Neutral)
^^^ (Neutral)
/"I
/ Hm
""(Stable)
i i '
~\
(Stable)
maxf
j
i ,
MN SR 1400 SS MN SR 1400 SS MN SR
TIME (LSI)
(a) Urban Mixing Heights
1400 SS MN
t-
o
UJ
X
o
X
2
•
(Neutral}^-,-
^^^" i
^^ 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
j
(Stable)
/
/
i i
*"'i-i
moxj
i
«^»-» w I
-^.^^ (Neutral)
^'"""^""'•••^
/ '
/
/Hm •
1
1
I
1
(Stable)
/
/
/ i
1 "x^^
'^^^^
•»
maxf
» j
i
•*"• i+i
^^^^|Neutral)
^•^^.^ ^^*^**<
i i
/
/
/
/
(Stable)
/ Hm
/
i \
max}
i
MN SR 1400 SS MN SR 1400 SS MN SR I40O SS MN
TIME (LST)
(b) Rural Mixing Heights
FIGURE 2-5. Schematic illustration of (a) urban and (b) rural mixing height
interpolation procedures.
2-45
-------
MN = midnight
SR = sunrise
SS = sunset
The interpolation procedures are functions of the stability category for the
hour before sunrise. If the hour before sunrise is neutral, the mixing
heights that apply are indicated by the dashed lines labeled neutral in
Figure 2-5. If the hour before sunset is stable, the mixing heights that
apply are indicated by the dashed lines labeled stable. It should be pointed
out that there is a discontinuity in the rural mixing height at sunrise if the
preceding hour is stable. As explained above, because of the uncertainties
about the applicability of Holzworth mixing heights to rural areas during
periods of E and F stability, the ISC Model in the Rural Mode ignores the
interpolated mixing heights for E and F stabilities and effectively sets the
mixing height equal to a very high value.
b. The Vertical Term in Elevated Terrain. The ISC Model makes the
following assumption about plume behavior in elevated terrain:
• The plume axis remains at the plume stabilization height above
mean sea level as it passes over elevated or depressed terrain.
• The mixing height is terrain following.
• The wind speed is a function of height above the surface (see
Equation (2-1)).
Thus, a modified plume stabilization height H' is substituted for the
effective stack height H in the Vertical term given by Equation (2-42). For
example, the effective plume stabilization height at the point (X, Y) is given
by:
H' = H + zs - z (2-44)
2-46
-------
where:
zs = height above mean sea level of the base of the stack
z = height above mean sea level of the receptor
It should also be noted that, as recommended by EPA, the ISC model now
"truncates" terrain at stack height as follows: if the terrain height (z -
zs) exceeds stack height, h, for a stack or emission height, H, for a volume
source (see Section 2.4.2), the elevation of the receptor is automatically
reduced to .005 meters below the stack height (emission height for volume
source). The user is cautioned that concentrations at these complex terrain
receptors are subject to considerable uncertainty. Figure 2-6 illustrates the
terrain-adjustment procedures used by the ISC Model.
c. The Vertical Term for Large Particulates. The dispersion of
particulates or droplets with significant gravitational settling velocities
differs from that of gaseous pollutants and small particulates in that the
larger particulates are brought to the surface by the combined processes of
atmospheric turbulence and gravitational settling. Additionally, gaseous
pollutants and small particulates tend to be reflected from the surface, while
larger particulates that come in contact with the surface may be completely or
partially retained at the surface. The ISC Model Vertical Term for large
particulates includes the effects of both gravitational settling and dry
deposition. Gravitational settling is assumed to result in a tilted plume
with the plume axis inclined to the horizontal at an angle give by arctan
(Vs/u) where Vs is the gravitational settling velocity. A user-specified
fraction y °f the material that reaches the ground surface by the combined
processes of gravitational settling and atmospheric turbulence is assumed to
be reflected from the surface. Figure 2-7 illustrates the vertical
2-47
-------
Ol
-a
o
oo
O)
T3
0)
(O
S_
S-
O)
x
ai
o
o
S-
o
ro
.C
CU
J3
OJ
c
o
1/1
zs
CVJ
cu
s-
3
2-48
-------
o2lg
k-N fc-£
•-x.
§
5
O
J
a.
n
o
c
01
o
c
o
u
CD
O
c
o
M —•
3
i-l T3
^ C
I
CN
pi
i—i
ta
2-49
-------
concentration profiles for complete reflection from the surface (y equal to
unity), 50-percent reflection from the surface (y equal to 0.5) and complete
retention at the surface (y equal to zero).
For a given particulate source, the user must subdivide the total
particulate emissions into N settling-velocity categories (the maximum value
of N is 20). The ground-level concentration of particulates with settling
velocity Vsn is given by Equation (2-19) with the Vertical Term defined as
(Dumbauld and Bjorklund, 1975):
00 CD
V =0.5 <|>n [I (Ai + A2) + I (As + A4)] (2-45)
i=0 i=l
where:
<|>n = mass fraction of particulates in the nth settling - velocity
category
A! = Yn exp [-0.5 {(Hi + Hv)/oz)2]
A2 = Yn*1 exp [-0.5 «H2 - Hv)/oz)2]
A3 = Yn exp [-0.5«H2 - Hv)/az)2]
A4 = Yn"1 exp [-0.5({Hi + Hv)/az)2]
Yn = reflection coefficient for particulates in the nth settling -
velocity category (Set equal to unity for complete relection)
Hv = Vsn x/u
Vsn = settling velocity of particulates in the nth settling
velocity category
Hi and Hz were defined previously for equation (2-42). The total
concentration is computed by the program by summing over the N settling-
velocity categories. The optional algorithm used to calculate dry deposition
is discussed in Section 2.4.3.
Use of Equation (2-45) requires a knowledge of both the particulate size
distribution and the density of the particulates emitted by each source. The
2-50
-------
total particulate emissions for each source are subdivided by the user into a
maximum of 20 categories and the gravitational settling velocity is calculated
for the mass-mean diameter of each category. The mass-mean diameter is given
by:
d = [0.25 (d23 + di2d2 + did22 + di3)]l/3 (2-46)
where di and d2 are the lower and upper bounds of the particle-size
category. McDonald (1960) gives simple techniques for calculating the
gravitational settling velocity for all sizes of particulates. For
particulates with a density on the order of 1 gram per cubic centimeter and
diameters less than about 80 micrometers, the settling velocity is given by:
Vs = 2pgr2/9|a (2-47)
where:
Vs = settling velocity (cm • sec"1)
p = particle density (gm • cm"3)
g = acceleration due to gravity (980 cm • sec"2)
r = particle radius (cm)
u = absolute viscosity of air (u ~ 1.83 x 10~4 gm • cm"1 • sec"1)
It should be noted that the settling velocity calculated using Equation (2-47)
must be converted by the user from centimeters per second to meters per second
for use in the model calculations.
The reflection coefficient yn can be estimated for each particle-size
category using Figure 2-8 and the settling velocity calculated for the
mass-mean diameter. If it is desired to include the effects of gravitational
settling in calculating ambient particulate concentrations while at the same
time excluding the effects of deposition, y« should be set equal to unity
for all settling velocities. On the other hand, if it is desired to calculate
2-51
-------
0.30
0.25
u
«
S
U
o
UJ
o
a
0.20-
0.15-
0.10-
0.05 -
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
REFLECTION COEFFICIENT yn
1.0
FIGURE 2-8. Relationship between the gravitational settling velocity V
and the reflection coefficient Yn suggested by Dumbauld,
et al. ( 1976).
sn
2-52
-------
maximum possible deposition, Y« should be set equal to zero for all
settling velocities. The effects of dry deposition for gaseous pollutants may
be estimated by setting the settling velocity Vsn equal to zero and the
reflection coefficient y equal to the amount of material assumed to be
reflected from the surface. For example, if 20 percent of a gaseous pollutant
that reaches the surface is assumed to be retained at the surface by
vegetation uptake or other mechanisms, ^n is equal to 0.8.
The derivation of Equation (2-45) assumes that the terrain is flat or
gently rolling. Consequently, the gravitational settling and dry deposition
options cannot be used for sources located in complex terrain without
violating mass continuity. However, the effects of gravitational settling
alone can be estimated for sources located in complex terrain by setting
yn equal to unity for each settling velocity category. This procedure
will tend to overestimate ground-level concentrations, especially at the
longer downwind distances, because it neglects the effects of dry deposition.
It should be noted that Equation (2-45) assumes that oz is a
continuous function of downwind distance. Also, Equation (2-45) does not
simplify for az/Hm greater than 1.6 as does Equation (2-42). As shown
by Table 2-8, oz for the very unstable A stability category attains a
maximum value of 5,000 meters at 3.11 kilometers. Because Equation (2-45)
requires that az be a continuous function of distance, the coefficients a
and b given in Table 2-8 for A stability and the 0.51- to 3.11-kilometer range
are used by the ISC Model in calculations beyond 3.11 kilometers.
Consequently, this introduces uncertainties in the results of the calculations
beyond 3.11 kilometers for A stability.
2-53
-------
2.4.2 Area, Volume and Line Source Emissions
2.4.2.1 General
The area and volume sources options of the ISC Model are used to simulate
the effects of emissions from a wide variety of industrial sources. In
general, the ISC area source model is used to simulate the effects of fugitive
emissions from sources such as storage piles and slag dumps. The ISC volume
source model is used to simulate the effects of emissions from sources such as
building roof monitors and line sources (for example, conveyor belts and rail
lines).
2.4.2.2 The Short-Term Area Source Model
The ISC area source model is based on the equation for a finite crosswind
line source. Individual area sources are required to have the same
north-south and east-west dimensions. However, as shown by Figure 2-9. the
effects of an area source with an irregular shape can be simulated by dividing
the area source into multiple squares that approximate the geometry of the
area source. Note that the size of the individual area sources in Figure 2-9
varies; the only requirement is that each area source must be square. The
ground-level concentration at downwind distance x (measured from the downwind
edge of the area source) and crosswind distance y is given by:
X = KQAx0DVE (2irr1/2 (uo,)'1 (2-48)
where:
V = vertical term
D = decay term
E = erf [{0.5 x'0 + y)(2"1/2 o^1)] + erf [(0.5x'0 - y) 2"1/2 a^1]
QA = area source emission rate (mass per unit area per unit time)
x0 = length of the side of the area source (m)
2-54
-------
•9
'10
FIGURE 2-9. Representation of an irregularly shaped area source by 11
square area sources.
2-55
-------
x'o = effective crosswind width = 2x0(ir)'1/2 (m)
K = units scaling coefficient (Equation (2-19))
and the Vertical Term is given by Equation (2-42) or Equation (2-45) with the
effective emission height H assigned by the user. In general, H should be set
equal to the physical height of the source of fugitive emissions. For
example, the emission height H of a slag dump is the physical height of the
slag dump. A vertical virtual distance, given by x0 in kilometers, is added
to the actual downwind distance x for the az calculations. If a receptor
is located within x'0/2 plus 1 meter of the center of an area source, a
warning message is printed and no concentrations are calculated for the
source-receptor combination. However, prcgram execution is not terminated.
It is recommended that, if the separation between an area source and a
receptor is less than the side of the area source x0, the area source be
subdivided into smaller area sources. If the source-receptor separation is
less than x0, the ISC Model tends to overpredict the area source
concentration. The degree of overprediction is a function of stability, the
orientation of the receptor with respect to the area source and the mean wind
direction. However, the degree of overprediction near the area source rarely
exceeds 30 percent.
2.4.2.3 The Short-Term Volume Source Model
Equation (2-19) is also used to calculate ground-level concentrations
produced by volume-source emissions. If the volume source is elevated, the
user assigns the emission height H. The user also assigns initial lateral
(ayo) and vertical (azo) dimensions for the volume source. Lateral
(xy) and vertical (xz) virtual distances are added to the actual downwind
distance x for the ay and oz calculations. The virtual distances are
calculated from solutions to the sigma equations as is done for point sources.
2-56
-------
The volume source model is used to simulate the effects of emissions from
sources such as building roof monitors and line sources (for example, conveyor
belts and rail lines). As with the area source model, the north-south and
east-west dimensions of each volume source used in the model must be the
same. Table 2-12 summarizes the general procedures suggested for estimating
initial lateral (ayo) and vertical (azo) dimensions for single volume
sources and for multiple volume sources used to represent a line source. In
the case of a long and narrow line source such as a rail line, it may not be
practical to divide the source into N volume sources, where N is given by the
length of the line source divided by its width. The user can obtain an
approximate representation of the line source by placing a smaller number of
volume sources at equal intervals along the line source. In general, the
spacing between individual volume sources should not be greater than twice the
width of the line source. However, a larger spacing can be used if the ratio
of the minimum source-receptor separation and the spacing between individual
volume sources is greater than about 3. In these cases, concentrations at the
nearest receptors may be underestimated by 10 to 15 percent. At longer
downwind distances, concentrations calculated using fewer than N volume
sources to represent the line source converge to the concentrations calculated
using N volume sources to represent the line source as long as sufficient
volume sources are used to preserve the horizontal geometry of the line source.
Figure 2-10 illustrates representations of a curved line source by
multiple volume sources. Emissions from a line source or narrow volume source
represented by multiple volume sources are divided equally among the
individual sources unless there is a known spatial variation in emissions.
Setting the initial lateral dimension ayo equal to W/2.15 in
Figure 2-10(a) or 2W/2.15 in Figure 2-10(b) results in overlapping Gaussian
distributions for the individual sources. If the wind direction is normal to
2-57
-------
TABLE 2-12
SUMMARY OF SUGGESTED PROCEDURES FOR ESTIMATING
INITIAL LATERAL DIMENSIONS (ayo) AND
INITIAL VERTICAL DIMENSIONS (o20) FOR VOLUME AND LINE SOURCES
Type of Source
Procedure for Obtaining
Initial Dimension
(a) Initial Lateral Dimensions (ayo)
Single Volume Source
Line Source Represented by Adjacent oyo
Volume Sources (see Figure 2-10(a))
Line Source Represented by Separated ayo
Volume Sources (see Figure 2-10(b))
= length of side divided by
4.3
= length of side divided by
2.15
= center to center distance
divided jy 2.15
(b) Initial Vertical Dimensions (azo)
Surface-Based Source (H~0)
= vertical dimension of
source divided by 2.15
Elevated Source (H>0) on or Adjacent
to a Building
Elevated Source (H>0) not on or
Adjacent to a Building
= building height divided by
2.15
= vertical dimension of
source divided by 4.3
2-58
-------
t
w
•10
•8
•7
•
2
•
3
•
4
•
5
(o) EXACT REPRESENTATION
2W
t
W
2W
•5
•4
(b) APPROXIMATE REPRESENTATION
FIGURE 2-10. Exact and approximate representations of a line source by
multiple volume sources.
2-59
-------
a straight line source that is represented by multiple volume sources, the
initial crosswind concentration distribution is uniform except at the edges of
the line source. The doubling of ayo by the user in the approximate
line-source representation in Figure 2-10{b) is offset by the fact that the
emission rates for the individual volume sources are also doubled by the user.
There are two types of volume sources: surface-based sources, which may
also be modeled as area sources, and elevated sources. An example of a
surface-based source is a surface rail line. The effective emission height H
for a surface-based source is usually set equal to zero. An example of an
elevated source is an elevated rail line with an effective emission height H
set equal to the height of the rail line.
2.4.3 The ISC Short-Term Dry Deposition Model
2.4.3.1 General
The Industrial Source Complex short-term dry deposition model is based on
the Dumbauld, et al. (1976) deposition model. This model, which is an
advanced version of the Cramer, et al. (1972) deposition model, assumes that a
user-specified fraction y« °f the material that comes into contact with
the ground surface by the combined processes of atmospheric turbulence and
gravitational settling is reflected from the surface (see Section 2.4.1.2.c).
The reflection coefficient Y"' which is a function of settling velocity
and the ground surface for particulates and of the ground surface for gaseous
pollutants, is analogous in purpose to the deposition velocity used in other
deposition models. The Cramer, et al. (1972) deposition model has closely
matched ground-level deposition patterns for droplets with diameters above
about 30 micrometers, while the more generalized Dumbauld, et al. (1976)
deposition model has closely matched observed deposition patterns for both
large and small droplets.
2-60
-------
Section 2. 4.1. 2. c discusses the selection of the reflection coefficient
yn as well as the computation of the gravitational settling velocity
Vsn. The ISC dry deposition model should not be applied to sources located
in elevated terrain. Also, as noted in Section 2. 4.1. 2. c, uncertainties in
the deposition calculations are likely for the A stability category if
deposition calculations are made at downwind distances greater than 3.11
kilometers. Deposition and ambient concentration calculations cannot be made
in a single program execution. In an individual computer run, the ISC Model
calculates either concentration (including the effects of gravitational
settling and dry deposition) or dry deposition.
2.4.3.2 Stack and Volume Source Emissions
Deposition for particulates in the n settling-velocity category or a
gaseous pollutant with zero settling velocity Vsn and a reflection
coefficient yn is given by:
DEP = K QT VdD (1-Yn) 4>n (21royazx)-1 exp [-0.5(y/ay) 2 ] (2-49)
where the Vertical Term is defined as follows:
00
2
Vd = [bH + (1 - b) Hv] exp [-0.5«H - Hv)/az)2] + I (BiB2 + B3B4)
i=l
i - (l-b) Hv]
B2 = exp [-0.5((Hi + Hv)/az)2]
B3 = Y' [b H2 + (l-b) Hv]
B4 = exp [-0.5 «H2 - Hv)/az)2]
K, D, Hv, Hi, and H2 were defined previously (Equations (2-19), (2-20),
(2-40), and (2-43)). The parameter QT is the totaj amount of material
emitted during the time period T for which the deposition calculation is
made. For example, QT is the total amount of material emitted during a
2-61
-------
1-hour period if an hourly deposition is calculated. For time periods longer
than an hour, the program sums the deposition calculated for each hour to
obtain the total deposition. The coefficient b is the average value of the
exponent b for the interval between the source and the downwind distance x
(see Tables 2-7 to 2-10). Values of b exist for both the Pasguill-Gif ford
dispersion coefficients and Briggs-McElroy-Pooler curves. In the case of a
volume source, the user must specify the effective emission height H and the
initial source dimensions oyo and 020.
2.4.3.3 Area Source Emissions
For area source emissions Equation (2-49) is changed to the form:
DEPn = KQAT VdDE x0 {l-yn)
-------
a common coordinate system (either polar or Cartesian as specified by the
user) and summed to obtain the total due to all sources.
For a single stack, the mean seasonal concentration at a point (r > 1 m,
0) with respect to the stack is given by:
Xa = 2K (2tr)"1/2 (rA9')~' I QfSVD(uaz)"' (2-51)
i, j ,k
where
Q = pollutant emission rate (mass per unit time), for the
ith wind-speed category, kth stability category and
4th season
f = frequency of occurrence of the ith wind-speed category,
jth wind-direction category and kth stability
category for the 4th season
A9' = the sector width in radians
S = a smoothing function similar to that of the AQDM (see
Section 2.5.1.3)
u = mean wind speed (m/sec) at stack height for the ith
wind-speed category and kth stability category
oz = standard deviation of the vertical concentration
distribution (m) for the kth stability category
V = the Vertical Term for the ith wind-speed category,
kth stability category and ^"th season
D = the Decay Term for the ith wind speed category and
kth stability category
y = the decay coefficient (sec"1)
K = units scaling coefficient
The mean annual concentration at the point (r,9) is calculated from the
seasonal concentrations using the expression:
4
Xa = 0.25 I X* (2-52)
2-63
-------
The terms in Equation (2-51) correspond to the terms discussed in
Section 2.4.1 for the short-term model except that the parameters are defined
for discrete categories of wind-speed, wind-direction, stability and season.
The various terms are briefly discussed in the following subsections. In
addition to stack emissions, the ISC long-term concentration model considers
emissions from area and volume sources. These model options are discussed in
Section 2.5.2. The optional algorithms for calculating dry deposition are
discussed in Section 2.5.3.
2.5.1.1 The Dispersion Coefficients
a. Point Source Dispersion Coefficients. See Section 2.4.1.1.a for a
discussion of the procedures used to calculate the standard deviation of the
vertical concentration distribution oz for point sources (sources without
initial dimensions).
b. Downwind and Crosswind Distances. See the discussion given in
Section 2.4.1.1.b.
c. Vertical Virtual Distances. See Section 2.4.1.1.C for a discussion
of the procedures used to calculate vertical virtual distances. The lateral
virtual distance is given by:
xy = r0 cot (Ae'/2) (2-53)
where r0 is the effective source radius. For volume sources (see Section
2.5.2), the program sets r0 equal to 2.15 ayo, where ayo is the
initial lateral dimension. For area sources (see Section 2.5.2), the program
sets r0 equal to x0/ir where x0 is the length of the side of the area
source. For plumes affected by building wakes (see Section 2.4.1.1.d), the
2-64
-------
program sets r0 equal to 2.15 ay' where oy' is given for squat
buildings by Equation (2-36), (2-37), or (2-38) for downwind distances between
3 and 10 building heights and for tall buildings by Equation (2-39) for
downwind distances between 3 and 10 building widths. At downwind distances
greater than 10 building heights for Equation (2-36), (2-37), or (2-38),
oy' is held constant at the value of ay' calculated at a downwind
distance of 10 building heights. Similarly, at downwind distances greater
than 10 building widths for Equation (2-39), ay' is held constant at the
value of cry' calculated at a downwind distance of 10 building widths.
d. Procedures Used to Account for the Effects of Building Wakes on
Effluent Dispersion. With the exception of the equations used to calculate
the lateral virtual distance, the procedures used to account for the effects
of building wake effects on effluent dispersion are the same as those outlined
in Section 2.4.1.1.d for the short-term model. The calculation of lateral
virtual distances by the long-term model is discussed in Section 2.5.1.1.C
above.
e. Procedures Used to _Account for Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion. See the
discussion given in Section 2.4.1.I.e.
2.5.1.2 The Vertical Term
a. The Vertical Term for Gases and Small Particulates. Except for the
use of seasons and discrete categories of wind-speed and stability, the
Vertical Term for gases and small particulates corresponds to the short term
version discussed in Section 2.4.1.2. The user may assign a separate mixing
height Hm to each combination of wind-speed and stability category for each
season.
2-65
-------
As with the short-term model, the Vertical Term is changed to the form:
V = (2ir)1/2 az/(2 Hm) (2-54)
at downwind distances where the oz/Hm ratio is greater than or equal to
1.6. Additionally, the ground-level concentration is set equal to zero if the
effective stack height H exceeds the mixing height Hm. As explained in
Section 2.2.1.2, ISCLT in the Rural Mode currently sets the mixing height
equal to a very large value for the E and F stability categories.
b. The Vertical Term in Elevated Terrain. See Section 2. 4.1. 2. b.
c. The Vertical Term for Large Particulates. Section 2. 4.1. 2. c discusses
the differences in the dispersion of large particulates and the dispersion of
gases and small particulates and provides guidance on the use of this option.
The Vertical Term for large particulates is given by Equation (2-45).
2.5.1.3 The Smoothing Function
As shown by Equation (2-51), the rectangular concentration distribution
within a given angular sector is modified by the function S{0} which smooths
discontinuities in the concentration at the boundaries of adjacent sectors.
The centerline concentration in each sector is unaffected by contributions
from adjacent sectors. At points off the sector centerline, the concentration
is a weighted function of the concentration at the centerline and the
concentration at the centerline of the nearest adjoining sector. The
smoothing function is given by:
S = (AG'-le'j - 6' |)/A9' for |e'j - 0' | < A0'
or (2-55)
=0 f or | 0 ' j - 0 ' | > A6 '
where
2-66
-------
0' = the angle measured in radians from north to the centerline of
J the jth wind-direction sector
0' - the angle measured in radians from north to the receptor point
2.5.2 Area, Volume and Line Source Emissions
2.5.2.1 General
As explained in Section 2.4.2.1, the ISC Model area and volume sources are
used to simulate the effects of emissions from a wide variety of industrial
sources. Section 2.4.2.2 provides guidance on the use of the area source
model and Section 2.4.2.3 provides guidance on the use of the volume source
model. The volume source model is also used to simulate line sources. The
following subsections give the area and volume source equations used by the
long-term model.
2.5.2.2 The Long-Term Area Source Model
The seasonal average ground-level concentration at the point (r,9) with
respect to the center of an area source is given by the expression:
Xft = 2K x02(2irr1/2 (RAO')"1 I QAfSVD (uaz)"; (2-56)
i, j ,k
where
R = radial distance from the lateral virtual point source to the
receptor
= [
-------
y = lateral distance from the cloud axis to the receptor
xy = lateral virtual distance (see Equation (2-53)}
K = units scaling coefficient (see Equation (2-19))
S = smoothing term (see Equation (2-55))
The vertical terms V for gaseous pollutants and small particulates, and for
cases with settling and dry deposition, are given in Section 2.4.1.2 with the
emission height H defined by the user.
2.5.2.3 The Long-Term Volume Source Model
Equation (2-51) is also used to calculate seasonal average ground-level
concentrations for volume sources. The user must assign initial lateral
(0yo) and vertical (ozo) dimensions and the effective emission
height H. A discussion of the application of the volume source model is given
in Section 2.4.2.3.
2.5.3 The ISC Long-Term Dry Deposition Model
2.5.3.1 General
The concepts upon which the ISC long-term dry deposition model are based
are discussed in Sections 2.4.1.2.c and 2.4.3.1.
2.5.3.2 Stack and Vplume Source Emissions
The seasonal deposition at the point (r,0) with respect to the base of a
stack or the center of a volume source for particulates in the nth
settling-velocity category or a gaseous pollutant with zero settling velocity
Vsn and a reflection coefficient yn is given by:
DEPa,n = K (1 - Yn)
-------
where the vertical term for deposition, Vd , was defined in Section 2.4.3.2.
K and D are described in Equations (2-19) and (2-20), respectively. QT is
the product of the total time during the ^lh season, of the seasonal
emission rate Q for the ith wind-speed category, kth stability category.
For example, if the emission rate is in grams per second and there are 92 days
in the summer season (June, July, and August), QT,4=3 is given by 7.95 x
10s Qa = 3. It should be noted that the user need not vary the emission
rate by season or by wind speed and stability. If an annual average emission
rate is assumed, QT is egual to 3.15 xlO7 Q for a 365-day year. For a
plume comprised of N settling velocity categories, the total seasonal
deposition is obtained by summing Equation (2-57) over the N settling-velocity
categories. The program also sums the seasonal deposition values to obtain
the annual deposition.
2.5.3.3 Area Source Emissions
With slight modifications, Equation (2-57) is applied to area source
emissions. The user assigns the effective emission heigh- H and Equation
(2-57) is changed to:
DEP4,n = K (1-Yn) n Xo (2v)~l/'2 (R2 A6T1 I (QAT fSVdD/oz) (2-58)
i, j ,k
where
AT = the product of the total time during the ^th season
and the emission rate per unit area for the ith
wind-speed category and kth stability category
K = units scaling coefficient (Equation (2-19))
D = decay coefficient (Equation (2-20))
2-69
-------
2.6 Example Problem
2.6.1 Description of a Hypothetical Potash Processing Plant
Figure 2-11 shows the plant layout and side view of a hypothetical potash
processing plant. Sylvinite ore is brought to the surface from an underground
mine by a hoist and dumped on the ore storage pile. The ore then travels
along an inclined conveyor belt to the ore processing building where the ore
is crushed and screened. Fugitive particulate emissions resulting from the
crushing and screening processes are discharged horizontally at ambient
temperature from a roof monitor extending the length of the ore processing
building. The ore is then refined by froth flotation and sent to the dryers.
Particulate emissions produced by the drying process are discharged from a
50-meter stack, located adjacent to the ore processing building, which has a
height of 25 meters.
2.6.2 Example ISCSI Problem
Table 2-13 gives the emissions data for the hypothetical potash processing
plant shown in Figure 2-11. The sylvinite mine and hoist are assumed to
operate during the period 0800 to 1600 LST. Fugitive emissions from the ore
pile during the period 0800 to 1600 LST are higher than during the period 1600
to 0800 LST because the hoist is continuously dumping sylvinite ore onto the
ore pile. A significant fraction of the fugitive emissions from the ore pile
and the conveyor belt consists of large particulates. The particle-size
distribution, gravitational settling velocities and surface reflection
coefficients for particulate emissions from the ore pile and conveyor belt are
given in Table 2-14. The settling velocities were calculated using Equations
(2-46) and (2-47) with the particulate density assumed to be 1 gram per cubic
centimeter; the reflection coefficients were obtained from Figure 2-8. The
remainder of the particulate emissions from the hypothetical plant are assumed
2-70
-------
i
o
Z 6
UJ
QC
O.
UJ
•3~7
S
i
u.
UJ
00
I
UJ
z
o
£
(ft
I-
o
a.
*o
_J
Q.
Ul
UJ
oo
c
• f-l
u]
co
-------
TABLE 2-13
EMISSIONS DATA FOR A HYPOTHETICAL
POTASH PROCESSING PLANT
Source
Particulate emission rate (g/sec)
Emission height (m)
Exit velocity (m/sec)
Diameter (m)
Exit temperature (°K)
Source
Ore Conveyor Roof Main
Pile Belt Monitor Stack
353.4* 1.3 10.5 5
50
8
1.0
340
*Emission rate during the period 0800 to 1600 LST. The emission rate during
the period 1600 to 0800 LST is 70.7 grams per second.
TABLE 2-14
PARTICLE-SIZE DISTRIBUTION, GRAVITATIONAL SETTLING VELOCITIES
AND SURFACE REFLECTION COEFFICIENTS FOR PARTICULATE
EMISSIONS FROM THE ORE PILE AND CONVEYOR BELT
Particle
Size Category
(M)
0
10
20
30
40
50
- 10
- 20
- 30
- 40
- 50
- 65
Mass Mean
Diameter Mass Fraction
n
6.30 0.10
15.54 0.40
25.33 0.28
35.24 0.12
45.18 0.06
17.82 0.04
Settling Reflection
Velocity Coefficient
Vsn (m/sec) Yn
0.001
0.007
0.019
0.037
0.061
0.099
1.00
0.82
0.72
0.65
0.59
0.50
2-72
-------
to be submicron particulates so that the effects of gravitational settling and
dry deposition need not be included in the model calculations. The purpose of
this example problem is to use ISCST to calculate 24-hour average particulate
concentrations produced by emissions from the hypothetical potash plant.
Additionally, estimates of the dry deposition of fugitive emissions from the
ore pile and the conveyor belt are required for each 24-hour period.
The ore pile is modeled as an area source with the effective side x0 of
the circular storage pile given by:
x0 = 0.5 ir1/2 D (2-59)
where D is the diameter of the base of the storage pile. The emission height
H is set equal to the height of the ore pile (10 meters). The emission rate
in grams per second is divided by the horizontal area of the storage pile
(706.9 square meters) to obtain the area source emission rate in grams per
second per square meter.
The conveyor belt is 10 meters wide and 100 meters long and is inclined at
an angle of 10 degrees. Thus, the conveyor belt is modeled as ten 10-meter
square volume sources. The initial lateral dimension of each source is
obtained by dividing the width (10 meters) by 2.15. The initial vertical
dimension azo is arbitrarily set equal to 1 meter to account for the
effects of local plant roughness elements. The emission height HI for the
ith source is given by:
Hi = Li sin 9 (2-60)
where
Hi = the effective emission height for the ith volume source
Li = the length, measured from the beginning of the conveyor belt, to
the center of the ith volume source
2-73
-------
9 = the angle of inclination (10 degrees)
The volume source model is also used to model the 90-meter by 20-meter
roof monitor. The roof monitor is approximated by four 20-meter square volume
sources with the centers of the volume sources spaced at 23.3-meter
intervals. The initial lateral dimension ayo of each of the four volume
sources is obtained by dividing 23.3 meters by 2.15. Because the opening of
the roof monitors extends from 20 to 25 meters above plant grade, the emission
height H is set equal to 22.5 meters. In order to account for the effects of
the aerodynamic wake of the processing building on the initial dispersion of
emissions from the roof monitor, the initial vertical dimension ozo is
obtained by dividing the building height (25 meters) by 2.15.
In summary, the effects of emissions from the hypothetical potash
processing plant shown in Figure 2-11 can be simulated by 16 sources. A
single area source represents the ore pile, ten volume sources simulate the
inclined conveyor belt, four volume sources represent the roof monitor, and
there is one stack. It should be noted that the stack height to building
height ratio is less than 2.5 so that the ISC Model procedures for evaluating
wake effects are applied to the stack emissions. The emissions data for the
hypothetical plant given in Table 2-13 are converted to the form required for
input to ISCST in Tables 2-15 and 2-16. The information given in Table 2-14
is also required for the ore pile and the conveyor belt. Because the plant is
located in open terrain, all source elevations are set equal to zero. The X
and Y coordinates assume that the origin of the coordinate system is located
at the center of the ore pile. Source combinations that are of interest in
analyzing the results of the calculations are as follows:
2-74
-------
K-
O.
Z
DC Ul
O O
u. o
o: z
o o
— CO
i z ac
CM M Ul
a.
ui >- co
-i et. M
ca o a
< i-
(- Z U
Ul CO
z
M Ul
0 0
M t-
CO
CO
M
21
Ul
CM
ofl 0.
X
0 h-
01 1
a.
i
u u
(U d)
•£~
W ^x.
o
— o
£
a
o> X
X 1-
^ 0
0
^ 01
a
o
01 —
X 0)
1— a.
X
1 1-
"i
— o
N
•0 C
O
CM
Ol
a.— o
' — •
•*" i
1(p^
N E
>• E
x "i"
"^
ai «
U 01
i- a.
3 X
CO
01 U
U O)
u .a
O 3
CO Z
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ooooooooooo
xxxxxxxxxxx
ooooooooooocncocoeoo
i i i i i t i i i t i i i i i in
i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 t 1 CM
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 O
1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ^~
ro
oooooooooovototatoo
)*~ '~l— *~ .— •— •— f—
t0rxrsr.ivr.r«r«rvr.^«o0»aDo
CM r— t— •— f
o(Tttjj«— CO^-vOCMCMCMtMO
•- ^-^-i— r-CMCMCMCMlO
oooooooooooooooo
mooooooooooooooo
1
CO
(ooooa^atata^crtcrtr^.— ^•rx.O'-
K
X
.— cMM^-tnijjrxaoa^o.— cMco
H
•—
01
X
1-
01
o
u
3
o
CO
-
^£
u
a
CO
n
o
01
a.
X
1-
m
u
3
O
CO
"^
1 —
CM
01
3
(71
-f-
U_
Ol
01
V)
01
-M
E
0
CT>
C/l
j:
Ol
01
c
1^
f—
"-
JO
•o
c
10
^
01
aj
o
in
,J2
r:
•a
'5
CTl
C
-o
3
CO
2-75
-------
TABLE 2-16
PARTICLE EMISSION RATES
FOR THE ORE PILE
Total Hourly
Hour (LST) Emission Rate Emission
Q (g/sec'm2) Q (g/m2)
A AT*
0100
0200
0300
0400
0500
0600
0700
0800
0900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
*The amount of material emitted during each hour is required for the
deposition calculations.
2-76
-------
Source 1 - Ore Pile
Sources 2-11 - Conveyor Belt
Sources 12-15 - Roof Monitor
Source 16 - Stack
Sources 1-16 - Plant as a Whole
Example ISCST runs that use the inputs given in Tables 2-13 through 2-16 and
the receptor grid shown in Figure 2-3 to calculate concentrations and
deposition are given in Appendix C. The hypothetical potash plant is assumed
to be located in a rural area. Also, the plant does not contain large surface
roughness elements or heat sources. Consequently, the Rural Mode is used in
the ISCST calculations.
2.6.3 Example ISCLT Problem
The purpose of this example problem is to use ISCLT to calculate, for the
receptor grid shown in Figure 2-3, annual average ground-level particulate
concentrations produced by emissions from the hypothetical potash processing
plant shown in Figure 2-11 as well as the annual deposition produced by
fugitive emissions from the ore pile and conveyor belt. Annual concentration
and deposition estimates are also required for an air quality monitoring
station located 2,108 meters from the center of the ore pile at a bearing of
014 degrees. With the exception of emissions from the ore pile and the
conveyor belt, the emissions data for the plant are assumed to be identical to
the data given in Tables 2-15 and 2-16. Fugitive emission rates for the ore
pile and conveyor belt are given in Table 2-17 as functions of the wind-speed
and Pasquill stability categories. The corresponding annual particulate
emissions required for the annual deposition calculations are given in
Table 2-18. Example ISCLT runs that calculate annual average concentration
and total annual deposition values for this problem are presented in
Appendix D.
2-77
-------
TABLE 2-17
PARTICULATE EMISSION RATES FOR THE ORE PILE AMD CONVEYOR
BELT AS FUNCTIONS OF WIND SPEED
AND STABILITY
Pasguill
Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
E
F
0-1.5
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
—
0.05
Emission Rate for Wind Speeds (m/sec) of
1.6-3.1 3.2-5.1 5.2-8.2 8.3-10.8 >10.8
(a) Ore Pile QA ; , , k(g/(sec.m2 ) )
0.50
0.40 0.50
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.70 1.00
0.25 0.50 0.50 0.70 1.00
0.20 0.25
0.10
(b) Individual volume Sources Qi,k (g/sec) Used to Represent the
Conveyor Belt
A
B
C
D
E
F
0.13
0.10
0.08
0.04
—
0.02
0.16
0.13 0.16
0.12 0.14 0.16 0.19 0.22
0.10 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.22
0.08 0.10
0.05
2-78
-------
CO
1—
_J
UJ
CD
OC
o
UJ
z
o >-
CJ r-
IH
0 -I
< 2
Ul 1—
IH
a. a
z
UJ <
at
to o a
•— UJ
1 UJ UJ
CM IE a.
1- CO
UJ
— j at o
m o z
< U. IH
H- 3
CO
z u.
00
IH
CO 10
CO Z
IH O
UJ P
o
Ul Z
r- =3
<< u.
J
o
IH
1-
CE
a.
j
^
3
z
z
^
<4_
O
x-h
(J
OJ
in
^
in
•D
OJ
OJ
a.
•o
c
5
o
in
c
0
in
>r_
i,
f—
ItJ
3
C
C
00
O
00
o
1
CO
00
CM
00
1
CM
m
,_
tn
i
,
••- i— O
3 -i- 0»
CT J3 0*
l/l «J -4-)
rtJ 4-> «
0. (/I O
t
^
_
<
O
a>
r—
•»-
a.
0)
u
o
.n.
10
0 O
— —•
1 1 X X 1 1
II II
m in
— —
CO CO
p"" ft
O 0
.— 1—
1
1 1 X X 1 1
1 1 1
*— r—
CM CM
• •
CM CM
!•«• r*
O 0
f— r—
1 1 X X 1 1
II 11
00 00
m m
r— i—
r» P» r«. co
O O O O
^_ ^_ (__ ^__
I X X X X 1
1 f
00 ^O '•O vO
in CM CM «3-
»~ F— 1— Ot
r- r^ W (D (0 to
0 O 0 O O O
X X X X X X
oo t£ vo oo ^ m
in CM <*• ao co •—
^ ^- o\ r*** ^o co
r^ (o (O P*- (A
O 0 0 O O
•~ •— ^ •— r~
X X X X I X
1
vo \o f— m ao
CM ^ co •— in
^
0)
CQ
v_
o
>v,
0)
^
c
0
(J
~~ r™
in <± ^- co
(O (0 to (O (O (D
C3 O O O O O
X X X X X X
in o oo m CM ao
• •••*.
m ^- co co CM ^~
CO CO CO CO IA
o o o o o
f— *— f- ^- p-
X X X X I X
1
o m CM vo •— •
«— •— m CM ro
^- CO CM — VO
< CO O O UJ U.
^
o-
r-
0
^~
X
^o
CO
Ul
^_
•
CO
II
^
"^
>^
TD
in
vD
CO
•*^
X
x— »
R)
V^
U
^"
CM
X
t_
f *-^
^^
O *
* *
2-79
-------
SECTION 3
USER'S INSTRUCTION FOR THE ISC SHORT-TERM
(ISCST) MODEL PROGRAM
3.1 Summary of Program Options, Data Requirements and Output
3.1.1 Summary of ISCST Program Options
The program options of the ISC Dispersion Model short-term computer
program (ISCST) consist of three general categories:
• Meteorological data input options
• Dispersion model options
• Output options
Each category is discussed separately below.
a. Meteorological Data Input Options. Table 3-1 lists the meteorological
data input options for the ISCST computer program. Hourly meteorological data
may be input by card deck or by means of the preprocessed meteorological data
tape. Be aware, however, that the calm wind processing feature is not
available when meteorological data are input by card deck. In fact, the model
will automatically assume meteorology is to be input via tape/file if the
regulatory default option is selected. Under these conditions, the model will
expect an external meteorology file (which doesn't exist), and terminate
abnormally. It is up to the user to insure tape/file input of meteorology
when the regulatory default option is selected.
If available, site-specific wind-profile exponents and vertical potential
temperature gradients may be input for each stability category or for each
combination of wind-speed and stability categories. The Rural Mode, Urban
Mode 1, Urban Mode 2 or Urban Mode 3 (see Section 2.2.1.1) may be selected by
the user. Also, the user may direct the program to calculate plume rise as a
3-1
-------
TABLE 3-1
METEOROLOGICAL DATA INPUT OPTIONS FOR ISCST
Input of hourly data by preprocessed data tape or card deck
Site-specific wind-profile exponents
Site-specific vertical potential temperature gradients
Rural Mode or Urban Mode 1, 2, or 3
Final or distance dependent plume rise
Wind system measurement height if other than 10 meters
TABLE 3-2
DISPERSION-MODEL OPTIONS FOR ISCST
Concentration or dry deposition calculations
Inclusion of effects of gravitational settling and/or dry deposition in
concentration calculations
Inclusion of terrain effects (concentration calculations only)
Cartesian or polar receptor system
Discrete receptors (Cartesian or polar system)
Stack, volume and area sources
Pollutant emission rates held constant or varied by hour of the day, by
season or month, by hour of the day and season, or by wind speed and
stability
Time-dependent exponential decay of pollutants
Inclusion of building wake and stack-tip downwash and buoyancy-induced
dispersion effects
Time periods for which concentration or deposition calculations are to be
made (1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, and 24 hours and N days are possible, where N
is the total number of days considered)
Specific days and/or time periods within a day for which concentration or
deposition calculations are to be made
Procedure for calm winds processing (not available when meteorological
data are input as card images).
3-2
-------
function of downwind distance or to assume that the final plume rise applies
at all downwind distances. If the wind system measurement height differs from
10 meters, the actual measurement height should be entered.
b. Dispersion Model Options. Table 3-2 lists the dispersion model
options for the ISCST computer program. The user may elect to make either
concentration or dry deposition calculations. In the case of concentration
calculations, the effects of gravitational settling and/or dry deposition may
be included in the calculations for areas of open terrain. Terrain effects
may be included in the model calculations. A terrain truncation algorithm is
applied when the elevation of a receptor exceeds the source height (elevation
plus physical height of source). In general, the gravitational settling and
dry deposition options should not be used in elevated terrain (see Sections
2.4.1.2.c and 2.4.3). The user may select either a Cartesian or a polar
receptor system and may also input discrete receptor points with either
system. ISCST calculates concentration or deposition values for stack, volume
and area source emissions. The volume source option is also used to simulate
line sources (see Section 2.4.2.3). Pollutant emission rates may be held
constant or varied by hour of the day, by season or month, by hour of the day
and season, or by wind speed and stability. The effects of time-dependent
exponential decay of a pollutant as a surrogate for chemical transformation or
other removal processes may also be included in the model calculations (see
Section 2.4.1). If a stack is located on or adjacent to a building, the user
must input the building dimensions (length, width, and height) in order for
the program to consider the effects of the building's aerodynamic wake on
plume dispersion. The user must select the time periods over which
concentration is to be averaged or deposition is to be summed. The user must
also select the specific days and/or time periods within specific days for
3-3
-------
which concentration or deposition calculations are to be made. For example,
the user may wish to calculate 3-hour average concentrations for the third
3-hour period on Day 118. When the calm winds processing option is selected
by the user (or by selection of the regulatory default option), calm winds are
treated as described in EPA (1984).
c. Output Options. Table 3-3 lists the ISCST program output options. A
more detailed discussion of the ISCST output information is given in Section
3.1.3.
The results of all ISCST calculations may be stored on a disc file. The
user may also elect to print one or more the following tables:
• The program control parameters, source data, and receptor data.
• Hourly meteorological inputs for each specified day.
• The "N"-day average concentration or "N"-day total deposition
calculated at each receptor for any desired combinations of
sources.
• The concentration or deposition values calculated for any desired
combinations of sources at all receptors for any specified day or
time period within a day.
• The highest, second-highest and third-highest concentration or
deposition values calculated for any desired combinations of
sources at each receptor for each specified averaging time
(concentration) or summation time (deposition) during an "N"-day
period.
• The maximum 50 concentration or deposition values calculated for
any desired combinations of sources for each specified averaging
time (concentration) or summation time (deposition).
It should be noted that a given problem run may generate a large print output
(see Section 3.2.5.b). Consequently, it may be more convenient to make
multiple program runs for a given problem. Note, also, that all output
options remain available with the calm wind processing and regulatory default
options.
3-4
-------
TABLE 3-3
ISCST OUTPUT OPTIONS
Results of the calculations stored on a disc file
Printout of program control parameters, source data and receptor data
Printout of tables of hourly meteorological data for each specified day
Printout of "N"-day average concentration or total deposition calculated
at each receptor for any desired combinations of sources
Printout of the concentration or deposition values calculated for any
desired combinations of sources at all receptors for any specified day or
time period within the day
Printout of tables of highest, second-highest and third-highest
concentration or deposition values calculated at each receptor for each
specified time period during an "N"-day period for any desired
combinations of sources
Printout of tables of the maximum 50 concentration or deposition values
calculated for any desired combinations of sources for each specified time
period
3-5
-------
3.1.2 Data Input Requirements
This section provides a description of all input data parameters required
by the ISCST program. The user should note that some input parameters are not
read or are ignored by the program, depending on what values control
parameters have been assigned by the user. Except where noted, all data are
read from card images.
a. Program Control Parameter Data. These data contain parameters which
provide user-control of all program options.
Parameter
Name
ISW(l)
ISW(2)
ISW(3)
ISW(4)
Concentration/Deposition Option — Directs the program to
calculate either average concentration or total deposition. A
value of "1" indicates average concentration and a "2"
indicates total deposition. The default value equals "1".
Receptor Grid System Option — Specifies whether a right-
handed rectangular Cartesian coordinate system or a polar
coordinate system is used to reference the receptor grid. A
value of "1" indicates the Cartesian coordinate system, and
"2" indicates the polar coordinate system. Additionally, a
"3" value will automatically generate a grid system using the
Cartesian coordinate system and a "4" value will automatically
generate the polar coordinate direction radials with
user-defined starting locations and spacing distances. The
default value equals "1".
Discrete Receptor Option — Specifies whether a right-handed
rectangular Cartesian coordinate system or a polar coordinate
system is used to reference discrete receptor points. A value
of "1" indicates the Cartesian coordinate system and a "2"
indicates the polar coordinate system. The default value
equals "1".
Receptor Terrain Elevation Option — Allows the user to input
terrain elevations for all receptor points. A value of "1"
directs the program to read user-provided terrain elevations
in feet. A value of "0" assumes level terrain and no terrain
elevations are read by the program. The default value equals
"0". If equal to "-1", the program assumes input elevations
are in meters rather than feet.
3-6
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW<5)
ISW(6)
ISW(7)-
ISW(14)
ISW(15>*
ISW(16)*
ISW(17)*
Output File Option - Allows all calculated average
concentration or total deposition values to be written onto a
disc file. A value of "1" writes calculated values to an
output file. Refer to Section 3.2.4.b for a complete
description of the output produced from the use of this
option. A "0" value does not write any calculations to an
output file. The default value equals "0".
Print Input Data Option — Allows the user to print all input
data parameters. A value of "0" indicates no input data are
listed. A "1" indicates that all program control parameters
and model constants, receptor site data and source data are
printed. A "2" value is the same as the "1" option except
that all hourly meteorological data used in the calculations
are also printed. The default value equals "0".
Time Period Options — These options allow the user to compute
average concentration or total deposition based on up to eight
time periods. Parameters ISW(7) through ISW{14) respectively
correspond to 1-, 2-, 3-, 4-, 6,- 8-, 12-, and 24-hour time
periods. The user may choose any number of the eight time
periods. A value of "1" for any of the eight parameters
directs the program to compute average concentration or total
deposition values for the corresponding time period. A "0"
value for any of the eight time-period parameters directs the
program not to make calculations for the corresponding time
period. The default values equals "0".
Output "N"-day Table Option — Allows the user to print
average concentration or total deposition for the total number
of days of meteorological data processed by the problem run
for source group combinations chosen by the user. A value of
"1" employs this option; "N"-day tables are not printed if
ISW{15) has a "0" value. The default value equals "0".
Output Daily Tables Option — Allows the user to print average
concentration or total deposition values for all time periods
and source groups specified by the user for each day of
meteorological data processed. A value of "1" directs the
program to print these tables; these tables are not printed if
ISW(16) has a
'O1
value or if parameters ISW(7) through
ISW{14) equal "0". The default value equals "0".
Output Highest, Second-Highest and Third-Highest Tables Option
— Allows the user to print the highest and second-highest
average concentration or total deposition calculated at each
receptor. A set of the highest and second-highest tables is
*The four parameters ISW(15) through ISW(18) pertain to output table options.
Refer to Section 3.1.3 for a more complete summary of the contents of each
type of output table.
3-7
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW(17)*
(Cont.)
ISW(18)*
ISW{19)
ISW(20)
ISW(21)
printed for each time period and source group combination
chosen by the user. A value of "1" directs the program to
print these tables; these tables are not printed if ISW(17)
has a "0" value or if parameters ISW(7) through ISW{14) equal
"0". A value of "2" will cause the program to print a third
highest table in addition to the highest and second highest
tables. Default value equals "0".
Output Maximum 50 Tables Option — Specifies whether or not
tables of the 50 highest calculated average concentration or
total deposition values are printed for each time period and
source group specified by the user. A "1" value employs this
option; these tables are not printed if ISW(18> has a "0"
value or if parameters ISW(7) through ISW(14) equal "0". The
default value equals "0".
Meteorological Data Option — A "1" value directs the program
to read hourly meteorological data from FORTRAN logical unit
IMET in a format compatible with that generated by the
pre-processor program. A "2" value directs the program to
read hourly meteorological data in a card image format. The
default value equals "I". The user should recall that if the
regulatory default option (ISW (28)) selected, the model
automatically assumes pre-processed meteorological data are to
be used (ISW (19) = 1).
Rural/Urban Option — Specifies which of the rural or three
urban modes is to be used. A value of "0" directs the program
to read rural mixing heights. A "1" value causes the program
to read urban mixing heights with Urban Mode 1 adjustments to
the input stability categories (see Table 2-3). A "2" value
causes the program to read urban mixing heights with Urban
Mode 2 adjustments to the input stability categories. The
Pasquill-Gifford dispersion curves are used for the Rural Mode
and Urban Modes 1 and 2. A value of "3" directs the program
to read urban mixing heights and use the Briggs urban
dispersion curves (Urban Mode 3). The default value equals
"0". It should be noted that if Meteorological Data Option
(ISW(19)) has a value of "2", the program automatically
assigns a "0" value to ISW(20), unless Urban Mode 3 is
selected, and ignores any conflicting value entered by the
user. It should be noted that the use of Urban Modes 1 and 2
are not recommended for regulatory purposes.
Wind Profile Exponent Option — This option allows the user to
enter wind profile exponent values or allows the program to
provide default wind profile exponent values. If a value of
"1" is entered, the program provides default values. See
*The four parameters ISW(15) through ISW(18) pertain to output table options.
Refer to Section 3.1.3 for a more complete summary of the contents of each
type of output table.
3-8
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW(21)
(Cont'd.)
ISW{22)
ISW(23)
Table 2-2 for the default values used by the program. If a
value of "2" is entered, the program reads user-provided wind
profile exponents in input parameter PDEF. These values
remain constant throughout the problem run. If a value of "3"
is entered, the program reads user-provided wind profile
exponent values in input parameter P for each hour of
meteorological data processed by the program. Note that the
ISW(21) equals "3" option assumes the hourly meteorological
data are in a card image format (ISW(19) = "2"). The default
value of ISW(21) equals "1". The regulatory default option
(ISW(28)) also sets ISW(21) to "1".
Vertical Potential Temperature Gradient Option — This option
allows the user to enter vertical potential temperature
gradient values or allows the program to provide default
vertical potential temperature gradient values. If a value of
"1" is entered, the program provides default values. See
Table 2-2 for the default values used by the program. If a
value of "2" is entered, the program reads user-provided
vertical potential temperature gradient values in input
parameter DTHDEF. These values remain constant throughout the
problem run. If a value of "3" is entered, the program reads
user-provided vertical potential temperature gradient values
in input parameter DTHDZ for each hour of meteorological data
processed by the program. Note that the ISW(22) equals "3"
option assumes hourly meteorological data are in a card image
format (ISW{19) equals "2"). The default value of ISW{22)
equals "1". The regulatory default option (ISW(28)) also sets
ISW(22) to "1".
Variable Source Emission Rate Option — Allows the user to
specify scalars which are multiplied by the sources' average
emission rates. This parameter is employed by the user when
it is desired to vary the average emission rates for all
sources. It is also possible to vary the emission rates for
individual sources with the QFLG parameter option. These
scalars may vary as a function of season, month, hour of the
day, hour of the day and season, or wind speed and stability
category. A value of "1" allows the user to enter four
seasonal scalars; a
allows the user to enter twelve
monthly scalars; a "3" allows the user to enter twenty-four
scalars for each hour of the day; a "4" value allows the user
to enter thirty-six scalars for six wind speed categories for
each of the six stability categories; a "5" value allows the
user to enter ninty-six scalars for twenty-four hourly values
for each of the four seasons. A "0" value directs the program
not to vary average emission rates for all sources, and allows
the use of the QFLG parameter option for the individual
sources. The default value of this parameter equals "0".
3-9
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW(24)
ISW(25)
ISW(26)
ISW(27)
ISW(28)
Plume Rise Option — Allows the program to consider only the
final plume rise at all downwind receptor locations if a value
of "1" is entered. If a value of "2" is entered, the program
computes plume rise as a function of the downwind distance of
each receptor. The default value of ISW(24) eguals "1". The
regulatory default option (ISW(28)) also sets ISW(24) to "1".
Stack-Tip Downwash Option — Allows the program to use the
physical stack height entered by the user or to modify the
physical stack height of all stack-type sources entered in
order to account for stack-tip downwash effects (Briggs,
1973). If a value of "1" is entered, all physical stack
heights entered by the user are used throughout the problem
run; if a value of "2" is entered, all physical stack heights
entered are modified to account for stack-tip downwash. The
default value of ISW(25) eguals "1". The regulatory default
option (ISW(28)) sets ISW(25) to "2".
Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion Option — Allows the program to
modify the dispersion coefficients to account for
buoyancy-induced dispersion. A value of "1" directs the
program to modify the dispersion coefficients for stack-type
sources while a
directs the program to bypass the
modifications. The regulatory default option (ISW(28)) sets
ISW(26) to "1".
Calm Processing Option — Allows the program to use a calm
processing routine, developed by EPA, to calculate
concentration or deposition during calm periods. A value of
"1" directs the program to use this feature and a "2" directs
the program to ignore this feature.
Regulatory Default Option — If chosen, the program will
internally re-define some user input to produce a simulation
consistent with EPA regulatory recommendations. The following
features are incorporated when this option is selected
(ISW(28)=1):
1. Tape/file meteorological input is assumed.
2. Final plume rise is used at all downwind receptor
locations.
3. Stack-tip downwash effects are included.
4. Buoyancy-induced dispersion effects are parameterized.
5. Default wind profile coefficients are assigned (.07, .07,
.10, .15, .35, .55 for the rural mode; and .15, .15, .20,
.25, .30, .30 for the urban modes).
6. Default vertical potential temperature gradients are
assigned (A:0.0, B:0.0, CrO.O, D:0.0, E:0.02, F:0.035 K/m)
7. A calm processing routine is used to handle concentrations
during calm periods.
8. A decay half life of 4 hours is assigned if SOz is
modeled in an urban mode; otherwise, no decay is assigned.
3-10
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW{28)
(Cent.)
ISW(29)
Note, if this option is chosen, ISW (19) is set to "1",
indicating input of pre-processed meteorolgical data. Note
that the model also selects the appropriate urban or rural
mixing height, and that building downwash is calculated when
appropriate.
This option is not selected if ISW(28)=2.
Pollutant Indicator Switch — If SO? is modelled the user
should set this option equal to "1". If a pollutant other
than S02 is modelled the user should set this option equal
to "2".
ISW(30) Input Debug Switch - If the user wants input data printed as
soon as it is read set this option to "1". Otherwise set this
option to "2". Note, this option will print the same
information as that with ISW(6), but immediately after it is
read, providing the user with assistance in determining where
in the runstream input errors are located.
NSOURC Number of Sources — This parameter specifies the total number
of sources to be processed by the problem run.
NXPNTS X-Axis/Range Receptor Grid Size — This parameter specifies
the number of east-west receptor grid locations for the
Cartesian coordinate system X-axis, or the number of receptor
grid ranges (rings) in the polar coordinate system (depending
on which receptor grid system is chosen by the user with
parameter ISW(2)). A "0" value causes the program to assume
that no regular (non-discrete) receptor grid is used.
NYPNTS Y-Axis/Radial Receptor Grid Size — This parameter specifies
the number of north-south receptor grid locations for the
Cartesian coordinate system Y-axis, or the number of receptor
grid direction radials in the polar grid system (depending on
which receptor grid system is chosen by the user with
parameter ISW(2)). A "0" value causes the program to assume
that no regular (non-discrete) receptor grid is used.
NXWYPT Number of Discrete Receptors — This parameter indicates the
total number of discrete receptors to be processed by the
problem run. A "0" value causes the program to assume that no
discrete receptors are used.
NGROUP Number of Source Groups — This parameter specifies the number
of source groups desired. Each source group consists of any
desired combination of sources. A "0" value defines one
source group which consists of all sources. The default value
equals "0". A maximum of 150 source groups are allowed.
3-11
-------
Parameter
Name
IPERD
NHOURS
NDAYS
NSOGRP
IDSOR
Single Time Period Interval Option — This parameter allows
the user to specify one time period interval out of all
possible time period intervals within a day. The use of this
option directs the program to print only one time period
interval specified for daily output tables (see Section
3.1.3.b). For example, if the user desires to print only the
fifth 3-hour time period, IPERD requires a value of "5".
Also, parameter ISW(9) must equal "1" in order to compute
average concentration or total deposition based on a 3-hour
time period. A "0" value directs the program to consider all
intervals of a given time period.
Number of Hours Per Day of Hourly Meteorological Data — This
parameter is used only when hourly meteorological data are
read from card images (parameter ISW(19) equals "2"). This
parameter specifies the number of hours per day of
meteorological data. For example, one need not enter 24 hours
of meteorological data in order to calculate a 3-hour average
concentration from only 3 hours of meteorological data.
Number of Days of Meteorological Data — This parameter is
used only when hourly meteorological data are read from card
images (parameter ISW(19) equals "2"). This parameter
specifies the total number of days of meteorological data to
be processed by the program. The default value assumes one
day (a value equal to "1") of meteorological data.
Number of Sources Defining Source Groups — This parameter is
not read if the parameter NGROUP has a
value. This
parameter is an array of NGROUP values which indicates how
many source identification numbers are read by the program in
order to define each source group. The source identification
numbers themselves are read in parameter IDSOR. Refer to
parameter IDSOR for an example of the use of the parameter
NSOGRP in association with parameter IDSOR. A maximum of 150
source groups may be used.
Source Identification Numbers Defining Source Groups — This
parameter is not read if parameter NGROUP has a "0" value.
This parameter is an array which contains the source
identification numbers and/or the lower and upper bounds of
source identification number to be summed over, which are used
to define a source group. This parameter is used in
association with parameter NSOGRP discussed above. The
following should illustrate the interactive use of parameters
NGROUP, NSOGRP and IDSOR. Let us assume that we have 50
sources who identification numbers are 10, 20, 30, . . ., 490,
500. First, if one desires only to see the average
concentration or total deposition calculated from all sources,
the parameter NGROUP should equal "0". The parameters NSOGRP
and IDSOR are not required by the program and are not input by
the user. Next, let us assume that one desires to see the
3-12
-------
Parameter
Name
IDSOR
(Cont'd.)
average concentration or total deposition contribution
individually of sources with identification number 10, 100,
200, 300, 400, and 500 as well as the combined contributions
of sources with number 10 through 100, 50 through 260, 100
through 200 plus 400 through 500, and of all sources combined
(10 through 500). Hence, the average concentration or total
deposition contributions from six individual sources are
desired plus the contributions from each of four sets of
combined sources for a total of ten source groups. Thus, a
value of "10" must be entered for parameter MGROUP. For
parameter NSOGRP, one enters the ten values: 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
2, 2, 4, and 2. For parameter IDSOR, one enters the source
identification numbers: 10, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 10,
-100, 50, -260, 100, -200, 400, -500, 10, -500. Now let us
examine the relationship between those values entered in
parameters NSOGRP and IDSOR. The first six entries of both
NOSGRP and IDSOR are in a one-to-one correspondence; the "1"
value entered in parameter NSOGRP implies that only one source
identification number is read by the program in the IDSOR
array in order to define a complete source group. The seventh
entry in parameter NSOGRP (a "2") indicates that the source
identification numbers 10 and -100 (the seventh and eighth
entries in IDSOR) define a source group. The minus sign
preceding source identification number "100" indicates to the
program to inclusively sum over all sources with
identification numbers ranging from "10" to "100". The user
need not be concerned by the fact that no source number of,
say, "43" exists. The program only sums over those source
numbers defined (in this case, 10, 20, 30, . . ., 90, 100).
The eighth entry in parameter NSOGRP (a "2") specifies a
source group including source numbers "50" through "260" which
are the next set of values in parameter IDSOR. If one desires
to see source contributions from consecutive source numbers,
and also desires to exclude some source numbers, the next
entry in parameter NSOGRP (a "4") illustrates this procedure.
The value "4" implies that four source numbers are read by the
program in order to define a source group. The four source
identification numbers read by the program in parameter IDSOR,
which are the source numbers following the last source numbers
used to define the preceding source group, are 100, -200, 400,
-500. This arrangement implies that inclusive summing over
all sources from "100" to "200" and "400" to "500" is desired,
excluding source numbers "210" to "390". Finally, it is still
possible to obtain the combined contribution from all sources
as shown in the last source group. In summary, we have: (1)
Parameter NGROUP is a value which represents the number of
source groups desired; (2) The values in parameter NSOGRP
indicate the number of source identification numbers read by
the program in parameter IDSOR; and, (3) parameter IDSOR
contains the source identification numbers used to define a
source group, where a minus sign preceding a source number
implies inclusive summing from the previous source number
entered to the source number with the minus sign. The number
of source identification numbers cannot exceed two hundred
values for parameter IDSOR.
3- 13
-------
b. Meteorological-Related Constants. These data consist of parameters
related to the meteorological conditions of the problem run. They are
constants which are initialized at the beginning of the problem run and remain
constant throughout the problem run (as opposed to the hourly meteorological
data which change throughout the problem run).
Parameter
Mame
PDEF
DTHDEF
UCATS
ZR
DECAY*
Wind Profile Exponents — These data are read by the program
only if option ISW(21) has a value equal to "2" and the
regulatory default option is not chosen (ISW(28) = 2. This
parameter is an array containing wind profile exponents for
six stability categories, where each stability category
contains six values for the six wind speed categories. A
total of thirty-six wind profile exponents are entered by the
user. See Table 2-2 for default values.
Vertical Potential Temperature Gradients — These data are
read by the program only if option ISW(22) has a value equal
to "2" and the regulatory default option is not chosen
(ISW(28) = 2. This parameter is an array containing vertical
potential temperature gradients (degrees Kelvin/meter) for six
stability categories, where each stability category contains
six values for the six wind speed categories. A total of
thirty-six vertical potential temperature gradients are
entered by the user. See Table 2-2 for default values.
Wind Speed Categories — This parameter contains five values
which specify the upperbound of the first through fifth wind
speed categories (meters/second). The program assumes no
upper limit on the sixth wind speed category. The default
values egual 1.54, 3.09, 5.14, 8.23, and 10.8 meters per
second for the first through fifth categories, respectively.
Wind Speed Reference Height — This parameter specifies the
height (meters) at which the wind speed was measured. The
default value equals 10.0 meters.
Decay Coefficient — This parameter is the decay coefficient
(seconds"1) used to describe decay of a pollutant due to
chemical depletion. If SOz is modelled in an Urban Mode and
the regulatory default option is chosen, the program assigns a
decay coefficient coresponding to a half life of four hours.
Otherwise, pollutant decay is not considered.
*This parameter is read by the program only if the hourly meteorological data
are in a preprocessed format (parameter ISW(19) equals "I").
3-14
-------
Parameter
Name
I DAY*
uss*
ISY*
IUS*
IUY*
Meteorological Julian Day Indicator — This parameter consists
of an array of 366 entries, where each entry indicates whether
or not a meteorological day of data is processed by the
program. The entry number of the array corresponds to the
Julian Day of meteorological data. For example, the 140th
entry IDAY(140) corresponds to Julian Day 140. An entry with
a "1" value directs the program to process the corresponding
day of meteorological data. A "0" value directs the program
to ignore that corresponding day. The default assumes "0"
values for all 366 entries.
Surface Station Number -- This parameter specifies the surface
station number of the meteorological data being used. The
surface station number usually corresponds to the WBAN station
identification number for a given observation station. The
number is usually a five-digit integer.
Year of Surface Station Data — This parameter specifies the
year of the surface station meteorological data. Only the
last two digits of the year are entered.
Upper Air Station Number — This parameter specifies the upper
air station number of the meteorological data being used. The
upper air station number usually corresponds to the WBAN
station identification number for a given observation
station. The number is usually a five-digit integer.
Year of Upper Air Station Data — This parameter specifies the
year of upper air station meteorological data. Only the last
two digits of the year are entered.
c. Identification Labels and Model Constants. These data consist of
parameters pertaining to heading and identification labels and program
constants.
Parameter
Name
TITLE
Heading Label — This parameter allows the user to enter up to
60 characters in order to identify a problem run. The
information entered in this parameter appears at the top of
each page of print output.
*This parameter is read by the program only if the hourly meteorological data
are in a preprocessed format (parameter ISW(19) equals "1").
3-15
-------
Parameter
Name
IQUN
ICHIUN
TK
IMET
ITAP
Source Emission Rate Label — This parameter provides the user
with up to 12 characters in order to identify the emission
rate units of all sources. The default label is (GRAMS/SEC)
when calculating average concentration and (GRAMS) when
calculating total deposition. All area source emission rate
labels automatically include units of per square meter.
Output Units Label — This parameter provides the user with a
28-character label in order to identify the units of average
concentration or total deposition. The default value is
(MICROGRAMS/CUBIC METER) for average concentration calcu-
lations and (GRAMS/SQUARE METER) for total deposition
calculations.
Source Emission Rate Conversion Factor — This parameter
allows the user to scale the source emission rate for all
sources in order to convert the emission rate units. This
parameter is used in conjunction with label parameters IQUN
and ICHIUN. The default value eguals 1.0 x 10s for average
concentration calculations and 1.0 for total deposition
calculations.
FORTRAN Logical Unit Number for Hourly Meteorological Data —
This parameter specifies the FORTRAN logical unit number of
the device from which the hourly meteorological data are
read. The default value equals "9" for hourly meteorological
data which are in a preprocessed format. The default value
for card image meteorological data is the same as the logical
unit number for all card input data.
FORTRAN Logical Unit Number of Output Disc File — This
parameter is ignored by the program if no output file is
generated by the problem run (ISW(5) equals "0"). This
parameter specifies the FORTRAN logical unit number of the
output device. The default value equals "3".
d. Receptor Data. These data consist of the (X, Y) or (range, theta)
locations of all receptor points. Also included are the receptor terrain
elevations. The minimum distance in meters between source and receptor for
which calculations are made is given by:
Stack Sources:
minimum distance =
1 ; no wake effects
or
MAX(1,3*HB) ; wake effects, squat building
or
MAX(1,3*HW) ; wake effects, tall building
3-16
-------
Volume Sources:
minimum distance
Area Sources:
minimum distance
Where:
1 + 2.15*SIGYO
1 + 0.5*BW
HB = height of building
HW - width of building
SIGYO = standard deviation
dimension of building
BW = width of area source
of the lateral source
Parameter
Name
GRIDX
GRIDY
Receptor Grid X-Axis or Range Data — This parameter is read
by the program only if input parameters NXPNTS and MYPNTS are
both greater than zero. This parameter is an array which has
different functions depending on the value of ISW(2). If
ISW(2) equals "1", this parameter contains NXPNTS values of
the X-axis receptor grid points (meters). If ISW(2) equals
"2" or "4", this parameter contains WXPNTS values of the
receptor grid ranges (rings) in meters. If ISW(2) equals "3",
the first entry of this parameter contains the starting
location (meters) of the X-axis receptor grid and the second
entry contains the incremental value (meters) with which the
remaining NXPNTS values of the X-axis are generated.
Receptor Grid Y-Axis or Direction Radial Data — This
parameter is read by the program only if input parameters
NXPNTS and NYPNTS are both greater than zero. This parameter
is an array which has different functions depending on the
value of ISW(2). If ISW(2) equals "1", this parameter
contains NYPNTS values of the Y-axis receptor grid points
(meters). If ISW(2) equals "2", this parameter contains
NYPNTS values of the direction radials (degrees) for the
receptor grid. The program requires that these values not be
fractional values but integer values within the range of 1 to
360 degrees. The default value equals "360" degrees. If
ISW(2) equals "3", the first entry of this parameter contains
the starting location (meters) of the Y-axis receptor grid and
the second entry contains the incremental value (meters) with
which the remaining NYPNTS values of the Y-axis are
generated. If the ISW(2) equals "4", the first entry of this
parameter contains the starting direction radial location
(degrees) of the receptor grid and the second entry contains
the incremental value (degrees) with which the remaining
NYPNTS direction radial values of the receptor grid are
generated. All values generated must be integers within the
range of 1 to 360 degrees. The default value equals "360"
degrees.
3-17
-------
GRIDZ
(non-discrete)
XDIS
YDIS
GRIDZ
(discrete)
Grid Receptor Terrain Elevation Data — This parameter is read
only if parameter ISW(4) equals "I" (feet) or "-1" (meters)
and NXPNTS and NYPNTS are both greater than zero. This
parameter is an array which contains all the receptor terrain
elevations for the receptor grid. Receptor elevation Zaj
corresponds to the ith X coordinate (range) and jth Y
coordinate (direction radial). Begin with Zn and enters
NXPNTS values (Zii, Z2i, Z3i, . . .). Then, starting
with a new card image, enter NXPNTS values (Z12, Zzz,
Z32, • . .). Continue until all regular receptor elevations
have been entered.
Discrete Receptor X or Range Data — This parameter is read by
the program only if parameter NXWYPT is greater than zero.
This parameter is an array which has different functions
depending on the value of parameter ISW(3). If ISW(3) equals
"1", this parameter contains NXWYPT discrete receptor X
locations (meters). If ISW(3) equals "2", this parameter
contains NXWYPT discrete receptor range locations (meters).
The values entered in this parameter are used in association
with those in parameter YDIS.
Discrete Receptor Y or Direction Data — This parameter is
read by the program only if NXWYPT is greater than zero. This
parameter is an array which has different functions depending
on the value of parameter ISW(3). If ISW(3) equals "1", this
parameter contains NXWYPT discrete receptor Y locations
(meters). If ISW(3) equals "2", this parameter contains
NXWYPT discrete receptor direction values (degrees). These
direction values must not be fractional in value, but integer
values within the range of 1 to 360 degrees where the default
value is "360" degrees. The values entered in this parameter
are used in association with those in parameter XDIS.
Discrete Receptor Terrain Elevation Data — This parameter is
only read if ISW(4) = "1" (feet) or "-1" (meters) and NXWYPT
is non-zero. This parameter is an array of receptor terrain
elevations for discrete receptors.
e. Source Data. These data consist of all necessary information required
for each source entered by the user. Because the program can process three
types of sources (stack, volume, and area), some source types require more
information than other types. The following input parameters are required by
all source types.
3-18
-------
Parameter
Name
NSO
ITYPE
NVS
QFLG
XS
YS
ZS
Source Identification Number — This parameter is a number
which uniquely identifies each source. The program uses this
identification number for any output tables that are generated
requiring individual source identification. This number must
be a positive number.
Source Type Indicator — This parameter specifies the type of
source. If a value of "0" is entered, this is a stack-type
Similarly, a
is entered for a volume-type
source.
source. A "2" is entered for an area-type source. Consult
Sections 2.4.1 and 2.4.2 for a technical discussion of these
source types.
Number of Gravitational Settling Categories — This parameter
specifies the number of gravitational settling categories to
be considered. This parameter is used for sources with
particulates or droplets with significant gravitational
settling velocities. A maximum of 20 categories is allowed
for each source.
Variable Source Emission Rate Option — This parameter is
ignored by the program if ISW(23) has a non-zero value. This
parameter allows the user to specify scalars which are
multiplied by this individual source's average emission rate.
These scalars may vary as a function of season, month, hour of
the day, season and hour of the day, or stability category and
wind speed. The implementation of this parameter is the same
as that of parameter ISW(23). Refer to the description of
parameter ISW(23) for an explanation of what values are
associated with each variational function.
Emission Rate — This parameter specifies the average emission
rate of the source. If average concentration is calculated,
the units for stack and volume sources are mass per time and
for area sources are mass per square meter per time. If total
deposition is calculated, the units for stack and volume
sources are mass and for area sources are mass per square
meter.
X Location — This parameter specifies the relative X location
(meters) of the center of a stack or volume source and of the
southwest corner of an area source.
Y Location — This parameter specifies the relative Y location
(meters) of the center of a stack or volume source and of the
southwest corner of an area source.
Source Elevation — This parameter specifies the elevation
(meters above mean sea level) of the source at the source base.
3-19
-------
Stack-Source
Parameter
WAKE
HS
TS
VS
HB*
HL*
HW*
Supersguat Building Wake Effects Equation Option — This
option is used to control the equations used in the
calculation of the lateral virtual distance (Equations (2-35)
and (2-36) when the effective building width to height ratio
(BW/HB) is greater than 5. If this parameter is not punched
or has a value of "0" and the width to height ratio is greater
than 5, the program will use Equation (2-35) to calculate the
lateral virtual distance producing the upper bound of the
concentration or deposition of the source. If this parameter
has a value of "1", the program uses Equation (2-36) producing
the lower bound of the concentration deposition for the
source. The appropriate value for this parameter depends on
building shape and stack placement with respect to the
building (see Section 2.4.1.1.d).
Stack Height — This parameter specifies the height of the
stack above the ground (meters).
Stack Exit Temperature — This parameter specifies the stack
exit temperature in degrees Kelvin. If this value is less
than the ambient air temperature for a given hour, the program
sets this parameter equal to the ambient air temperature.
Stack Exit Velocity — This parameter specifies the stack exit
velocity in meters per second.
Stack Diameter — This parameter specifies the inner stack
diameter in meters.
Building Height — This parameter specifies the height of a
building adjacent to this stack (meters).
Building Length — This parameter specifies the length of a
building adjacent to this stack (meters).
Building Width — This parameter specifies the width of a
building adjacent to this stack (meters). The effective width
used by the program is the diameter of a circle of equal area
to the rectangle given by HL and HW.
Volume-Source
Parameters
H Center Height — This parameter specifies the height of the
center of the volume source above the ground (meters).
*If non-zero values are entered for parameters HB, HL, and HW, the program
automatically uses the building wake effects option (see Section 2.4.1.1.d).
However, if HB, HL, and HW are not punched, or are equal to "0", wake effects
for the respective source are not considered.
3-20
-------
Volume-Source
Parameters
SIGZO
SIGYO
Initial Vertical Dimension — This parameter specifies the
initial vertical dimension azo of the volume source
(meters).
Initial Horizontal Dimension — This parameter specifies the
initial horizontal dimension ava of the volume source
(meters).
; y o
Area-Source
Parameters
H
XO
Effective Emission Height — This parameter specifies the
effective emission height of the area source (meters).
Area Source Width — This parameter specifies the width x0
of the square area source (meters).
Gravitational
Settling
Category
Parameters
PHI
Mass Fraction — This parameter is an array which specifies
the mass fraction of particulates for each settling velocity
category. A maximum of 20 values per source may be entered.
VSN Settling Velocity — This parameter is an array which
specifies the gravitational settling velocity (meters/second)
for each settling velocity category. A maximum of 20 values
per source may be entered.
GAMMA Surface Reflection Coefficient — This parameter is an array
which contains the surface reflection coefficient for each
settling velocity category. A maximum of 20 values per source
may be entered.
QTK Source Emission Rate Scalars — This parameter is applicable
only to sources whose emission rates are multiplied by
variational scalar values. If parameter ISW(23) is greater
than zero, this parameter applies to all sources in the
problem run. If parameter ISW(23) equals zero, this parameter
is read by the program for each source for which the parameter
QFLG is greater than zero. If both parameters ISW(23) and
3-21
-------
Gravitational
Settling
Category
Parameters
QTK
Cont.
QFLG equal zero for all sources, this parameter is not read by
the program. This parameter is an array which contains the
source emission rate scalars used to multiply the average
emission rate of a (all) source(s). The format in which the
scalar values are entered depends on the value of either
parameter QFLG or ISW{23) (whichever parameter is
applicable). If this value equals "1", enter four seasonal
scalars in the order of Winter, Spring, Summer, and Fall. If
the QFLG (or ISW(23)) parameter has a value of "2", enter 12
monthly scalar values beginning with January and ending with
December. If the value equals "3", enter 24 scalar values for
each hour of the day beginning with the first hour and ending
with the twenty-fourth hour. If the value equals "4", enter
six sets of scalar values for the six wind speed categories
for a total of 36 scalar values. Each of the six sets of
scalar values represents a Pasquill stability beginning with
category A and ending with category F. Each set is started on
a new card image. If the value equals "5", four sets of
scalar values are entered where each set contains 24 hourly
values (analogous to a value equal to "3" option) for a total
of 96 scalar values. The four sets of scalar values represent
the four seasons in the order of Winter, Spring, Summer, and
Fall. Each set is started on a new card image.
f. Hourly Meteorological Data. These data may be entered in one of two
formats (governed by the value entered in parameter ISW(19)). One format is
that generated by the preprocessor program. This format usually resides on
magnetic tape where the tape device is externally associated with the logical
unit specified by parameter IMET. All hourly data required by the program are
contained on the tape. The other format is card image. The following data
are required for each hour only when the card image format is chosen by the
user. Recall that with the card image method, the calm winds processing
routine and regulatory default options cannot be used.
Parameter
Name
JDAY
Julian Day — This parameter specifies the Julian Day of this
day of meteorological data. This parameter is read by the
program for only the first hour of data for each day. This
parameter is ignored for the second and successive hours of
3-22
-------
Parameter
Name
JDAY each day of data. This parameter is used by the program to
Cont. determine the month or season if required by other program
options. The default value equals "1" (Julian Day 1).
AFV Wind Flow Vector — This parameter specifies the direction
(degrees) toward which the wind is blowing.
AWS Wind Speed — This parameter specifies the mean wind speed
(meters/second) measured at the reference height specified in
parameter ZR.
Gravitational
Settling
Categories
Parameter
HLH
TEMP
DTHDZ
1ST
DECAY
Mixing Height — This parameter specifies the height of the
top of the surface mixing layer (meters).
Ambient Air Temperature — This parameter specifies the
ambient air temperature (degrees Kelvin).
Vertical Potential Temperature Gradient (Optional) — This
parameter specifies the vertical potential temperature
gradient (degrees Kelvin/meter) for a given hour. The value
for this parameter is used by the program only if parameter
ISW(22) equals "3".
Pasquill Stability Category — This parameter specifies the
Pasquill stability category. A value of "1" equals category
A, "2" equals B, "3" equals C, etc.
Wind Profile Exponent (Optional) — This parameter specifies
the wind profile exponent for a given hour. The value for
this parameter is used by the program only if parameter
ISW(21) equals "3".
Decay Coefficient — This parameter specifies the decay
coefficient (seconds'1) for chemical or other removal
processes for a given hour. This parameter overrides any
value entered in parameter DECAY described earlier in
Section 3.1.2.b. If the regulatory default option is chosen
(ISW(28) = 1) and SOa is modeled in an Urban mode, the
program assigns a decay coefficient corresponding to a half
life of four hours. Otherwise, pollutant decay is not
considered.
3-23
-------
3.1.3 Output Information
The ISCST program generates six categories of program output. Each
category is optional to the user. That is, the user controls what output the
program generates for a given problem run. In the following paragraphs, each
category of output is related to the input parameter that controls the output
category. All program output are printed except for the output to disc file.
a. Input Parameter Output. The user may desire to see all input
parameters used by the program. If input parameter ISW(6) eguals "1", the
program will print all program control input parameters, meteorological-
related and information constants, receptor data and source data,
additionally, if parameter ISW(6) equals "2", the program will also print all
hourly meteorological data processed by the program for a given problem run.
b. Daily Concentration (Deposition) Output. This category of output
prints calculated values of average concentration or total deposition for each
day of meteorological data processed by the program for a given problem run.
For each day, tables consisting of average concentration or total deposition
values at each receptor point are printed for all combinations of user-defined
time periods and source groups. For example, suppose combinations of 1-, 3-,
and 24-hour time periods and five source groups (NGROUP eguals "5") are
specified and input parameter IPERD equals "0". Thirty-three tables would be
generated by all time period intervals (twenty-four 1-hour tables, eight
3-hour tables, and one 24-hour table) for a total of 165 tables for all source
groups for each day of meteorological data. Input parameters ISW(7) through
ISW(14) and IPERD specify the time periods and time period interval,
respectively, for which average concentration or total deposition values are
printed. The source group combinations are specified by input parameters
3-24
-------
NGROUP, NSOGRP, and IDSOR. Input parameter ISW{16) controls the employment of
this output category.
c. "N"-Day Concentration (Deposition) Output. This category prints the
average concentration or total deposition calculated over the number of days
("N") of meteorological data processed by a given problem run. Tables
consisting of average concentration or total deposition values at each
receptor point are printed for all source group combinations defined by the
user with input parameters NGROUP, NSOGRP, and IDSOR. Input parameter ISW(15)
specifies the use of this output category.
d. Highest, Second-Highest and Third-Highest Concentration (Deposition)
Output. This category prints tables of the highest, second-highest and
third-highest average concentration or total deposition values calculated at
each receptor point. Tables are produced for all user-defined combinations of
time periods and source groups. For example, suppose 3- and 8-hour time
periods and ten source groups {NGROUP equals "10") are specified.
Thirty-three tables would be produced by all time periods (tables of highest
values and tables of second-highest values and tables of third-highest values)
for a total of 330 tables for all source groups for the example problem run.
Input parameters ISW{7) through ISW(14), and NGROUP, NOSGRP, and IDSOR provide
user control of the desired time periods and source groups, respectively. The
employment of this output category is controlled by input parameter ISW(17).
e. Maximum 50 Concentration (Deposition Output). This category produces
tables of the maximum 50 average concentration or total deposition values
calculated for the problem run. Each table prints the maximum 50 values
including when and at which receptor each value occurred. Tables are printed
3-25
-------
for all user-defined combinations of time periods and source groups which are
specified by input parameters ISW(7) through ISW(14), and NGROUP, NOSGRP, and
IDSOR, respectively. Input parameter ISW(18) controls the use of this output
category.
f. Concentration (Deposition) Output to Disc File. This category writes
the results of average concentration or total deposition calculations to a
file whose device is linked to the program through input parameter ITAP. If
ISW{5) equals "1", the program writes records of the average concentration or
total deposition values for all user-defined combinations of time periods and
source groups for each day of meteorological data processed by the program.
Each record includes the average concentration or total deposition values
calculated at each receptor point. Also, all concentration or deposition
values generated by the "N"-day output option (see category c above) are
written to disc only if the "N"-day output option (ISW(15)) is exercised by
the user.
An illustration of each of the above print output categories is shown in
Section 3.2.4. Also discussed is the order in which the tables and file
records are generated for each output category.
3.2 User's Instructions for the ISCST Program
3.2.1 Program Description
The ISC short-term (ISCST) program is designed to use hourly
meteorological data to calculate ground-level concentration or deposition
values produced by emissions from multiple stack, volume, and area sources.
The receptors at which concentration or deposition values are calculated may
be defined on a (X, Y) right-handed Cartesian coordinate system grid or an (r,
9) polar coordinate system grid. The polar coordinate system defines 360
3-26
-------
degrees as north (positive Y-axis), 90 degrees as east (positive X-axis), 180
degrees as south and 270 degrees as west. Discrete or arbitrarily placed
receptors may also be defined by the user using either type of coordinate
system. When a polar coordinate system is used it should be remembered that
an origin at (X=0, Y=0) is assumed. This program also has the user option of
assigning elevations above mean sea level to each source and receptor. The
stack, volume or area sources may be individually located anywhere, but must
be referenced using a Cartesian coordinate system relative to the origin of
the receptor coordinate system.
Average concentration or total deposition values may be calculated for 1-,
2-, 3-, 4-, 6-, 8-, 12-, or 24-hour time periods. "N"-day average
concentration or total deposition values for the total number of days of
meteorological data processed by the program may also be computed for each
receptor. Average concentration or total deposition values may be printed for
source groups, where a source group consists of any user-defined combination
of sources.
The ISCST program accepts hourly meteorological input data in either of
two options. One option reads hourly meteorological data from a disc file,
magnetic tape unit or other similar external input device. These data are
read in a format compatible with the meteorological data format generated by
the preprocessor program. The other option reads hourly meteorological data
from cards in a card image format. Note, the regulatory default option and
the calm processing option are not available when meteorological data is input
with cards.
The ISCST program produces several categories of output of calculated
concentration or deposition values. All categories of output are optional to
the user. Average concentration or total deposition values may be printed for
all receptors for all combinations of time intervals and source groups for any
3-27
-------
number of days of meteorological data. The average concentration or total
deposition values calculated over an "N"-day period may be printed for all
source groups defined by the user. Also, the highest, second-highest and
third-highest average concentration or total deposition values calculated at
each receptor for all combinations of time periods and source groups may be
printed. The maximum 50 calculated average concentration or total deposition
values may also be printed for all combinations of time periods and source
groups defined by the user. The program may also generate an output tape file
consisting of all calculated concentration or deposition values for each
receptor for each user-defined combination of time periods and source groups
for each day of meteorological data processed by the program. Additionally,
all average concentration or total deposition values calculated over an
"N"-day period may be written to the output tape file for all user-defined
source groups.
The ISCST program is written in FORTRAN 77. Its design assumes that 4
Hollerith characters can be stored in a computer word. The basic program
requires about 32,000 UNIVAC 1100 Series 36-bit words. Another 43,500 words
of data storage are currently allocated for a total of 75,500 computer words.
With this current allotment of executable storage, the program may be run with
up to approximately 400 receptors and 100 sources. The card reader or input
device to this program is referenced as FORTRAN logical unit 5 and the printer
or output device as logical unit 6. The ISCST program is composed of a main
program (ISCST), fifteen subroutines (INCHK, MODEL, DYOUT, MAXOT, MAX50, VERT,
SIGMAZ, ERFX, URBNYZ, XVY, XVZ, URBBAR, AVCALM, NMCALM, and MPRl) and a BLOCK
DATA subprogram (BLOCK). The source codes for all of these routines are
listed in Appendix A. Appendix E contains a logic flow description of the
ISCST program.
3-28
-------
3.2.2 Data Deck Setup
The card input data required by the ISCST program depends on the program
options desired by the user. The card input data may be partitioned into
seven major groups of card input. Figure 3-1 illustrates the input deck
setup. The seven card input deck groups are itemized below:
(1) Title Card (1 card)
(2) Program Control Cards (2 cards)
(3) Receptor Cards
(4) Source Group Data Cards (optional, required only if NGROUP > 0)
(5) Meteorological-Related and Model Constants Cards
(6) Source Data Cards
(7) Hourly Meteorological Data Cards (optional, required only if
ISW(19) = 2)
Example input data for the ISCST program are presented in Appendix C. A
description of the input format and contents of each of the seven card groups
is provided below in Section 3.2.3.a.
3.2.3 Input Data Description
Section 3.1.2 provides a summary description of all input data
requirements of the ISCST program. This section provides the user with the
format and order in which the program requires the input data. The input
parameter names used in this section correspond to those used in Section
3.1.2. Two forms of input data are read by the program. One form is card
image input data (80 characters per record) in which all required input data
may be entered. The other form is magnetic tape which contains hourly
meteorological data in a format generated by the preprocessor program. Both
forms are discussed below.
3-29
-------
(7) Hourly Met.
Data Cards
(6) Source Data
Cards
(5) Met.-Belated
and Model
Constants Cards
(4)Source Group
Data Cards
(3) Receptor Cards
1
(2) Program Control
Cards
r(l)Title Card
optional,
required
only if
ISW(19) = 2
optional,
required
only if
NGROUP > 0
FIGURE 3-1. Input data deck setup for the ISCST program.
3-30
-------
a. Card Input Requirements. The ISCST program reads all card image input
data in a fixed-field format with the use of FORTRAN "A", "I", "F", AND "E"
editing codes. The card input data are partitioned into seven card groups
which are discussed in Section 3.2.2.b and shown in Figure 3-1. The input
parameters contained in Card Groups (2) and (4) correspond with those
described in category "a" of Section 3.1.2. Moreover, Card Groups (1) and (5)
correspond with categories "b" and "c". Group (3) with category "d". Group (6)
with category "e" and Group (7) with category "f". Table 3-4 is a list of all
card image input data which may be entered. For each input parameter.
Table 3-4 provides the Card Group (and the card number within the Card Group,
if possible), parameter name, card columns within which the value of the input
parameter must reside, FORTRAN editing code and a brief description which
includes default values or maximum values allowed, if applicable. The order
in which the input parameters are listed in Table 3-4 is the order in which
the ISCST program reads the input parameters. The user should note that many
card input parameters and even entire Card Groups are ignored or not read by
the program, depending on the options chosen by the user.
Card Groups (1) and (2) consist of a total of three cards. Card Group (1)
consists of one card and contains the parameter TITLE. Card Group (2)
consists of the "ISW" array which contains most of the program's control or
specification parameters. Also contained in Card Group (2) are parameters
which specify the number of sources (NSOURC), the size of the receptor grid
(NXPNTS and NYPNTS), the number of discrete receptors (NXWYPT) and the number
of source group combinations (NGROUP). The maximum number of sources and
receptors is not limited to individual parameters but is a function of four
parameters. This function can be described as:
LIMIT > NPNTS • (NAVG • NGROUP + 2) + NXPNTS + NYPNTS
+ 2 • NXWYPT + 215 • NSOURC +A+B+C+D (3-1)
3-31
-------
W
Q
O
O
H
H
*p?
J^r
Cc
H
gg
M
W CU
W CX
i CL) C/3
fi, aw
w r*<
§ s!
CU H
M SJ
Q O
ffi fa
1
OS
04
H
W
U
W
M
G
O
• rH
4J
CU
•H
t-l
CJ
to
0)
p
0)
06 O g
Oi -P t-l
O -H O
CM T3 En
W —
01
C
•a i
(0 rH
c5
0)
4->
0) 0)
g e
sj 53
m
cu
CU 0)
3 £>
0 |
O &
'O 'O
S_i Jj
fd tJ
U 0
i-H
C\
a
rH
O^
c
•H
T3
(D
Q)
.c
sj
0)
aract
r*
U
1
O
V0
«*<
If)
rH
O
1
rH
H
J
EH
M
EH
rH
C
O
•H
-P G
CO O
fcj 'H
-P 4J
C -H
d) 01
u o
c cu
O 0) rH
U T)
01
0) 0) CD
rH rH 01
3 3 01
U U CO
1— 1 1— 1
rO (0 4-1
U U rH
3
n u m
>4H
i-H CM 0)
Q
(M
n
CM
1
rH
*— .,
rH
*^^
s
W
M
rH
CM
T3
• H
•a *""
•H
g ^
0) O^ CD
4-1 4->
01 0) rO
>1 g -p fi
01 a) n) -H
•O W -H Jj
•H tN-a o
tj W S-i O
^^ o u
lj -H 0
O U
4-> H rH
U O 01 O
tj CU 4-1
0) U
4J Q) £_) 01
S(-l CD
01 4J 01
•H Q) CD (Q rH
*O 4J 4-> Sj (^
t-l (0 (0 (U -H
§G ^"i C *O
• rH CD CD CO rH
U "O G ^ LJ
l-l 0) 01
C O O< C CD
<0 O O g
•H u g e .H 3
01 (0 CO 4-J 01
CD i-4 U in U 01
4J (0 CJ> CTI CD CO
S-i i-H O O >J
CO O U U -H 4->
O CU CU CU T3 rH
3
II II II II CO
rH CM CO <* CD
a
CM
H
^4
1
ro
.»-x
r*j
XM»
s
W
M
1
CM
C U
CO «
•rH rH
01 O
CD CU
4J
S>4 01
nj 4-> C
O -C 30
4J CU-H
'2 C -1-1
£ ? -H n3
•H w
S 14 r-l S-l
^ co a) CD
•a o c "CD
S S c -H g
S cu 'B u -S
a! *« > JJ w
Hrf ^ to a) m e Oj e
-pc-uc3 Qt-1^4-'
'OO'OO'-H CCUCUrH
3 3
II II CO II II II co
rH CM CD O rH i-H CD
a i Q
CM CM
n n
VO OO
1 1
in r^-
*••* ^^
CO ^t1
x*»- 1^.-
s s
w w
M M
i- 1 1
r~i n
CM CM
tl C
O fH rr-t *^*
CO M
0 3
•*H
4J fi 4J i-H
3 O (0 co
4J 4-1 4-1 -H
3 'H G 0^
O 01 aj o
cu c
O 0) O G
n n
0 i-H
CM
n
o
rH
1
cn
^^
if)
^^
S
w
M
t
CM
O
01
CD
01
01
4-1
"3
(0
MH
0)
O
3-32
-------
W
Q
0
0
H
r-|
Q
W
Is
M
W Oi
CM M
— " K
1"S s"
"1 1§
Wv4 OH
••1 r3 /-*
« G ^1
< o .. ^
H U E _
~ S H
2 5*
CM
§g
g~
8
CM
E
EH
W
O
t/1
M
C
O
•H
-P
CU
•H
!-l
U
01
cu
Q
0)
15 o -p
a: -P u
0 -H 0
CM T3 fa
W ~-
01
•o i
u 3
(0 rH
O O
0
u
0)
i i
0) CU
s e
(0 (0
*•< z
&
- u
CU CD
3 A
2 §
0 2
•a -d
t-l tj
(0 (0
u o
>, Q) rH rH rH
rH S-l (0 (0 (0
U (0 -P -P -P
3 0 0 0
0 to -P -*-1 -tJ
•C -p
$
t-i fcj U
JJ rH O O O
CU (0
CD U
U -H
x o> c c c
0) O O O o
1 , ,_J J
^H >rH *^ *rH
O 4J -P -P
S-i (0 (0 (0
(rt O S-i S-1 U
Jj 0) .p -P JJ
•S-S 1 8 S §
-P g ,„ C ,„ C
.S >< $0* -Sg^ "g^,
ti ., r1 oua) o°a) o°a)
CU 3 <0 % •* -P -H -P -H -P
QJ-PS U (0 ti(0 U(0
o g r. « o e^mo
4J_,UJ3'0 -HjU -H«U 'HjU
•O^-H 0)01 4J> 01 -P2 01 -P^ W
•O^CnrH-pai (Oca) (OCQ) (Oca)
10 o c e ^ os u os (-< os
4J rH -H 3 3 -H 3 3 -H 3 3 -H 3
3 oS^w O .pen O -pen O .pen
CU i-i'Ocuoi J3 «j -H m £ ti -H 01 JSU-HW
CJJQ (0 I3en(0 I3oi(0 I3oi(0
•HCCOCUO -HOO (MOO MOO
•H -p e in -p .ccu-p x;cu-p XCU-P
OSjCOm-H-H OICUiH OICU-H OICOrH
CCUSWI03 CrHTDS GrgTSS CnT33
(0 (0 (0 (0
II II II 4-1 II II 4-1 II II 4-1 II II 4-1
CU 0) 0) 0)
OrH (M Q OrH Q OrH Q OrH Q
rM (M (M (M
M MUM
(Sj <& \O
rH rH rH rH
1 III
rH CO If) !"•
rH rH rH rH
^-^ *-K .—•» *-H
VO 1 — CO CT^
S S S S
W OQ W t«
M M M M
rH rH rH rH
2 01
(0 c 0)
3 ° §
pj " ^J
O -P 01
X! !-l -H 01
1 3 01 (0
•* o o
si Cu 4->
O 1 Q) rH
C <* T3 3
(0
II II
-------
W
Q
0
O
H
M
Q
W
S
(2
o2
H
05
fa O
M
- H
00 CU
a M
W (X
<* « HO
1
cu
* u
CU 0)
3 J3
0 §
i-i 3
O S,
•o -o
fO (0
o a
rH rH rH
(d fd (d
-P -P 4J
o o o
-P -P -P
- t4
O O °
I .2 1
4-> 4J ~y
ffl m 2
j_i -^
C r1 ^
S S s
w « « c -a §
"O f) *O 'O S T3 O O 'O
O o ° a) -H a)
•H -P -H JJ U 4J
(-1 (D t-i aj rH cu (d o
•H J U '*H *^ U -P ^ O
^J> 01 4J > 01 (d CO
•o e a) (dca) ti ca>
^ OS U OS 3 OS
3 -H 3 3 -H 3 O -H 3
O -POl O 4J01 £ t-l 4-> W
X! 14 -H 01 i! fcl -H 01 1 3 -H 01
1 3 01 (d 1 3 01 (d r^3 O 01 (d
voOO ooOO i—tXO
OI«UrH OI4-i n ii m ii H 4-i
OJ Q) 0)
OrH Q OrH Q OrH Q
(N CM CM
MUM
f\j ^^ vO
CS (N (N
1 1 1
rH ro in
(N (N (N
***. ^^ ^*^
rH CQ CO
rH i-H rH
S S S
WWW
M M M
rH rH rH
(N (N ->
O ^
I t 4-J
tj ^\ *D
S "30
01 C 4J
rtl /rt fj f>.
g U rH >1 ^ -P
4J > O 'H ^S O
n3 w ftj i CQ
j_i Co ^3 C flJ
3 os z- o e
O -H 3 O ~ -H 3
AU4-I01 C~4J01
1 3 -H 01 -H 01
CM £ O CCO
1 CU -P -H -H CU 4J
O^CDrH t4tl(DrH
£« CN 'O 3 CU CU *O 3
n.
•Q ^J o
4J C XI
0 § S|*
's-i u j.
(D A jC
f^| -£^ CJ
._ nj
QJ /rt ^
£ LJ en
, ,-( m
-------
w
8
o
H
M
Q
EH
tt
O 2
fa O
M
- EH
co Cu
OH M
^ W OS
•* -a PI &
1 CD H W
<"> 3 ;? 3
r* *S Q
V*
o
0)
is ° ^
a -P LI
O -H O
-Si
(Q
C
T3 §
(^ rH
C_) O
O
S-I
0)
a) 0)
e e
E S3
n)
a
P! o)
3 £1
O §
s-i 3
a "z
TJ TJ
m m
0 U
0) TJ t!
O> 0) C
(0 -P (0
(-1 ft)
OT 0) rH
0) > 3 "5
,-H m rj O
r a) g o
•H •£. -H <"
A en 4J n
•H m
o -^ u ,-.
C c "
-P -P 0) m
C C U *"
•H -H C
(4 Ll O 4->
a a u
C
(0
, second highest,
e group
highest
st tables
ssumes 0
U 4-> 0) 05
S-i G Si
3 -H 4-)
O U 'H i— 1
W ftJS 3
(0
II MH
0)
O
• H
| i *-l
2 "w
4-)
C TJ
0) 0)
um 50 tables
mum 50 average cone
.on values calculat
3 source group
x * "S * °
^ 0) |1 I
C -P ^ o) co
CU en
4J 4-> i-H rtj
C C (0
n) u
T} ^
goo
j. *W t*
M-l
T)
ological data is
VIET in a preprocesse
logical data is read
£ M o
•JjJ -H 0) CO
E § "o) 1
rH W
>1 (TJ >1 01
Ll 'H Ll
3 0> 3 4J
O O O rH
•C *~~^ «C ^
fQ
II II MH
0)
rH (N Q
M
OO
ro
1
r-
ro
Oi
rH
jj"
CO
M
rH
CS
C C C
O O O
C -H -H -H
• f^ Qj Oi Oi
^i ^D ^D ^D
CU O
I I I en
o O o O 3
X S S S en
en
rH G CH CH 'C
fl ^ fT3 fO
3 Ll Ll Ll rH
DS i — ' } — * p~i 3
fO
II II II II 4-1
0)
O rH (N OO Q
M
O
1
o>
oo
o
-------
Ij — -
1 0)
ro 3
*J -J-*
« C
<. O
H O
§
0
o
H
M
§
£
O 2
fa O
H
^
Q5 M
w a
H 0
W GO
S M
rV ^
< D
CU 2
Cu P
2 <
S
Q O
K fa
|
O4
H
O
to
M
G
O
•H
-P
QJ
•H
!-l
u
(0
(!)
a
0)
s" 1
O -i O
fa T3 fa
pa —
0]
•o g
(0 iH
O
a>
4-1
0) a)
(0 (0
^* 2
rO
CU
Qj (U
3 £1
0 g
O S
73 T3
U U
m m
u o
i
iH SJ.H i-i n) i-i -p fD ti
•H j. (0 O -H 3 -H -H O
M-l nO m -^ 4J-PrH4JS4->
Oi^j 4^ (0 C (0 -H C O nj
Ol .H S 3 "t-1 0)(0-4J<» 3
W 2 C^1 OCU-POJ3O<
-Prn^; a) OiEoiCU Q)
g S a. u <" r- u
•S §13 * J5 *^,VOr_,3l<"
s^§i 5 ^* S-a -H1^ o
OT -HOT >,s *J jl. "° g tl '3 Og ^jji.
r3i O w oo in *H 1^ -H ^ oo
" VO *^ rH (NJ J|{ 'O ^O fQ 03 (N|
"»J 01 vO 3 Q) ^** n-I (0 flj "*" *
°3r°'cS-§'QrH-"w '^W^^1 OTOlrH2w
°"1 S'S'S 2 ^S Sjc §,2 S*2 «| 2 8 s; c
S-iC CU m2o S-id) -HO> (Ufo2°
O^ O ^ *O 3 ^J "X3 (i\ O^ O-t ^ *O Q) ^* O4
O Qi 0) C O OJ $~i ^ * *£ i > O S ^ ^0 4 ' fl) £ t * 1 1
CUa>32U3U3 3 CU-P3Cn03-P3 3
fij Wl (Tl
-------
ro 3
W 'H
J -p
m c
< a
§
•
a
U
S
TD ^
O -P
U (0
-P U
•H O
•a &,
w —
T3 §
ti 3
(0 rH
°3
S-l
0)
m
u
a)
cu a)
^3 jd
o §
u 3
O S
m m
U O
0)
C 3 -H 0) 3
.C -P (0 C
•o •? ii
81
o
4-"
>i
§5
CCCG C-uC
OOOOWO-HO
.H.H.H-H
_ -p
3 3
4-4 -H m
a H T3
w o w o
II II
I-H rsj
3 3
4H -H 4H
a H -a
fvj
(N
M
O
in
01 PJ
ij in
"8-S
7 g
><«
0 >i
co
5 £
0"i ^^
O O
-------
„ £"
1 rtl
co 3
W -H
J 4J
§ G
fl Vj
M
Q
O
U
H
M
s
§
H
«
O 2
fa O
M
* EH
00 CU
Ctf M
H O
W 00
S W
< Q
< Q
Cu 2
*~i ,^*n
CU H
n s
Is
8
a
cu
H
o
00
M
C
o
•H
•H
tl
U
01
a
a>
5 ° "*""
H i
a 4-) u
O -H O
01
•o 1
(0 .-1
°i "O
4J C lJ (0
01 -H O 0)
•O 4-1 -P tl
aj o 3 m
5 T1 P "2 w
* w w 3 i
-Pa) tj>
O °* c ® ^
1-1 M a) JH
IPS!
u g g •§ e
°< 01 S •-" C
C ^
e O TJ c\
rH '••* 4J rH
° 2 3 -P S
-M ^ rsj •
(rt fl 4J ^ «••••* r™l
Q} O "^ (1
0) O 01 rH
3 o S
® ^ 4J -2 °°
fl ^5 (0 e ft v
tj 3 ^ flJ
O r-l O 5 4J (0
u m u tn ^n 4-1
ft U ft 3
01 (0 e
II II -H 4-1 O
•H CM H 'S U-l
OJ
M
^1
in
1
CO
in
^^»
rq
x**
S
to
M
i— |
rvj
4->
• i-H
01 3
0) (0
3 "oj
4-1 TJ
(0
o
£ °
*3 m
S 2
>i ^
4J 5
m
3 a)
0)
lj
4-)
dl O
f^ C
4->
o) -n
01
e e -M
O O (0
u s-i a)
ft ft *4-4
II II
i-H (N
CNj
I-I
vO
in
I
m
in
^*
03
«H*
^
GO
M
rH
(N
01
•H
S
•o 2
a) *c
i-H -P
i-H
0) u
t3 a)
E 4->
0>°
j? m
-|J
CQ 3
• H »H
0 Si
w
frt "'
i|1
01 JTI 0)
10 o
s E e
(0 (0
o" o"-5
5-1 tl 0)
ft ft .a
u u
rH CM
OJ
M
CO
in
I
t^
in
^^.
CM
^H^
^
00
rH
CM
0)
T3
i
Cn
•O -O
O
S£
en ft
0)
•a c
4J
|3
1 1
d O
« C
01 01
01 O
3 T3
£ E
(0 <0
0^ O^
o o
u u
ft ft
II II
rH CM
CM
M
O
1
in
^••»
o
co
*^
S
M
rH
CM
MM o m o a)
O U O tJ 3
0) 0) rH
UN U^ (0
0) 0) >
•§ < g ^ o
3 3 ^~*
H N s
o .2 o T! ^
01 rji 01
'd 'M S-1 01 01
r s ?2 ^ c
&-0 i*^ 8,8,
£ u 'u £ 2 'u u
^J i~ dj| 4-^ 01 * Q
fD M jj
C S-i C ^ i-« CU ^
wSa^ w^Oi ^ci)
c o c o
_1 ^j rtj _^ T^ ni nj
'o 0 S "o 2 a> Z;
01 O44-1 ft W "V, 0)
0) O *~~* O ?^ I-i
J_l ^^ ^"^ ^^ -iH U yj
3 'tj rr\ 01 TD yi 01 .H
01 .5 "H *•* -rl ^
^ U rH ^ rH O
'o °ve °oe o
U U M U -P tj 0)
0) 0)0)0) 0)OO) 0)-H
ftji 3 r) (j) 3 Q ,__)
C rH g S-l rH § Q<
2 2^> 2'3> 2-H
\O ^O vO vO
MM M M
CM CO ^
VO M i— 1 CM
II 1 1
M rH
* * * *
U 00 00 H
*3 ^ Jg* S^
^5 Pi Pi S
C/3 ^ ^H R
22 2 2
CM
-------
<* £
co 3
C
W "H
J -P
« C
H§
M
Q
8
H
M
Q
W
2»
<5
ft*
Is
fa O
M
«S fr
CO ft
Qi M
W OS
h y
W C/2
S M
< Q
^
« ij
<
Is
^ 1$
Q?
Q O
gb
1
OS
cu
H
W
o
M
C
o
•H
4-1
ft
•H
U
O
01
0)
Q
0>
;§ ° -p
gH £
OS -P !-l
O "H O
fa T3 fa
W —
01
£*
*O E
1-1 3
(0 rH
C-) O
0)
0) 0)
e S
a (0
v£>
M
0
CO
1
in
f\3
ft
1
CD
2
(NI
C-)
0) Sj rH (0
3 CO 0) W O iH U
O3 M-l 0) W O II
"WO 0) 'H S M 7J
^aiJ-l-g ^.«M §S
Sfl**-! 2 s-'ni ^u^
-P OJ rrH, ii JjT^ J*' p Y |
O m 2^ nS >*
r(j 1-1 "H oi i. O^ -H W .H 0) CU
4J O I-J -P S-i t-i
C -H 0) -C
-------
fa
8
o
H
M
Q
W
&
0 2
Pn O
HH
- H
—. W K
^i T3 HO
" S IS
W -H ^ _.
j -p g- S
me ^ §
P-J c ) E"*
J3 •"••*
CU EH
M 2]
9 P
r)^ [V.
8
p^
eu
H
8
OQ
H
G
O
•H
-P
Q*
•H
U
U
m
a)
Q
O)
3 O -P
S O (0
« -P S
O -H o
£ti 'O Cri
w -^
01
c
10 i
(0 iH
0)
0) 0)
e s
at «
^ 2
(0
cu
V 1-1
Cn e m
-------
I
m
w
pq
<
o>
3
-P
C
Description
&
-H O
"O fa
W •—
T3
(D
U
0)
0) 0)
e E
£
V U
Oi 0)
3 U3
° §
O 2
'O *O
S-l S-l
O CO O O O O O
S ftcn
o
o
rH
fa
CO
o
I
0)
0)
S-i
«• U
ui co
M -H
gs
» N
M Q
s
O
m
uu
w
u -H cu e
O) 3 3 -H
-P O< O K
C O) S-i (0
o
r>]
O
CO
I
CU
06
8
o
-p
Oj 0)
3 U
SH 3
tjl Q) O
C A O
O<0
(0 4-> -H
C i-H
-^ <»
-------
I a>
W§
W -H
J -P
pq C
W
Q
O
O
H
M
8
i
s
g§
U 4
sB
H O
W OQ
1|
E~<
£D ^""»
CU H
55 rfj
§ fa
8
a:
cu
H
00
M
a
0
-H
-P
Oi
• H
U
0
en
0)
Q
0)
*£. *O *""*
< O -P
c2 o e
*
0)13
-PC
en u
0) 0)
I M
en u
m 04
o
o
o
vo
oo
EH
ID
O en C
U -H
f*
u ^H
(U (0
u
4-JOTOi-l
Ǥ
£W
i
§S
o T) -H nj
•-H
I
OO
I
«
H
O»
m
in
m
3-42
-------
W
D
0
O
H
M
Q
W
J H
£M
X-. W 05
fS «w
ro 3 ^ w
§ S 0
H -H "a _
J -P 5 S
in c * <5
S5 n ""<
<>4« V^ g ,
E"1 U ^ ^
»•-•» •— ' ^^
CU H
02
Q O
OS fa
6~
8
«
cu
EH
Ul
&
M
C
0
•H
-P
CU
•H
tt
U
CO
cu
Q
0)
15 o -P
06 O <0
H e
tt 4J U
O -H O
fa -O fa
w —
w
c
•o s
u 3
Iio c a 2 ^ cu*
>H4J M(0-p,jm nJ on ^4J
OrH tJ m'H M-l MSj-ST,
^/ ^~| " n) *^ TT7 *^ C m
.S SS5«3.gS ^||e
5« -ofil& 1- Ico-S
i° ^mai^^Sg "SC.H^
3 OTet7>X^'^5 "0 «
C in S 5 C P ? CUgE
^« 4,^2 «*«& u§ 2
••a. -3 g s<§ £2 o-2.-
g«H ^MU cucu-pcu C75_2'o
,, ^ " S & ^ 2 5 . 5 -S « 3 2
S^ 'r.ScSo^^^ ^ - u
."3 a^O1u51 ^ cu co rd cu
01 0 *J o 'Q|1^ -PuUil
Q $ r- •" CO n3 -H E
°g lu»*8-o^« gtjg1!
•H &-"a>™.-.f^a>ocuM i< 3 rH
24J rdjjO'.;:-PcQ^i rdaiOC
r3-H CUd) " tOt-HWlfl CU S-lO
CKCQ Ecu cu^-coTa O-H
HO CQ(d!JW-PO>HU CO CU4J
ttCU 'Hticu>in3O
MM M
o
00
o o
vO CO UD
1 1 1
Ol rH rH
in
CU >H
< < w
EH Q CO
MM M
en
rH
1
•* in o
rH rH (N
m m m
u cu X! a)
CO U U x!
4-> rd -P 4-1
C M-l fO
W U g
M 4-> _
w E
^ l£ ^
i-H ^
1
t-i f™n
^^ ^Jl
•H .
Jj Tl —
n "0
§ _ o w
i'3,.s a
2 *• o -a «
o C -P
, -P P O
^ co ^ cu •-"
"i S ? en (0
-^ M <" 0) U
OU ^, -P ^ .r<
l.^o
2,2§ °g
1X1 'H O
CO 4J 0)
•H Q) (0 O) 4-1
x; .c 4J ^ cu
EH 4-1 W 4-1 £
vO
M
(N
rH
1
r-
SH
00
M
o
CM
in
3-43
-------
FORTRAN EDIT CODE
ION
- EH
M a
a M
T? B|
H J ^ °
§§ f;§
HO g ^
*"' CU EH
3 s
t-H S
Q O
& &4
<^ •*•»
0
8
a
Qi
EH
(^
U
t/1
M
Description
a>
2 o -P
OH O rt3
H g
a -P u
O -H O
h tj fo
W —
w
•a i
t4 ^J
(0 i-H
CJ O
£J
0)
4J
at a)
E S
(0 (0
(0
a<
S S-l
Ol 0)
3 XI
o e
SH 3
a -z
•O T3
(-1 S-i
i-l 4J 0)
C 3 Oi
W O - (0
xi fi -p
u
t>j
^*o I o
S u u S
C/3 Q, ^) ^j
M n -Q 0)
parameter is not read if
upper air station numl
rological data. The nuir
on number read from the m
0 -H
01 0) 4-J
• H Q) 4-> (0
x: x;
W tl g
Qi -P
c^ §" 3
^ g
» a, ^
CT> -1-1 1.H
CO 4-1
•H 0) n)
x; x: 4-)
EH 4-> CO
vO
M
^
tN
1
rH
S
M
O
OJ
in
0)
A
4-J
§
SH
<4H
1
t-<
corresponding year
rological tape
o
0)
0) 4J
X!
(0 -H
U 4J
•H .H
m 01
a unique source identi
roblem run. Must be a po
S-4 {|^|
(D
4J CU
c x;
W -P
m
M
in
I
r-H
0
2
*
i— i
U3
tack-type source
olume-type source
OT >
u u
O r-H
r-H
M
vO
H
O.
M
4e
rH
10
rea-type source
(0
ii
(N
CU OT :
>i C
-P 3
1 ° O
fj
4J H
OT SH
(U
. Ol
o j« §•
0)
• — 1 Ql
C ^0
parameter pertains 01
es with building wake
ed or left blank.
u u
CO (J O
•H i— 1
ro (0
SH
0)
Q) £
O) '
5 So
S-l CO
O Q)
ti Cn |
-P 4J OT
G (0 OT
W U (0
(N
M
cn
t
oo
on
•3
*
^_l
ya
^
0)
0)
• •H
4J
D
O
T
jj
3
o
OT
fi
O
m
Q)
o
•o
0)
n)
o
Oi
0)
M
T3
J_|
t)
y
CQ
•H
x:
*
3-44
-------
, FORTRAN EDIT CODE
TION
W CXi
wS
'2 s w
g 2 Q
3£ 04
C C w
W -H 0)
ff
. 0) 01
if ISW(23) > 0
indicator. Se
ns. Default as
^ .2
0) G 4->
parameter is ignor
sion rate variatio
meter ISW(23) for op
01 01 m
•H -H S-l
f. e m
H cu a
rH
M
O
rH
CD
ij
fa
O»
«
r-l
V
vO
cu s-i
QJ O
4J
•O
c (0
m
concentration ,
mass per time
, <"
^ ^
P m
r emission rate. F
.d 1 sources, units
cu c
4J <0
c
W O
o
00
00
rH
|
rH
rH
d
«
i-H
•k
vO
S-l rH CU
CU U
1 i Jj
l a 01
e meter.
u
(0
cr
CO
S-i
0)
o»
01
01
m
cu
S-i
01
4J
3
<4H CU
0 X
4->
S-l -H
^ S
jcation) in me
volume source
source
*s3
ordinate (east-west
center of a stack
hwest corner of an a
O 4->
u a) 3
X 4J 01
o
p^
fa
m
i
i-H
W
X
*
rH
^
VO
m CU
O £
(A
ni r*
w M
-P fO
m
location) in m<
volume source
source
fiSS
ordinate (north-sout
center of a stack
hwest corner of an a
O 4->
O cu 3
>< 4-1 01
o
r^
fa
r*j
ro
I
vO
rs>
W
He
i-H
t.
^Q
0)
w
(0
-0
0)
u
o
en
0)
U 0)
o m
01 t-l
n) o>
> 4J
CU 0)
ss
o
^0
fa
00
ro
I
ro
ro
VI
M
*
i
H
vO
O •• S-i
01 O
Q) 14_|
SL" .s
£>•. ^ CU
"^ 01 j-i
~ S-i "°
"w o >
U 4-1 4.,
4-> -v
^* tr> ?j
••H r^
2 S
4J -C U
O^ ""^ Q)
0) 3 4J
C O C
p-*| U] Q)
O
vO
fa
^
^
i
CTv
ro
OT
*
rH
v
VO
C
O
•H
01
in
•H
g
0)
he effective
4-1
2 sources, enter
ht.
0) O>
>i 0)
4J J3
*
01
cu
£
•H
1 i
^
D
0
cu
u
S-i
3
O
01
r^
U
(0
0)
S-i
0
UH
•o
CU
m
0)
Oi
CD
01
• r-l
rr*
r.
n)
CJ
01
•H
;H
*
3-45
-------
1
T3
(U
m 3
H.S
si
<: o
G
o
-
a
o
01
0)
Q
S
0)
•O
o
o
0 -H 0
fa *O fa
•a
m
u
0)
4->
a) a)
g g
to a)
(0
a.
a, w
§1
a s
•a -a
S-i U
(0
o
3
•H 01
0) U
4J 0)
O C
C .£
•H 4->
O 01 i-H
U 01 ro
0)3
(i)4j
d) U 0)
4J 4J
t-l 0) 0) 4-1 (1)
O g £ 01 g
O
vO
o-i-1
0)
e
0)
(0
og
3(0
O-n
WTJ
(0
o
5
o
fa
o
fa
o
fa
•o
0<0
4J T)
O 3
O
fa
er
2-0
oj
,,.^
o(o
" U -H .H
4J •-!
•H O (0 4->
00
O
in
I
in
«*"
VO
in
(N
I
r~
I
m
I
CJ»
I
in
o
I
co
H
«
«
*
«
«
«
vo
vO
vO
vO
vO
vO
cu
«
CM
vO
(U
g
8
o
w
a>
u
3
01
JS
U
S-i
O
U-l
•o
(U
4J
(0
0)
Oj
to
S-i
(0
o
01
H
«
fl 4->
--
« S
"3
-
eo
CQ 0)
0)
nj .r
° ® ^
Sls
S-l
0)
4J
0)
4-J
. w m
O 4J CU
s-i u
<1) d) (D
N 14-1 js;
i U-J (0
g a) S
G
-------
I
n
J 4J
CQ C
FORTRAN EDIT CODE
ION
- H
oo a*
(% M
pa tt
H U
W 00
S pq
3 Q
S3 Q
& 2
B~
H-J ^^
a. H
2 ^
p2
Q O
K fa
u~
i
8
a
cu
H
00
O
W
1 1
Description
0)
5 "S *"*
^c o -^
g°i
a .p u
O -H O
fa T3 fa
&a «-
cn
r£
•a e
!-i 3
m i— i
0 0
u
!j
d)
4J
a) cu
(0 m
Vi 2
(0
a.
V !j
Qj 0)
3 £)
O §
U 3
O S
•O T3
LJ S-l
nj m
O O
O cu
s-i .c
N
parameter is not read if NVS equals
card 1 for a given source. Enter
cn 6
•H O
.C ti
H 4-1
O
O
.-H
fa
OO
0
oo
1
rH
2
I/I
>
«
n
vjO
u cn
0) C
OJ-H
r-H
tational settling velocity (meters
d) for each gravitational sett
•H C
> O
m o
U 0)
cn cn
ory. Enter NVS values
Cn
lJ J2
0) -P
N
parameter is not read if NVS equals
card 1 for a given source. Enter
cn e
•H 0
£. U
H 4-1
O
O
i-H
fa
OO
0
oo
1
i-H
•^
2*
jg
3
C3
«
•*
\o
£
u
(0
Q)
ce reflection coefficient for
(0
4-1
S-i
3
cn
CO
cu
3
i-H
tational settling category. Enter NVS va
•H
>
(0
u
Cn
mO — ^4-i.C llrojs O)vo u
jrocu-H-p -~- u x: ^ O
fa(MT3 ••HM, m-P 4-1
co<^--!-i .. s;i3 ^.o)
the source emission rate scalars i
r depending on the value of ISW(23) or
hever parameter is available). If ISW
'LG = 1 enter 4 seasonal scalars in the o
nter, spring, summer, and fall (1 card);
enter 12 monthly scalars beginning
ry and ending with December (2 cards); i
iter 24 scalars for each hour of the da;
); if = 4, enter 6 scalars per card for
speed category and 6 cards for each of
Pasquill stability categories (A-F)
); and if = 5, enter 24 hourly scalars
$-io)utij-Hsmr, co co
0 then
source for which QFLG >0.
^H -C
rt 0
^0 ID
10 0)
« u
°£
vw
O T3
m
II 0)
(,
3 «
fa -H
o<
^T3
T-, U
C <°
m u
o.2
ii 5
^•x V
m o
CN
•~- II
S
00 *•»
M M
(N
4-1 ^
..H S
W
TJ M
2^
• ».
-P 0)
0 u
C C
o
CO
•H T)
(0
'S 2
M
* M
U .H
cn -O
• H (^
x: m
EH 0
«
*
3-47
-------
w
o
o
u
H
M
g
5
OH
g— |
OH
O 53
fe O
M
- H
C/3 CU
* EH U
i n» H W
1 UJ vi pi
oo 3 •§ g
[VJ ,— i OH
J 4J < Q
si B!
^* CU EH
S <
S
Q O
CM fa
l CU
•-H x:
S-l 4-»
3
O CD
X! 4->
&
0 o
CJ
to X
T3
'O
CO
!c ™
^j
CO
•H
<+H
O CO
• H
JS
>iH
& .
(0
C 4J
fO (0
•H -0
rH
3 rH
>-3 tO
CJ
•H
CU W
Si O
4J rH
O
u O
0) 0)
4-> 4J
C CU
W £
oo
M
00
1
VO
^
Q
hj
.g
4t
1— 1
V
4C
j-^.
^
U
•H
^
|J
CQ
U
O
^1
£
fO
O W
4-1 0)
4J
"O (d
(1) SJ
requi:
ssion
•H
g
•H •"
r" rH
£ <°
.-H C
|.2
C _jj
, «>
i -H
O Sj
to
c >
o
CQ CU
m >
cu n)
co J3
cu cu
,C X
4-1 4J
^H W
7? (0
U
'•§•8
•^ \M
? W
-o
U O
•2 ^ ""t
5 ®
O 13 r^
-M Q
^•H e
CO J3
•o
*"' -H O
" EH U
O
4J
S-l H rH
'-a '* **
r-H ^
flj _O ^
_C5 **~'
Jj rn ^
•*~* \n
'H e
S-i O
Q) 'Q *^J
4J a c
C -H (0
&4 S S4
O
00
fa
VO
i-H
1
?
J^
He
^
r-H
«.
^(
|*^
^^.
TD
G
O
U
0)
CO
0)
04
Cfl
t-J
Q)
4-*
Q)
^ N
•rt •*"*
(u -^
0) f*
04 'm
W^
-a cu
c u
•H fl
S 0)
u
n] (u
1 U
4J
CU ^
i 'O
cu
S-l
u 3
CU CQ
4-> tO
C 0)
w e
o
oo
fa
^Jl
0]
1
p-
i-H
g
<
*
4C
i-H
«.
He
r~
Cn
G
•H
X
•H
£
cu
u
to
S-i
3
CO
cu
JS
4J
MH
O
QJ
O
jj
0)
(J_(
4-1
XI .
^ •»—•
52
•*-« Q)
JJ
CU a)
x: e
4J ^^,
CU l
W rH
O
00
fa
CM
00
1
If)
5
K
He
HC
rH
s
He
*~,
C
•H
^
rH
CU
^
W
cu
cu
(4
cu
•a
(U
3
4-1
to
S-i
CU
01
s
0)
4J
•H
id
4-1
CU
•H
i
m
cu
x;
4->
14
0)
4-)
C
O
OO
fa
O
1
OO
00
cu
g
H
HC
He
i-H
«.
4(
p^
• 4J
00 C
0)
•rt
II t>
O
i j ^™*
111
WJ
w , u
." *^
CO
rH
rH
•H
3 —
Oi .
CQ U
fl] 4-1
Ol CU
0) »
x; u
4->
II
0) 00
4-1
w m
t-H
M
VO
IT)
EH
M
,|C
4t
i-H
*.
^C
f-*.
•
CQ
CD
e
• rl
4-1
W
>l
<
S
T3
CU
4J
O
G
in
•H
Oi
Q
S-i
TJ
S-i
tO
CJ
CO
•H
rj
H
*
^^
CO
cu
g
• rl
4J
06
B
^,
^
m
T3
a>
4-1
O
3
O
xi
^
CJ
03
CU
^1
0
IP.
-a
a>
4->
m
cu
0i
0)
t-j
0)
•H
•a
nj
CJ
CO
•r|
r^
H
«
3-48
-------
Q
0
o
EH
M
B
O 2
M
CO 0<
^ r^ HO
icu H W
^ 3 rl Q
M iH O?
T J_) S Q
S "tf Qj ^
rtf O **2
p_j rS E^
J3 ****
0i EH
t4
S-H O
S ~
co
•d e
u 3
rtj rH
Uc8
S-l
CD
CD CD
S S
10 <0
J-l ^
CO
a.
» S4
01 CD
3 £>
O §
U 3
O S3
•d T3
S-l S-l
m m
O O
.
oo
II
^^
rH
(M
M
M-4
•H
"c
O
•d
(0
CD
*H
rameter is
<0
04
CO
•H
EH
O
•
00
fa
^*
vO
1
(*^
in
CU
•K
4C
rH
v
r>
4J
e exponen
rH
•H
<4-l
O
u
Oi
-o
c
•H
0)
XI
CD
4J
fi
Sj
o
^x
-
it (seconds"
:oeff icien
u
>i
(0
o
CD
•d
CD
4J
U
CD
4J
w
O
00
fa
CM
1
in
£-*
^
cj
fa^
a
4C
^c
pH
x
?L
.
t-i
3
O
X!
CQ
O
m
"3
rH
rH
O
04
CO
removal of
rH
u
•H
CD
U
0)
3
CO
>
CO
•rH
>.
CO
•C
8
CO
CD
CQ
CQ
CO
b
Sj
0
rH
3
CO
>u
CD
Q
C
•H
K_j
r4!
CJ
/—\
i parameter I
W4
•H
Q)
CD
3
r-H
>
IT>
CO
0)
T3
•H
Ll
CD
S
C 01
O -H
•H £.
4J 4J
O*
4J »
rH 0)
3 -O
rO O
m e
0)
•d
>« S
S3
4J hi
(0 3
^ T3
.K
0)
i u
o
ll 1
LO
04 s
o Ii1
U TO
CM
u S
CO CO
U M
CO C
CD
OX!
^
01
cl CD
correspond!
1 other cas
Q) '"""'
i-j (0
1— 1
(0 C
> M
O CQ
^3 .
*S1?
CD | J*
oj ii i jij
Sj CD rH
CD m u
4J -H *~-
CD rH 00
£ 1 CM
Sj r-H ^
(0 CO
CQ
CD
•H
-P
CO
s repeate
•H
O
Cn
-d
u
01
•H
4J
s
CM
II
O^
rH
•^»
s
CO
M
4-4
M
^
rH
II
_^
(Jl
^
rjg
CO
M
MH
•H
•O
(0
0)
4->
O
c
CQ
•H
04
3
O
I_|
Cn
•d
(0
U
01
•'H
X!
H
HC
^^
CQ
0)
•H
4->
CO
a
D
0
*T*
^
•HMK
^1
nj
•0
a)
4-1
14H
O
u
3
O
o
(0
0)
J^
O
•a
at
rd
CD
04
CD
S-l
ca
•H
TD
S-i
(0
U
01
•rH
X!
H
*
3-49
-------
where:
NSOURC = number of input sources (see card columns 1-6 of the second card
of Card Group (2))
NXPNTS = number of X points or ranges in the receptor grid (see card
columns 7-12 of the second card of Card Group (2))
NYPNTS = number of Y points or direction radials in the receptor grid
(see card columns 13-18 of the second card of Card Group (2»
NXWYPT = number of discrete receptors (see card columns 19-24 of the
second card of Card Group (2»
NPNTS = NXPNTS • NYPNTS + NXWYPT (total number of receptors)
NAVG = number of time periods. This equals the number of time period
parameters (ISW(7) through ISW(14) in the first card of Card
Group (2» set to "1"
NGROUP = number of source group combinations (see card columns 25-30 of
the second card of Card Group (2)). For the purpose of
computing the required data storage for a problem run, assume
NGROUP equals "1" in Equation (3-1) if NGROUP equals "0" in Card
Group (2)
A = NPNTS • NGROUP if ISW(15) equals "1" in the first card of Card
Group (2); otherwise A equals "0"
B = 4 • NAVG • NPNTS • NGROUP if ISW(17) equals "1" in the first
card of Card Group (2); otherwise B equals "0"
C = 201 • NAVG • NGROUP if ISW(18) equals "1" in the first card of
Card Group (2); otherwise C equals "0"
D = 201 • NAVG • NGROUP if ISW(18) equals "1" in the first card of
Card Group (2); otherwise D equals "0"
and
LIMIT = 43,500. This is the current data storage allocation of the
program (consult Section 3.2.7 for modification of this value)
Card Group (3) consists of parameters which contain the receptor location
information. If the user chooses not to define a receptor grid (either NXPNTS
or NYPNTS = "0"), the program does not read parameters GRIDX, GRIDY and GRIDZ
(regular). Likewise, parameters XDIS, YDIS and GRIDZ (discrete) are not read
by the program if the user chooses not to specify any discrete receptors
(NXWYPT = "0"). If ISW(4) = 0 both GRIDZ (regular) and GRIDZ (discrete) are
3-50
-------
not entered. All regular receptor information is read before discrete
receptor information. In addition, one discrete receptor card is read for
each discrete receptor. This format is described in Table 3-4 and Section
3.1.2.d.
Card Group (4) contains the parameters which define what sources
constitute each source group combination. This Card Group is not read by the
program if NGROUP equals "0" in the second card of Group (2). Parameter
NSOGRP reads up to 20 integer values per card in 4-column fields. Parameter
IDSOR reads up to 13 integer values per card in 6-column fields.
Card Group (5) consists of meteorological-related parameters which remain
constant once they are set, and identification labels and model constants.
The first parameter in this Card Group (PDEF) consists of six cards, and is
read by the program only if ISW(21) equals "2" and ISW(28) = "2" in Card Group
(2). Likewise, the second parameter (DTHDEF) consists of six cards, and is
read by the program only if ISW{22) equals "2" and ISW(28) = "2". The
following two cards (cards 13 and 14) are read by the program and contain
parameters which have program-provided default values as indicated in
Table 3-4. The user should note that the default values of the units
conversion factor (TK), the units label for source emission rates (IQUN) and
the units label for concentration or deposition (ICHIUN) are compatible. That
is, the default mass units of the source emission rates (grams) is scaled by
the default conversion value which is compatible with the default mass units
of concentration (micrograms) or deposition (grams). Cards 15 through 19 in
this Card Group consist of the IDAY parameter. IDAY is not read by the
program if ISW(19) equals "2" in Card Group (2). This parameter is an array
where each column on the 80-column card image for each card represents a
Julian Day. For example, to indicate that Julian Day 140 of the hourly
meteorological data is to be processed by the program, IDAY(140) is set to "1"
which is column 60 of the second card of the IDAY parameter. The remaining
3-51
-------
parameters consist of one card (the 20th possible card of this Card Group) and
are not read if ISW(19) equals "2" in Card Group (2).
Card Group (6) contains all source data parameters. Except for the last
parameter (card 5) in this Card Group (QTK), this Card Group is repeated for
each source input (NSOURC times). The first card of this Card Group consists
of the principal parameters used to define the characteristics of a source.
Cards 2 to 4 pertain to the gravitational settling categories of particulates
(parameters PHI, VSW, and GAMMA) and are read by the program only when
parameter NVS in columns 8-9 of the first card is greater than "0" for a given
source. If NVS is greater than "0", cards 2 to 4 are read immediately
following the first source card for which NVS is greater than "0". It should
be noted that cards 2 to 4 of this Card Group may actually consist of more
than 3 cards. That is, if NVS is greater than "8", the program will read more
than one card for each of the three settling category parameters (PHI, VSN,
and GAMMA). Hence, depending on the value of NVS, the program reads no cards,
3 cards, 6 cards, or 9 cards for parameters PHI, VSN, and GAMMA. After the
first through fourth cards are read for all sources, card 5 (consisting of the
source emission rate scalar array (QTK)) is read, provided one of two options
is exercised by the user. That is, either ISW(23) is greater than "0" in Card
Group (2) or any number of the QFLG parameter in card 1 of this Card Group are
greater than "0" for all input sources. If both ISW(23) and QFLG are equal to
"0" for all sources, card 5 of this Card Group is not read by the program. If
ISW(23) is greater than "0", card 5 is read once and contains the source
emission rate scalars for all sources. Also, the QFLG parameter in card 1 of
this Card Group is ignored for all input sources. If ISW(23) equals "0", card
5 is repeated each time a QFLG parameter is greater than "0" for a source.
The source emission rate scalars contained in card 5 of this Card Group allow
3-52
-------
the user to vary emission rates as a function of season*, month*, hour of the
day, wind speed and Pasguill stability category, or season and hour of the
day. As mentioned in the descriptions of parameter QTK in Table 3-4 and
Section 3.1.2.e, the value of ISW(23) or QFLG (whichever is applicable)
governs the number and manner in which the source emission rate scalars are
entered into parameter QTK. If ISW(23) (or QFLG) equals "1", QTK contains 4
seasonal scalars in the order of Winter, Spring, Summer, and Fall (1 card).
If ISW(23) (or QFLG) equals "2", enter 12 monthly scalars beginning with
January and ending with December (2 cards). If ISW(23) (or QFLG) equals "3",
enter 24 scalars for each hour of the day beginning with hour 1 and ending
with hour 24 (3 cards). If ISW(23) (or QFLG) equals "4", enter 6 scalars per
card for each wind speed category (1 to 6) and 6 cards for each of the six
Pasquill stability categories (A to F) for a total of 36 scalars (6 cards).
If ISW(23) (or QFLG) equals "5", enter 24 hourly scalars for each hour and 4
sets for each season (12 cards). Hence, card 5 of this Card Group may
actually consist of more than one card depending on the value of ISW(23) (or
QFLG).
Card Group (7) contains the hourly meteorological data parameters. This
Card Group is not read if ISW(19) equals "1"; instead all hourly
meteorological data are read from an input file described in the following
paragraph (Section 3.2.3.b). This Card Group is repeated for each day of
meteorological data to be processed (NDAYS times). All meteorological data
parameters are contained on one card image which is read for each hour per day
of meteorological data (NHOURS times).
*The program determines the season or month based on the Julian Day or month
value read from the hourly meteorological data. Consult Table 3-5 for the
conversion used by the program of Julian Day to month or season, and month to
season.
3-53
-------
V]
O
H
Otf
o
00
<
O
•
e
3
f
Z
|
jtt
U
a.
ji
«
G
3
<•>•
.
_
1
9
0
I
ft
I
.*
•
1
«
t
9
1
£
.
b
&
<
•
w
«
X
fl
t
£
•
8
w,~«»o-~-,^^*~.»o -. -,^»~.»o-~--,--
0 -> ^ •« » 3> •S
+ ~»»o-~- + ~+'.m»*-~-.«~»~»*.a-~- .-
« -.^.^ o'N-t^.enyo
r. -.^r,..^,-,-, .-,
^^-...O-^-st^J-.^O ,.-»^-~,,g-,.-^^
^^^r.^^^M^,r,^M^,.^~^^,.~-. r. ^,. ,-
0
_ _ -. -, -, ,-, -. -, ~, -. -4 -4
««~«»o --*^« »r-o --,.-*. «,o --,
^ ^ ^ ,. -. ~ r. ^ ^ ^ ^ ~ ^ „ ^ , „ -. , -.„-,-,,..*
^ ^ 1^ »N M -» -4 -1 0
^^M^^^o.^c,r, -,
-^^*->»»a_ ,^«,. »»g_^.-*^»-.,9.o--N->
-«^^*-»s.3-^-»^4S-.»»3-^-.»«<^«»a--.
3 a o
^-J^4S-»»3_««»^4l^,»e-«-<*^*~.»0-~
O 0
~-J^«~»s.o-«-g^*~«so-~-»^*~«»o-
^45« - «0~-< «0
~"M'-"1""1<~"'~"
««««««4I -- -.~i«....2...<>.9.
~«<^«~«9.0 ~ - -» " * ~ « * 0 f« •" ~t * -0 - • » 0
~r, ««^^ ~
^«^^*^«»0-~«*^*~«»0-~«<**~»»0
Mc.««r.«^«-r,a-,
-^^^^^^.^e.^^^^^^.^o-^^^^^^.^g-
I
kl
-3
Cm
w
41
-3
a
O
U
00
a
•H
TJ
d
o
o.
eo
41
O
U
a
u
41
o
U
2
u
|
«0
hi
o t
Pk «
3-54
-------
b. Disc or Tape Input Requirements. The ISCST program accepts an input
file of hourly meteorological data in a format generated by the preprocessor
program. Although this file is optional, most problems call for hourly
meteorological data in this format. If input parameter ISW(19) equals "1",
the program reads hourly meteorology from an input file. If ISW{19) equals
"2", the program reads hourly meteorological data in a card image format. The
program reads the input file from the FORTRAN logical unit number specified in
parameter IMET. The user must provide the surface station number and year,
and the upper air station number and year which are specified in parameters
ISS, ISY, IUS, and IUY, respectively. The user does not need to know the
specific format of the hourly meteorological data contained in the input
file. For a description of the specific format of the input tape file, the
reader is referred to Table 3-6.
3.2.4 Program Output Data Description
The ISCST program generates several categories of printed output and an
optional output file. The following paragraphs describe the format and
content of both forms of program output.
a. Printed Output. The ISCST program generates five categories of
printed output, four of which are tables of average concentration or total
deposition values. All five categories of printed output are optional to the
user. That is, the user must indicate which categories are desired to be
printed for a particular problem run. The five categories are:
• Input Data (Card and Tape) Listing
• Daily Calculated Average Concentration or Total Deposition Tables
• "N"-Day Calculated Average Concentration or Total Deposition Tables
3-55
-------
TABLE 3-6
PREPROCESSOR OUTPUT FILE RECORD DESCRIPTION
Position of Variable
Within the Record
1
2
3
4-27
28-51
52-75
76-99
100-123
124-171
Variable
Name
IYEAR
IMONTH
DAY1
KST
SPEED
TEMP
AFV
FVR
HLH
FORTRAN
Variable Type
INTEGER
INTEGER
REAL
INTEGER
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
Year of record (last
digits)
Month
Julian Day
Array of 24 Stability
gory Values
Array of 24 Wind
Values (ms"1)
two
Gate-
Speed
Array of 24 Ambient
Temperature Values (°K)
Array of 24 Flow Vector
Values (degrees)
Array of 24 Randomized
Vectors (degrees)
Array dimensioned 2 h
Flow
>y 24
containing 24 rural mixing
height values and 24 urban
mixing height values (m).
The values are stored on the
record in groups of two for
each hour with the rural
mixing height first followed
by the urban mixing height
for that hour
3-56
-------
Highest, Second-Highest and Third-Highest Calculated Average
Concentration or Total Deposition Tables
Maximum 50 Calculated Average Concentration or Total Deposition
Tables
These output categories are all available regardless of the setting of the
regulatory default option switch ISW(28). The first line of each page of
printed output is a heading used to identify the problem run (see input
parameter TITLE in Section 3.2.3.a).
The user may list all input data parameters used by the program for a
particular problem run. If input parameter ISW{6) equals "1" (discussed in
Section 3.2.3.a), the program lists all program control parameters,
meteorological-related constants and identification labels, receptor data and
source data. See Figure C-2 in Appendix C for an illustration of the content
and format of an input data listing for a typical problem run. The user may
also direct the program to print all hourly meteorology processed by the
program. If ISW(6) equals "2", the program produces a list of the
meteorological data for each day processed as shown in Figure C-3 in Appendix
C. Hence, a page is generated for each day of meteorology processed by the
program (NDAYS pages if ISW{19) equals "2" or the number of entries set to "1"
in the IDAY array if ISW(19) equals "1").
The next category of optional printed output are tables of average
concentration or total deposition values calculated for each day ("daily") of
meteorology processed by the program. If ISW(16) equals "1", tables are
printed for each day for all user-defined combinations of source groups and
time periods. As shown in Figure C-5 in Appendix C, each table consists of
the calculated average concentration values for all receptors. The heading of
3-57
-------
the table indicates the day, time period, time period interval* and sources
that represent the printed values.
The user may direct the program to print tables of calculated
concentration averaged over "N"-days or deposition summed over "N"-days where
"N" represents the total number of days of meteorology processed by the
program run. If ISW(15> equals "1", tables are printed for all user-defined
source groups. As shown in Figure C-6 in Appendix C, each table consists of
the calculated concentration for all receptors.
The program may also print tables of the highest, second-highest and
third-highest average concentration or total deposition values calculated at
each receptor point throughout the duration of the problem run. If ISW{17)
equals "1", a table of the highest and a table of the second-highest
calculated values are printed for all user-defined combinations of source
groups and time periods. Figure C-7 in Appendix C is an illustration of a
highest calculated average concentration table. The second-highest table is
not shown but is similar in format. If ISW(17) equals "2", a third-highest
table is also printed.
The final category of the printed output that may be produced are tables
of the maximum 50 calculated average concentration or total deposition values
found for the problem run. If ISW(18) equals "1", a table of the 50 maximum
values is produced for all user-defined combinations of source groups and time
periods. As shown in Figure C-8 in Appendix C, each table consists of a
heading and the maximum 50 calculated values. The number of tables of daily
average concentration or total deposition values is governed by the number of
source groups (specified in parameter NGROUP), time periods (specified in
parameters ISW(7) through ISW(14)) and time period intervals (parameter
*See Table 3-7 for the hours which define a particular time period interval.
3-58
-------
g
tH
Q
2
0
On
w
1
8s
Q a
7 § w
co £
W H
w J h
9 ^
H W jg
M §
§
|_(
a
H
a
w
s
H
H
Period
0)
0) !-i X)
d 0) S
•P 3
0)CS
<— 1 1
CH rn
•H
H
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
CM ^C
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
v£> rH i-H CM
I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
O vO CM 00
CNJ vO f*^ ^*
*!* 00 i-H rH CM CM
I I I I I I I I I
^D ^^ OO O4 ^D ^3
rH rH CM
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CM in OO rH «*
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
r-H i-H rH CM
CM^vOOOi-Hi-HrHi-HrHCMCMCM
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
rH rH i-H rH rH CM CM
i-HCMrO«*mM5r«OOO\i-lrHi-lrHr-HrHi-(rHi-lrHCMCMCMCMCM
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
1-HrHrHiHi-HrHrHi-Hi-HrHCMCMCMCM
rHi-Hi-HrHrHrHiHi-HrHrHCMfMCMCMCM
3-59
-------
IPERD). After all hourly meteorological data have been processed by the
program, the "N"-day tables, highest, second-highest and third-highest tables
and the maximum 50 tables are alternately printed for each source group for
each specified time interval. The number of tables is governed by the number
of source groups (MGROUP) and time periods (ISW(7) through ISW(14)> specified.
b. Output File. The ISCST program is capable of generating an output
file containing the calculated average concentration or total deposition
values based on the selected time periods and source groups. If ISW{5) equals
"1", this output file is generated. The user must assign an output file and
associate the logical unit number specified in parameter ITAP to the output
file (see Section 3.2.3.a).
The output file is written with a FORTRAN unformatted (binary) WRITE
statement and consists of constant length records whose lengths equal the
total number of receptor points (NPNTS) plus 3 words. Word 1 of each record
contains the hour at which the corresponding values were calculated in words 4
to NPNTS +3. Word 2 contains the Julian Day and word 3 contains the source
group number. Words 4 through NPNTS + 3 contain the calculated average
concentration or total deposition values for all receptors. The values
calculated for the receptor grid (if any) are written first followed by the
values calculated at the discrete receptors (if any). Starting with the first
Y point (direction radial) of the Y-axis (radial) grid, the calculated values
are written for the X-axis (ranges) in the same order that receptor locations
were entered in parameter GRIDX (see Section 3.2.3.a). For each successive
Y-axis (radial), the values are written for the X-axis (ranges). After the
calculated values have been written for the receptor grid, the calculated
values are written for the discrete points in the order the discrete points
were entered in parameters XDIS and YDIS (see Section 3.2.3.a).
3-60
-------
The content and number of records produced is governed by the number of
source groups (specified in parameter NGROUP) and time periods (specified in
parameters ISW(7) through ISW(14)). For each day of meteorological data
processed by the program and for each hour, the program generates records of
calculated values for all applicable time period intervals for all source
groups. For hour one, a 1-hour record of calculated values for source group
1, followed by 1-hour records of calculated values for each remaining source
groups are written to the output file. For hour two, a 1-hour and a 2-hour
record are written to the output file for each source group. For hour three,
a 1-hour and 3-hour record are written to the output file for each source
group. For hour four, a 1-hour, 2-hour, and 4-hour record of calculated
values are written to the output file for each source group. This format is
continued for each hour of the day. For example, if there is one source group
and only 24-hour average concentrations are calculated, only one record per
day is written to the output file. If ISW(15) equals "1", records of the
"N"-day average concentration or total deposition values are additionally
written to the output file for all source groups after the program has
processed all "N"-days of meteorological data.
3.2.5 Program Run Time, Page and Tape Output Estimates
This section provides the user with equations which estimate the amount of
run time required and program output generated for a given problem run. The
equations describing the amount of printed output data (in pages) and tape
output data (in words) can be quite accurately estimated. The run time
estimate is less accurate because of unknowns such as the nature of the hourly
meteorology and wake effects. These unknowns may affect the run time estimate
significantly for a large problem run.
3-61
-------
a. Run Time. The amount of time a problem takes to execute is primarily
governed by six factors. These factors are: (1) the number of hours in a day
of meteorological data (NHOURS); (2) the number of days of meteorological data
processed (NDAYS); (3) the number of sources (NSOURC); (4) the number of
source groups (NGROUP); (5) the number of receptor points (NPNTS); and (6) the
number of time periods (NAVG). Using these factors, the following equation
estimates the run time in minutes:
?;o. of Minutes = C • (NDAYS + !)•(!+ NHOURS • {1 + 0.8 NSOURC
(3-2)
• (1 + 0.6 • NPNTS + 0.1 • NGROUP • NAVG)))
where
C = 2.1 • 10"5
The constant, C, is derived from problem runs made on a UNIVAC 1108 computer
and is different for other computers.
b. Page Output. The number of pages of printer output produced by a
problem run is primarily controlled by which categories of output are desired
by the user. The content of these categories of program print output are
discussed in Section 3.2.4.a. Input parameters ISW(6), ISW(15), ISW(16),
ISW(17), and ISW(18), discussed in Section 3.2.3.a., control which categories
of program print output are produced. Other factors which determine the
amount of print output are the number of receptor points, number of source
groups, and the number of time periods for which average concentration or
total deposition values are computed.
If ISW{6) equals "I", all input data are printed, producing about 5 pages
of print output. For source with gravitational settling categories (NVS
greater than zero) or variational emission rates (QFLG greater than zero), add
one-third of a page per source. If ISW(6) equals "2", all meteorological data
3-62
-------
processed by the program are printed. Add one page for every day of
meteorological data processed.
If ISW(15) equals "1", tables of the "N"-day average concentration or
total deposition values are printed. The number of tables printed equals the
number of source groups desired by the user (NGROUP). If parameter NGROUP is
specified as "0", one table will be printed. The number of pages produced for
each "N"-day table is given the following equation:
Number of Pages = (NXPNTS/9) (NYPNTS/38) + (NXWYPT/114) (3-3)
where
NXPNTS = the number of X points on the X-axis grid or
the number of grid ranges
NYPNTS = the number of Y points on the Y-axis grid or
the number of grid direction radials
NXWYPT = the number of discrete receptor points
Round up any fractional number in each term to the nearest whole number.
If ISW(16) equals "1", tables of average concentration or total deposition
for user-defined combinations of source groups and time periods for each day
of meteorological data processed by the program are printed. The number of
tables produced by this output category for each day is given by the following
equation:
No. of Tables = NGROUP • (24/IPERD) • ISW(7)
+ (12/IPERD) • ISW(8) + (8/IPERD) • ISW(9)
+ (6/IPERD) • ISW(IO) + (4/IPERD) • ISW(ll) (3-4)
+ (3/IPERD) • ISW(12) + (2/IPERD) • ISW(13)
+ (1/IPERD) • ISW(14)
where
NGROUP = number of source groups as specified by input parameters
NGROUP. If NGROUP is specified as "0", assume a value of
"1" for this equation.
3-63
-------
IPERD = "N"th time interval for all time periods as specified by
input parameter IPERD. Note that if IPERD is not set to
"0", the term (j/IPERD) • ISW(i) equals (j) • ISW(i). If
IPERD is set greater than "0", the term (j/IPERD) •
ISW(i) equals (1) • ISW(i) if (j/IPERD) is greater than
or equal to "1"; otherwise, it equals (0) • ISW(i) if
(j/IPERD) is less than "1".
ISW(7)- = the corresponding 1-, 2-, 3-, 4-, 6-, 8-, 12-, and
ISW(14) 24-hour time periods as specified by input parameters
ISW(7) through ISW(14). The "I" or "0" values specified
by the user in these parameters are the numeric values
used in the equation
The number of pages produced by each table is given in Equation (3-3). Hence,
the total number of pages generated by the print output option ISW(16) equals
the product of the number of days processed by the program for a problem run,
the number of tables printed according to Equation (3-4) and the number of
pages produced per table according to Equation (3-3).
If ISW(17) equals "1", tables of the highest and second-highest average
concentration or total deposition values found at each receptor are printed
for all user-defined combinations of source groups and time periods. If
ISW(17) equals "2" tables of highest, second-highest, and third-highest are
printed. The number of tables printed equals two or three (depending on
ISW(17)) times the number of time periods specified (the number of input
parameters ISW(7) through ISW(14) set to "1") multiplied by the number of
source groups desired. If no source groups are specified (input parameter
NGROUP equals "0"), assume one source group for the purpose of computing the
number of tables printed by this option (ISW(17)). The number of pages each
table produces is given by the following equation:
Number of Pages = (NXPNTS/5) (NYPNTS/38) + (NXWYPT/76) (3-5)
where NXPNTS, NYPNTS, and NXWYPT are defined following Equation (3). Round up
any fractional number in each term to the nearest whole number. Hence, the
3-64
-------
number of pages printed by this output category eguals two or three, times the
product of the number of time periods, the number of source groups, and the
number of pages produced per table according to Equation (3-5).
If ISW(18) equals "1", tables of the maximum 50 average concentration or
total deposition values calculated are printed for all user-defined
combinations of source groups and time periods. Because each table printed
produces only one page of output, the total number of pages printed by this
output category eguals the number of time periods specified (the number of
input parameters (ISW(7) through ISW(14) set to "1") multiplied by the number
of source groups specified. Again, if no source groups are specified (input
parameter NGROUP equal to zero), assume one source group.
Thus, the total number of pages of output produced by the program eguals
the sum of the number of pages produced by each optional print output category
desired by the user for a problem run.
c. Output to Disc File. Values of average concentration or total
deposition are written by a FORTRAN unformatted WRITE statement to an output
file only if parameter ISW(5) equals "1". Otherwise, the program does not
generate an output file. It is not practical to discuss the physical amount
(length of magnetic tape or number of tracks or sectors of mass storage)
generated since this introduces factors which depend on the computer
installation. Instead, the number of computer words generated by a problem
run is discussed. The user may then equate this number to a physical amount
for the particular storage device being used.
The output file is written in records, where the length of each record
equals the number of receptor points (NPNTS) plus 3 for a total of NPNTS + 3
computer words for a given problem run. For each day of meteorological data
processed, the number of records written to the file is governed by the number
3-65
-------
of source groups and time periods specified by the user. If we substitute the
term "Tables" used in Equation (3-4) with the word, "Records" and set IPERD
equal to "0", Equation (3-4) gives the number of records written to the file
for each day of meteorological data processed. All variables used to
formulate Equation (3-4) maintain the same definition. Hence, the number of
records equals the value computed from Equation (3-4) multiplied by the number
of days of meteorological data processed by the program for a problem run.
Also, if input parameter ISW(15) equals "1", additional records containing
"N"-day average concentration or total deposition values are written to the
file depending on the number of source groups specified by the input parameter
NGROUP. If NGROUP equals "0", assume one source group. Hence, the total
number of computer words written to the file equals the number of records
generated, multiplied by (NPNTS + 3) computer words per record for a problem
run.
3.2.6 Program Diagnostic Messages
The ISCST program prints diagnostic messages when certain conditions occur
during a problem run. The diagnostic messages consist of two types. The
first type is a table format that informs the user of the conditions found,
but does not terminate program execution. The second type is an error message
which informs the user of the condition. The run is terminated after the
error message is printed.
The diagnostic message in a table format informs the user when a receptor
is located within one meter or three building heights (or three effective
building widths) of a source. As shown in Figure C-4 in Appendix C, the table
lists all source-receptor combinations for which this condition has occurred.
The table lists the source number, receptor location, and calculated distance
3-66
-------
between the corresponding source and receptor. A negative distance value
implies that the receptor is located within the dimensions of a volume or area
source.
Four types of diagnostic error messages may be printed by the program. If
the allocated data storage is not sufficient for the data required by a
problem run, an error message is printed (Figure 3-2(a)). An error message is
printed if the station numbers or years read from the meteorological data
input tape do not match the corresponding station numbers or years specified
by the user in parameters ISS, ISY, IUS, IUY (Figure 3-2(b)). If the number
of input sources equals "0", an error message is printed (Figure 3-2(c».
Finally, if there are no gravitational settling categories to calculate
deposition for any source, an error message is printed as shown in
Figure 3-2(d).
3.2.7 Program .Modification.for Computers Other than UNIVAC 1100 jferies
Computers
The ISCST program, which is written in FORTRAN 77, provides easy transport
and adaption for use on other computers. The program design requires that:
(1) at least four Hollerith characters can be stored in one computer word;
(2) the computer word lengths of integer and real type variables are the same;
and, (3) at least 132 characters per line can be printed on a page with 57
lines per page. The program requires about 75,500 words of executable
storage, 32,000 of which consist of the program itself compiled on a UNIVAC
1100 Computer. The size of the compiled program will vary depending on the
FORTRAN compiler and computer installation. The remaining 43,500 words
consist of data storage used by the program for storing the input data values,
intermediate values, and output results of a given problem run.
3-67
-------
**ERROR** CALCULATED STORAGE ALLOCATION LIMIT EQUALS nnnnnn AND EXCEEDS THE
MAXIMUM STORAGE ALLOCATION LIMIT OF mmmmmm
RUN TERMINATED.
(a)
***ERROR***MET DATA REQUESTED DOES NOT MATCH MET DATA READ.
'REQUESTED/READ' VALUES ARE:
SURFACE STATION NO. = isisis/jsjsjs YEAR OF SURFACE DATA = iys/jys
UPPER AIR STATION NO. = iuiuiu/jujuju YEAR OF UPPER AIR DATA = iuy/juy
RUN TERMINATED.
(b)
***ERROR*** NUMBER OF SOURCES TO BE READ EQUALS ZERO. RUN TERMINATED.
(c)
***ERROR*** SOURCE NUMBER nnnnn HAS NO GRAVITATIONAL SETTLING CATEGORIES WITH
WHICH TO CALCULATE DEPOSITION. RUN TERMINATED.
(d)
FIGURE 3-2. (a) through (d) show the four types of error messages printed by
the ISCST Program. The run is terminated after an error message
is printed.
3-68
-------
If it is necessary to adjust the current allotment of 43,500 words of data
storage, only two FORTRAN statements in the ISCST program need to be
modified. The FORTRAN statement with sequence number ISC06980 (in columns
73-80) in the main program allocates the data storage in array QF. Also, the
value assigned to the variable LIMIT at sequence number ISC07060 must agree
with the value used in array QF.
The program assumes FORTRAN logical unit 5 for the card reader and logical
unit 6 for the printer. These logical unit numbers may be modified on
sequence numbers ISC07130 and ISC07140 in the main program.
3-69
-------
SECTION 4
USER'S INSTRUCTION FOR THE ISC LONG-TERM
(ISCLT) MODEL PROGRAM
4.1 Summary of Program Options, Data Requirements and Output
4.1.1 Summary of ISCLT Program Options
The program options of the ISC Dispersion Model long-term computer program
ISCLT consist of three general categories:
• Meteorological data input options
• , Dispersion-model options
• Output options
Each category is discussed separately below.
a. Meteorological Data Input Options. Table 4-1 lists the meteorological
data input options for the ISCLT computer program. All meteorological data
may be input by card deck or by a magnetic tape inventory previously generated
by ISCLT (see Section 4.1.1.C below). ISCLT accepts STAR summaries with six
Pasguill stability categories (A through F) or five Pasquill stability
categories (A through E with the E and F categories combined). It does not
accept STAR summaries with separate day and night neutral categories.
Site-specific mixing heights and ambient air temperature are ISCLT input
requirements rather than options. Suggested procedures for developing these
inputs are given in Section 2.2.1.2. The remaining meteorological data input
options listed in Table 4-1 are identical to the ISCST meteorological data
input options discussed in Section 3.1.1.a.
b. Dispersion Model Options. Table 4-2 lists the dispersion model options
for the ISCLT computer program. In general, these options correspond to the
4-1
-------
TABLE 4-1
METEOROLOGICAL DATA INPUT OPTIONS FOR ISCLT
Input of all meteorological data by card deck or by magnetic tape inventory
previously generated by ISCLT
STAR summaries with five or six Pasquill stability categories
Site-specific mixing heights
Site-specific ambient air temperatures
Site-specific wind-profile exponents
Site-specific vertical potential temperature gradients
Rural Mode or Urban Mode 1, 2 or 3
Final or distance dependent plume rise
Wind system measurement height if other than 10 meters
TABLE 4-2
DISPERSION-MODEL OPTIONS FOR ISCLT
Concentration or dry deposition calculations
Inclusion of the effects of gravitational settling and/or deposition in
concentration calculations
Inclusion of terrain effects (concentration calculations only)
Cartesian or polar receptor system
Discrete receptors (Cartesian or polar system)
Stack, volume and area sources
Pollutant emission rates held constant or varied by season or by wind speed
and stability
Time-dependent exponential decay of pollutants
Inclusion of building wake, stack-tip downwash and buoyancy-induced dispersion
effects
Time periods for which concentration or deposition calculations are to be made
(seasonal and/or annual)
4-2
-------
ISCST dispersion-model options discussed in Section 3-l.l.b. Pollutant
emission rates may be held constant or varied by season or by wind speed and
stability in ISCLT calculations. The program uses seasonal STAR summaries to
calculate seasonal and/or annual concentration or deposition values.
Additionally, monthly STAR summaries may be used to calculate monthly
concentration or deposition values.
c. Output Options. Table 4-3 lists the ISCLT program output options. A
more detailed discussion of the ISCLT output information is given in Section
4.1.3.
The ISCLT program has the capability to generate a master file inventory
containing all meteorological and source inputs and the results of all
concentration or deposition calculations. This file can then be used as input
to future update runs. For example, assume that the user wishes to add a new
source and modify an existing source at a previously modeled industrial source
complex. Concentration or deposition calculations are made for these or
modified sources alone and the results of these calculations in combination
with select sources from the original file inventory are used to generate an
updated inventory. That is, it is not necessary to repeat the concentration
or deposition calculations for the unaffected sources in the industrial source
complex in order to obtain an updated estimate of the concentration or
deposition values for the combined emissions. The optional master file
inventory is discussed in detail in Section 4.2.4.b.
The ISCLT user may elect to print one or more of the following tables:
• The program control parameters, meteorological input data and
receptor data
• The source input data
* The seasonal and/or annual average concentration or total
deposition values calculated at each receptor for each source
or for the combined emissions from select groups or all sources
4-3
-------
TABLE 4-3
ISCLT OUTPUT OPTIONS
Master file inventory of meteorological and source inputs and the results of
the concentration or deposition calculations
Printout of program control parameters, meteorological data and receptor data
Printout of tables of source input data
Printout of seasonal and/or annual average concentrations or total seasonal
and/or annual deposition values calculated at each receptor for each source or
for the combined emissions from a select group or all sources
Printout of the contributions of the individual sources to the 10 highest
concentration or deposition values calculated for the combined emissions from
a select group of all sources or the contributions of the individual sources
to the total concentration or deposition values calculated for the combined
emissions from a select group of all sources at 10 user-specified receptors
4-4
-------
• The contributions of the individual sources to the 10 receptors
with highest concentration (or deposition) values obtained from
the combined emissions of select groups of sources; or the
contributions of each individual source, as well as the
combined sources, to a select group of user specified receptor
points; or the maximum 10 concentration (or deposition) values
for each source and for the combined sources, determined
independently of each other
4.1.2 Data Input Requirements
This section provides a description of all input data parameters required
by the ISCLT program. The user should note that some input parameters are not
read or are ignored by the program, depending on the values assigned to the
control parameters (options) by the user.
a.Program control Parameter Data. These data contain parameters which
provide user-control Parameter Data.
Parameter
Name
ISW(l)
ISW(2)
ISW(3)
Concentration/Deposition Option—Directs the program to
calculate either average concentration or total deposition. A
value of "1" indicates average concentration is to be
calculated and a value of "2" indicates total deposition is to
be calculated. If this parameter is not punched, the program
defaults to "1" or concentration.
Receptor Reference Grid System Option—Specifies whether a
right-handed rectangular Cartesian coordinate system or a
polar system is to be input to the program to form the
receptor reference grid system. A value of "1" indicates a
Cartesian reference grid system is being input and a value of
"2" indicates a polar reference grid system is being input.
If this parameter is not punched, the program will default to
a value of "1."
Discrete Receptor Option—Specifies whether a right-handed
rectangular Cartesian reference system or polar reference
system is used to reference the input discrete receptor
points. A value of "1" indicates that the Cartesian reference
system is used and a value of "2" indicates that a polar
reference system is used. If this parameter is not punched,
the program will default to a value of "1."
4-5
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW(4) Receptor Terrain Elevation Option—Specifies whether the user
desires to input the terrain elevations for each receptor
point or to use the program as a flat terrain model. A value
of "0" indicates terrain elevations are not to be input and a
value of "1" indicates terrain elevations for each receptor
point are to be input. Note that terrain elevations cannot be
used with the deposition model. The default for this
parameter is no terrain or "0." If equal to "-1," the program
assumes input elevations are in meters rather than feet.
ISW(5) Input/Output File Option—Specifies whether disc file input
and/or output is to be used. A value of "0" indicates no file
input or output. A value of "1" indicates an output file is
to be produced on the output unit specified by ISW(15). A
value of "2" indicates an input file is required on the input
unit specified by ISW{14). A value of "3" indicates both
input and output files are being used. Default for this
parameter is "0". It is the user's responsibility to ensure
that the correct tapes or files are mounted on the correct
units.
ISW(6) Print Input Data Option—Specifies what input data are to be
printed. A value of "0" indicates no input data are to be
printed. A value of "1" indicates only the control
parameters, receptor points and meteorological data are to be
printed. A value of "2" indicates only the source input data
are to be printed and a value of "3" indicates all input data
are to be printed. The default for this parameter is "0."
ISW<7) Seasonal/Annual Print Option—Specifies whether seasonal
concentration (or deposition) values are to be printed, or
annual values only, or both seasonal and annual values. An
ISW(7) value of "1" indicates only seasonal output is to be
printed, a value of "2" indicates only annual output is to be
printed, and a value of "3" indicates both seasonal and annual
output are to be printed. If this parameter is not punched or
is "0," the program defaults to "3."
ISW(8) Individual/Combined Sources Print Option—Specifies whether
output for individual sources or the combined sources (sum of
sources) or both is to be printed. An ISW(8> value of "1"
indicates output for individual sources only is to be printed,
a value of "2" indicates output for the combined sources only
is to be printed, and a value of "3" indicates output for both
individual and combined sources is to be printed. The default
for this parameter is "3." This parameter is used in
conjunction with the parameter NGROUP below. If NGROUP equals
"0," all sources input to the program are considered for
output under ISW(8). However, if NGROUP is greater than "0,"
only those sources explicitly or implicitly defined under
NGROUP are considered for output under ISW(8). Also, a single
source defined under NGROUP is logically treated as combined
source output when ISW(8) equals "2" or "3."
4-6
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW(9)
ISW(IO)
ISW(ll)
Rural/Urban Option—Specifies whether rural or urban modes are
to be used (see Table 2-3). A value of "1" specifies Urban
Mode 1 and the E and F stability categories are redefined as
D. A value of "2" specifies Urban Mode 2 and stability
categories A and B are redefined as A, C becomes B, D becomes
C, and E and F become D. A value of "3" specifies the Rural
Mode and does not redefine the stability categories. The
rural Pasguill-Gifford dispersion curves are used with values
of 1 through 3. A value of "4" specifies Urban Mode 3, with
no stability category adjustment and use of the urban Briggs
dispersion curves. If this parameter is not punched or is
"0," the program defaults to "3." If file input is used, the
program defaults to the value saved on file. The parameter
ISW(9) is only used for card input sources and/or tape input
sources when ISW{12) eguals "1." It should be noted that the
use of Urban Modes 1 and 2 are not recommended for regulatory
purposes.
Maximum 10 Print Option—Specifies whether the maximum 10
values of concentration or deposition only are to be printed,
or the results of the calculations for all receptors only, or
both are to be printed. A value of "1" directs the program to
calculate and print only the maximum 10 values and receptors
according to ISW(ll) or ISW(12) below. Values at receptors
other than the maximum 10 are not printed if this option
equals "1." A value of "0" directs the program to print the
results of the calculations at all receptors; the maximum 10
values are not produced. A value of "2" directs the program
to print the results of the calculations at all receptor
locations as well as the maximum 10. The default for this
parameter is "0." The ISCLT program will print less than 10
values in cases where there are less than 10 concentration
(deposition) values greater than zero calculated.
Maximum 10 Calculation Option 1—This option directs the
program to use one of two methods to calculate and print
maximum 10 concentration (or deposition) values. If this
option is used, option ISW(12) must equal "0." The program
determines the maximum values and receptor locations from the
set of all receptors input. Method 1: A value of "1" directs
the program to calculate and print the maximum 10 values and
respective receptors for each individual source and to
calculate and print the maximum 10 values and respective
receptors for the combined sources independently of each
other. The output for individual sources and combined sources
will in general show a different set of receptors. Method 2:
A value of "2" directs the program to first calculate and
print the maximum 10 values and respective receptors for the
combined sources (sum of sources) and then print the
contribution at each receptor of each individual source to the
combined sources maximum 10. This option can only be used if
one or more of the following conditions is met:
4-7
-------
Parameter
Name
Condition a - The run uses an output tape or data file
(user must specify NOFILE, if tape)
Condition b - The run uses an input tape or data file,
but has no input data card sources (all are
taken from tape; user must specify NOFILE,
if tape)
Condition c - The total number of input sources is less
than or equal to the minimum of I and J,
where
J = 300
and
I = (E - (Nx + Nv + 2NXV) - K-L-M)
(Nse(NxNy + Nxy))
(4-1)
E = the total amount of program data storage in BLANK
COMMON. The design size is 40,000.
Nx = Number of points in the input X-axis of the
receptor grid system (NXPNTS)
Ny = Number of points in the input Y-axis of the
receptor grid system (NYPNTS)
Nxy=
K =
L =
M =
Number of discrete (arbitrarily placed) input
receptors (NXWYPT)
Nse= Number of seasons in the input meteorological data
(NSEASN)
Nse(NxNy+Nxy)
0 ; if ISW(4) = "0"
OR
NxNy+Nxy; if ISW(4) = "1" or "-1"
0; if ISW(4) = 1 or "-1" and ISW(ll) = 2 or
if ISW(7) = l,or NSEASN = l,or NGROUP = 0
NxNy+Nxy; if ISW(4) = 0 or ISW(ll) £ 2 and if
ISW(7) = 1 and NGROUP = 0 and NSEASN = 1
4-8
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW(12)
ISW(13)
ISW(14)
ISW(15)
Maximum 10 Calculation Option 2—This option directs the
program to calculate concentration or deposition at a special
set of user supplied discrete (arbitrarily placed) receptor
points. If this option is used, option ISW(ll) must equal
"0." A value of "1" directs the program to expect to read
from 10 to 50 special receptors at which concentration or
deposition is to be calculated. If this option is selected
and 10 special receptors are input, both seasonal and annual
concentration or deposition values for individual sources and
combined sources are printed for the 10 user-specified
receptors. If more than 10 special receptors are input, the
program assumes the first 10 points are for season 1, the
second 10 points are for season 2, and the last 10 points are
for annual tables. This option requires the parameter NXWYPT
given below to be a multiple of 10. All input tape or data
file sources are recalculated with this option. Also, if an
input tape is being used, the receptor grid system, discrete
receptors and their elevations input from the tape are
discarded and the user inputs the new special set of receptor
points (with elevations if ISW(4) equals "1" or "-1") via data
card.
Print Output Unit Option—This option is provided to enable
the user to print the program output on a unit other than
print unit "6." If this value is not punched or a "0" is
punched, all print output goes to unit "6." Otherwise, print
output goes to the specified unit. Also, if this value is
punched non-zero positive, two end-of-file marks are written
at the end of the print file. If ISW(13) is a negative value,
the end-of-file marks are not written.
Optional File Input Unit Number—This option is provided to
enable the user to assign the unit number from which data are
read under ISW(5). If ISW(14) is not punched or is "0," the
program defaults to unit "2." If the input data are being
read from a mass-storage file, ISW(14) must be set to a
negative value. A positive value implies magnetic tape. Note
that ISW(14) is the internal file name used by the program to
reference the data file and must be equated with the external
file name used to assign the file (see Section 4.2.2).
Optional File Output Unit Number—This option is provided to
enable the user to assign the unit number to which tape or
output file data are written under ISW(5). If ISW(15) is not
punched or is "0", the program defaults to unit "3." If the
output data are being written to a mass-storage file, ISW(15)
must be set to a negative value. A positive value implies
magnetic tape. Note that ISW(15) is the internal file name
used by the program to reference the data file and must be
equated with the external file name used to assign the file
(see Section 4.2.2).
4-9
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW(16)
ISW(17)
ISW(18)
ISW(19)
ISW(20)
ISW(21)
ISW(22)
Print Output Paging Option—This option enables the user to
minimize the number of print output pages. A value of "1"
directs the program to minimize the output pages by not
starting a new page with each type of output table. If
this option is not punched or is "0". the program will
start each unrelated output table on a new page. The user
is cautioned not to exercise this option until familiar
with the output format because the condensed listing may be
confusing.
Lines Per Page Option—This option is provided to enable
the user to specify the number of print lines per page on
the output printer. The correct number of lines per page
is necessary for the program to maintain the output
format. If this value is not punched or is "0", the
program defaults to 57 print lines per page.
Optional Format for Joint Frequency of Occurrence—This
parameter is a switch used to inform the program whether it
is to use a default format to read the joint frequency of
occurrence of speed and direction (FREQ) or to input the
format via data card. If this option is not punched or is
"0", the program uses the default format given under FMT
below. If this option is set to a value of "1", the array
FMT below is read by the program.
Option to Calculate Plume Rise as a Function of Downwind
Distance—This option is applicable to all stack sources
and if set equal to "0" or not punched, the downwind
distance is not considered in calculating the plume rise.
If ISW{19) is set equal to "1", the plume rise calculation
is a function of downwind distance. ISW{19) is set to "0"
if the regulatory default option (ISW(22)) is selected.
Option to Add the Briggs (1974) Stack-Tip Downwash
Correction to Stack Sources—This option is applicable to
all stack sources and if set equal to "0" or not punched,
no downwash correction is made. If ISW(20) is set equal to
"1", the Briggs (1974) downwash correction is applied to
the stack height for all stack sources. ISW(20) is set to
"1" if the regulatory default option (ISW(22)) is selected.
Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion Option—Allows the program to
modify the dispersion coefficients to account for
buoyancy-induced dispersion. A value of "0" directs the
program to modify the dispersion coefficients for
stack-type sources while a "1" directs the program to
bypass the modification. ISW(21) is set to "0" if the
regulatory default option (ISW(22)) is selected.
Regulatory Default Option—If chosen (this option is chosen
if ISW (22) = 0, otherwise ISW(22) should be set to 1), the
program will internally re-define some user defined input
4-10
-------
Parameter
Name
ISW(22) options to produce a simulation consistent with EPA
Cont. regulatory recommendations. The following features are
incorporated when this option is selected:
1) Final plume rise is used at all downwind receptor
locations.
2) Stack-tip downwash effects are included.
3) Buoyancy-induced dispersion effects are parameterized.
4) Default wind profile coefficients are assigned (.07, .07,
.10, .15, .35, .55, for the rural mode; and .15, .15, .20,
.25, .30, .30 for the urban modes).
5) Default vertical potential temperature gradients are
assigned (A:0.0, B:0.0, C:0.0, D:0.0, E:0.02, F:0.035 °K/m)
6) A decay half-life of 4 hours is assigned if SOa is
modeled in an urban mode; otherwise, no decay is assigned.
Note that the model selects the appropriate urban or rural
mixing height, and that building downwash is calculated when
appropriate.
ISW{23) Pollutant Indicator Switch—If S02 is modelled the user
should set this option equal to "0". If a pollutant other
than S02 is modelled the user should set this option equal
to "1". Note, this switch is only used when ISW(22) = 0.
ISW(24) Input Debug Switch — If the user wants input data printed as
soon as it is entered set this option to "0", otherwise set
this option to "1". Note: any input data resulting from the
selection of ISW(6) will also be printed.
NSOURC Number of Data Card Input Sources—This parameter specifies
the number of input card image sources. This includes card
images that specify a new source being entered and card images
that specify modifications or deletions to sources input from
tape or data file. If this value is not punched or is "0",
the program assumes all sources are input from tape or data
file. Also, if a negative value is punched for this
parameter, the program will continue to read source data card
images until it encounters an end-of-file or a negative source
identification number in the parameter NUMS below. There is
no limit to the number of sources the program can process when
using tape output (see ISW(ll)).
NGROUP Number of Source Combination Groups—This parameter is used to
select concentration (deposition) calculations for specific
sources or source combinations to be printed under the
parameter ISW(8) above. A source combination consists of one
or more sources and is the sum of the concentrations
(deposition) calculated for those sources. If the user
desires only individual source output or only all sources
combined or both, the parameter NGROUP is not punched or is
set equal to "0" and ISW(8) is set according to which option
4-11
-------
Parameter
Name
NGROUP the user desires. Also, if NGROUP is not punched or is set
Cont. equal to "0", the parameters NOCOMB and IDSOR below are
omitted from the input data. However, if NGROUP is set
greater than zero, the program assumes the user desires to
NGROUP restrict the output of concentration tables to select
individual sources or select combinations of sources or both,
depending on ISW(8). The maximum value for NGROUP is 20. If
more than 20 source combinations are desired they must be
produced in multiple runs of ISCLT. This can be done by
specifying an output tape or data file on the first
execution. The user would then use this tape for input on
subsequent runs to produce the remaining desired source
combinations. Also, only a few of the data cards and values
from the initial data deck are required on subsequent runs.
The parameter NGROUP cannot be used or punched non-zero unless
one or more of the following conditions is met:
Condition a - The run uses an output tape or data file (user
must specify NOFILE, if tape)
Condition b - The run uses an input tape or data file, but has
no input data card sources (all are taken from
tape, NSOURC = "0") (user must specify NOFILE,
if tape)
Condition c - The total number of input sources (NSOURC +
input tape sources) is less than or equal to the
minimum of I and J, where
J = 300
and
= [E - (Nx + Ny + 2NX Ny)
- K - L - M]/[Nse(Nx Ny + Nxy)]
(4-2)
All of the variables in this equation except K are the same as those
defined under ISW(ll) above.
K =
; if ISW(8)=1
and
or
Nse(NxNy+Nxy);
if
or ISW(11)=2
4-12
-------
Parameter
Name
NXPNTS
X-Axis/Range Receptor Grid Size-This parameter specifies the
number of east-west receptor grid locations for the Cartesian
coordinate system X-axis, or the number of receptor grid
ranges (rings) in the polar coordinate system, depending on
which receptor grid system is chosen by the user under
parameter ISW(2). This is the number of X-axis points to be
input or the number of X-axis points to be automatically
generated by the program. A value of "0" (not punched directs
the program to assume there is no regular receptor grid being
used. The maximum value of this parameter is related to other
parameter values and is given by the equation
[Nx+Ny+2Nxy]
(NxNy+Nxy )
(4-3)
where all variables in the above equation are the same as
those defined under ISW(ll) above except K and I, which are
defined as
1 ; if ISW(8)=1 and ISWC
K = or
2 ; if ISW(8)^1 or ISW(11)=2
0 ; if ISW(4)=0 (no terrain)
I = or
1 ; if ISW(4)=1 or "-1"
This parameter is ignored by the program if tape or data file
input is being used.
NYPNTS Y-Axis/Azimuth Receptor Grid Size—This parameter specifies
the number of north-south receptor grid locations for the
Cartesian coordinate system Y-axis, or the number of receptor
azimuth bearings from the origin in the polar coordinate
system, depending on which receptor grid system is chosen by
the user under parameter ISW(2). If the parameter NXPNTS is
set non-zero, the parameter NYPNTS must also be non-zero. The
maximum value of this parameter is given by the equation under
NXPNTS above. The parameter NYPNTS is ignored by the program
if tape or data file input is being used.
NXWYPT Number of Discrete (Arbitrarily Placed) Receptors—This
parameter specifies the total number of discrete receptor
points to be input to the program. A value of "0" (not
punched) directs the program to assume no discrete receptors
are being used. This parameter must be set to a multiple of
10 if option ISW(12) is selected. Also, the maximum value of
this parameter is limited by the equation given under NXPNTS
above. This parameter is ignored by the program if input tape
or data file is being used, except in the case where the
ISW(12) option has been selected.
4-13
-------
Parameter
Name
NSEASN Number of Seasons—This parameter specifies the number of
seasons or months in the input meteorological data. A value
of "0" (not punched) defaults to "I". Also, if annual
meteorological data are being used, a value of "1" should be
specified. The maximum value of this parameter is "4". If
monthly STAR summaries and seasonal average mixing heights and
ambient air temperatures are used to calculate monthly
concentration or deposition values for each month of the year,
four separate program runs, each containing three "seasons"
(months), are required. This parameter is ignored by the
program if an input tape or data file is being used.
NSTBLE Number of Paquill Stability Categories—This parameter
specifies the number of Pasquill stability categories in the
input joint frequency of occurrence of wind speed and
direction (FREQ). A value of "0" (not punched) causes the
program to default to "6" (maximum). This parameter is
ignored by the program if an input tape or data file is being
used.
NSPEED Number of Wind Speed Categories—This parameter specifies the
number of wind speed categories in the input joint frequency
of occurrence of wind speed and direction (FREQ). A value of
"0" (not punched) causes the program to default to "6"
(maximum). This parameter is ignored by the program if an
input tape or data file is being used.
NSCTOR Number of Wind Direction Sector Categories—This parameter
specifies the number of wind direction sector categories in
the input joint frequency of occurrence of wind speed and
direction (FREQ). A value of "0" (not punched) causes the
program to assume the standard "16" (maximum) sectors are to
be used (see Section 2.2.1.2). This parameter is ignored by
the program if an input tape or data file is being used.
NOFILE Tape Data Set File Number—This parameter specifies the output
tape file number or, if only an input tape is being used, the
input tape file number. This parameter is used by the ISCLT
program to position the tape at the correct file if multiple
passes through the data are required. This parameter must be
input if the user is using Condition a or Condition b under
ISW(ll) and/or under NGROUP. This parameter does not apply to
runs that use mass-storage (assumed one file) or runs that
satisfy Condition c under ISW(ll) and/or NGROUP. Also, the
user must position input and output tapes at the correct files
prior to executing the ISCLT program.
4-14
-------
Parameter
Name
NOCOMB
IDSORC
Number of Sources Defining Combined Source Groups—This
parameter is not read by the program if the parameter NGROUP
above is zero or not punched. Otherwise, this parameter is an
array of NGROUP values where each value gives the number of
source identification numbers used to define a source
combination. The source identification numtjr is that number
assigned to each source by the user under the source input
parameter NUMS below. An example and a more detailed
discussion of the use of this parameter is given under IDSORC
below. A maximum of 20 values is provided for this array.
Combined Source Group Defining Sources—This parameter is not
read by the program if the parameter NGROUP above is zero or
not punched. Otherwise, this parameter is an array of source
identification numbers that define each combined source group
to be output. The values punched into the array NOCOMB above
indicate how many source identification numbers are punched
into this array successively for each combined source output.
The source identification numbers can be punched in two ways.
The first is to punch a positive value directing the program
to include that specific source in the combined output. The
second is to punch a negative value. When a negative value is
punched, the program includes all sources with identification
numbers less than or equal to it in absolute value. Also, if
the negative value is preceded by a positive value in the same
defining group, that source is also included with those
defined by the negative number, but no sources with a lesser
source identification number are included. For example,
assume NGROUP above is set egual to 4 and the array NOCOMB
contains the values 3, 2, 1, 0. Also, assume the entire set
of input sources is defined by the source identification
numbers 5, 72, 123, 223, 901, 902, 1201, 1202, 1205, 1206, and
1207. To this point we have a total of 11 input sources and
we desire to see 4 combinations of sources taken from these
11. Also, the array NOCOMB indicates that the first 3 values
in the array IDSORC defines the first source combination, the
next 2 values {4th and 5th) in IDSORC define the second
combination, the 6th value in IDSORC defines the third
combination and the last combination has no defining (0)
sources so the program assumes all 11 sources are used.
Similarly, let the array IDSORC be set equal to the values 5,
72, -223, 1201, -1207, -902. The program will first produce
combined source output for source 5, and all sources from 72
through 223. The second combined source output will include
sources 1201 through 1207. The third will include source
numbers 1 through 902 and the last will include all sources
input. Note that the source identification numbers in each
defining group are in ascending order of absolute value.
Also, if ISW(8) equals "2" (combined output only) and there
are groups with only one positive source number (individual
sources), the program logically treats these individual
sources as combined sources.
4-15
-------
Parameter
Name
FMT Optional Format for Joint Frequency of Occurrence—This
parameter is an array which is read by the program only if
ISW(18) is set to a value of "1". The array FMT is used to
specify the format of the joint frequency of occurrences of
wind speed and direction data (FREQ, STAR summary,
fi,j,k,a in Table 2-4). The format punched, if used, must
include leading and ending parentheses. If ISW(18) is not
punched or is set to a value of "0", the parameter FMT is
omitted from the input deck and the program uses the default
format "(6F10.0)". This default format specifies that there
are 6 real values per card occupying 10 columns each,
including the decimal point (period), and the first value is
punched in columns one through ten. If the user has received
the STAR data from an outside source, the deck must also be
checked for the proper order as well as format.
b. Receptor Data These data consist of the (X,Y) or (range, azimuth)
locations of all receptor points as well as the elevations of the receptors
above mean sea level. The minimum distance in meters between source and
receptor for which calculations are made is given by:
Stack Sources:
minimum distance =
1 ; no wake effects
or
MAX(1,3*HB) ; wake effects, squat building
or
MAX(1,3*HW) ; wake effects, tall building
Volume Sources:
minimum distance = 1 + 2.15*SIGYO
Area Sources:
minimum distance = 1 + 0.5*BW
Where:
HB = height of building
HW = width of building
SIGYO = standard deviation of the lateral source
dimension of building
BW = width of area source
4-16
-------
Parameter
Name
X Receptor Grid System X-Axis or Range—This parameter is read
by the program only if the parameters MXPNTS and NYPMTS are
non-zero and only if an input tape or data file is not being
used. This parameter is an array of values in ascending order
that defines the X-axis or ranges (rings) (depending on
ISW(2)) of the receptor grid system in meters. If only the
first 2 values on the input card are punched and the parameter
NXPNTS is greater than 2, the program assumes the X-axis
(range) is to be generated automatically and assumes the first
value punched is an increment used to generate the remaining
NXPNTS evenly-spaced points. If all receptor points are being
input, NXPNTS values must be punched.
Y Receptor Grid System Y-Axis or Azimuth—This parameter is read
by the program only if the parameters NXPNTS and NYPNTS are
non-zero and only if an input tape or data file is not being
used. This parameter is an array of values in ascending order
that defines the Y-axis or azimuth bearings (depending on
ISW(2)) of the receptor grid system in meters or degrees. If
only the first 2 values on the input card are punched (third
and fourth values are zero) and the parameter NYPNTS is
greater than 2, the program assumes the first value punched is
the increment used to generate the remaining NYPNTS
evenly-spaced (rectangular or angular) points. If all
receptor points are being input, NYPNTS values must be
punched. If polar coordinates are being used, Y is measured
clockwise from zero degrees (north).
Z Elevation of Grid System Receptors—This parameter is not read
by the program if the parameter ISW(4) is zero or if an input
tape is being used or if NXPNTS or NYPNTS equals zero. This
parameter is an array specifying the terrain elevation (feet
if ISW(4)=1, meters if ISW(4)=-1) above mean sea level at each
receptor of the Cartesian or polar grid system. There are
NXPNTS • NYPNTS values read into this array. The program
starts the input of values with the first Y coordinate
specified and reads the elevations for each X coordinate at
that Y in the same order as the X coordinates were input. A
new data card is started for each Y value and the NXPNTS
elevations for that Y are read. The program will expect
NYPNTS groups of data cards with NXPNTS elevation values
punched in each group. For example, assume we have a 5 by 5
Cartesian or polar receptor array. The values Zi through
Zs are read from the first card group, the values Z6
through Zio from the second card group and Z2\ through
Z2S from the last card group.
4-17
-------
Parameter
Name
Rectangular
221 ,
Z6
Zl
Z22 i
z?
22
Z23 j
Z8
23
Z24 ,
Z9
ZA
Z25
Z10
Z5
z
(Cont.)
- X5
- X4
- X3
- X2
- XI
4-18
-------
Parameter
Name
(Discrete)
(Discrete)
(Discrete)
Discrete (Arbitrarily Placed) Receptor X or Range—This
parameter is not read by the program if the parameter NXWYPT
is zero or if the program is using an input tape or data file
with the ISW(12) option set to zero. This parameter is an
array defining all of the discrete receptor X points. The
values are either east-west distances or radial distances in
meters, depending on the type of reference system specified by
ISW(3). NXWYPT points are read by the program.
Discrete (Arbitrarily Placed) Receptor Y or Azimuth—This
parameter is not read by the program if the parameter NXWYPT
is zero or if the program is using an input tape or data file
with the ISW(12) option set to zero. This parameter is an
array defining all of the discrete receptor Y points in meters
and degrees. The values are either north-south distances or
azimuth bearings (angular distances) measured clockwise from
zero degrees (north depending on the type of reference system
specified by ISW(3). NXWYPT points are read by the program.
Elevation of the Discrete (Arbitrarily Placed) Receptors—This
parameter is not read by the program if the parameter ISW(4)
is zero or if the parameter NXWYPT equals zero of if an input
file is being used with the ISW(12) option equal to zero.
This parameter is an array specifying the terrain elevation
(feet if ISW(4)=1, meters if ISW(4)=-1) at each of the NXWYPT
discrete receptors:
c. Identification Labels and Model Constants. These data consist of
parameters pertaining to heading and identification labels and program
constants. These data, except for TITLE, are not read by the program if an
input tape or data file is being used.
Parameter
Name
TITLE
UNITS
Page Heading Label—This parameter is an array that allows up
to 80 characters of title information to be printed as the
first line of each output page.
Concentration/Deposition and Source Units Label—This
parameter is an array used for the optional input of two unit
labels. The first 40 characters of this array are provided
for an optional output units label for concentration or
deposition. This label is defaulted to "micrograms per cubic
meter" for concentration and "grams per square meter" for
deposition, if the parameter TK below is not punched or is
"0". The second 40 characters of this array are provided for
4-19
-------
Parameter
Name
UNITS
Cont.
ROTATE
TK
ZR
an optional source input units label. This label is defaulted
to "grams per second" for concentration or "grams" for
deposition for stacks and volume sources and to "grams per
second per square meter" or "grams per square meter" for area
sources, if the parameter TK below is not punched or is "0".
Wind Direction Correction Angle—This parameter is used to
correct for any difference between north as defined by the X,
Y reference grid system and north as defined by the weather
station at which the wind direction data were recorded. The
value of ROTATE (degrees) is subtracted from each
wind-direction sector angle (THETA). This parameter is
positive if the positive Y axis of the reference grid system
points to the right of north as defined by the weather
station. Most weather stations record direction relative to
true north and the center of most grid systems are relative to
true north. However, some weather stations record direction
relative to magnetic north and the ends of some UTM (Universal
Transverse Mercator) zones are not oriented towards true
north. The user is cautioned to check the wind data as errors
in the wind direction distribution will lead to erroneous
program results. The default value of ROTATE is "0".
Model Units Conversion Factor—This parameter is provided to
give the user flexibility in the source input units used and
the concentration or deposition output units desired. This
parameter is a direct multiplier of the concentration or
deposition equation. If this parameter is not punched or is
set to a value of "0", the program defaults to "1 x 10s"
micrograms per gram for concentration and to "1" for
deposition. This default assumes the user desires
concentration in micrograms per cubic meter or deposition in
grams per square meter and the input source units are grams
per second or total grams for stack and volume sources and
grams per second per square meter or grams per square meter
for area sources, depending on whether the program is to
calculate concentration or deposition. Also, if the default
value for this parameter is selected, the program defaults the
unit labels in the array UNITS above. If the user chooses to
input this parameter for other units, he must also input the
units labels in UNITS above. This parameter corresponds to K
in Equations (2-51), (2-56), (2-57), and (2-58).
Weather Station Recording Height—This parameter is the height
above ground level in meters at which the meteorological data
were recorded. If this parameter is not punched or has a
value of "0", the program defaults to "10" meters. This
parameter corresponds to Zi in Equation (2-1).
Acceleration Due to Gravity—This parameter, which is used in
the plume rise calculations, is the acceleration due to
gravity. If this parameter is not punched or has a value of
4 20
-------
Parameter
Name
G "0", the program uses "9.8" meters per second squared as the
Cont. default value. This parameter corresponds to g in equation
(2-3).
DECAY Decay Coefficient—This parameter is the coefficient
(seconds"1) of time-dependent pollutant removal by physical
or chemical processes (Equations (2-20), (2-21)). If SOz is
modeled in an Urban Mode and the regulatory default option
(ISW(22)) is chosen, the program assigns a decay coefficient
corresponding to a half life of four hours. Otherwise,
pollutant decay is not considered.
d. Meteorological Data. These data are the meteorological input
parameters classified according to one or more of the categories of wind
speed, Pasquill stability, wind direction and season or annual. These
parameters are not read by the program if an input tape or data file is being
used.
FREQ Joint Frequency of Occurrence—This parameter array consists
of the seasonal or annual joint frequency of occurrence of
wind-speed and wind-direction categories classified according
to the Pasquill stability categories (STAR summary,
fi,j,k,a in Table 2-4). This parameter has no default and
must be input in the correct order. The program begins by
reading the joint frequency table for season 1 (winter) and
stability category 1 (Pasquill A stability). The first data
card contains the joint frequencies of wind speed categories 1
through 6 (1 through NSPEED) for the first wind direction
category (north). The second data card contains the joint
frequencies of wind speed categories 1 through 6 for the
second wind direction category (north-northeast). The program
continues in this manner until the joint frequencies of the
last direction category (north-northwest) for stability
category 1, season 1 have been read. The program then repeats
this same read sequence for stability category 2 (Pasquill B
stability) and season 1. When all of the stability category
values for season 1 have been read, the program repeats the
read sequence for season 2, season 3, etc., until all of the
joint frequency values have been read. There are a total of
NSPEED«NSCTOR«NSTBLE»NSEASN data cards. If the total sum of
the joint frequency of occurrences for any season (or annual)
does not add up to 1, the program will automatically normalize
the joint frequency distribution by dividing each joint
frequency by the total sum. Also, the program assumes
stability categories 1 through 6 are Pasquill stabilities A
FREQthrough F. Seasons 1 through 4 are normally winter,
spring, summer and fall. See the parameter FMT above for the
format of these data.
4 2i
-------
Parameter
Name
TA Average Ambient Air Temperature—This parameter array consists
of the average ambient air temperatures (Ta;k,a in
Table 2-4), classified according to season (or annual) and
stability category, in degrees Kelvin. One data card is read
for each season (1 to NSEASN) with the temperature values for
stability categories 1 through NSTBLE punched across the
card. When the program has completed reading these data
cards, it will scan all of the values in the order of input
and, if any value is not punched or is zero, the program will
default to the last non-zero value of TA it encountered.
HM Mixing Heights—This parameter array consists of the median
mixing layer height in meters (Hm/i,kra in Table 2-4)
classified according to wind speed, stability and season (or
annual). The program begins reading the mixing layer heights
for season 1. The program reads the mixing layer height
values for each wind speed category (1 to NSPEED) from each
card. There are NSTBLE (1 through NSTBLE) cards read for each
season. The program scans each value input in the order of
input and, for each season, if a zero or non-punched value is
found, the program defaults to the last non-zero value
encountered within the values for that season. The ISCLT
program automatically uses a mixing height value of 10000
meters for the E and F stability categories when the program
is run in the Rural Mode.
DPDZ Potential Temperature Gradient—This parameter array consists
of the vertical gradients of potential temperature (90/9zi,k
in Table 2-4) classified according to wind speed and stability
category in units of degrees Kelvin per meter. There are
NSTBLE (1 through NSTBLE) data cards read with the values for
wind speed categories 1 through NSPEED read from each card. A
value of 96/9z greater than zero indicates stable thermal
stratification and a value of 39/8z less than zero
indicates unstable thermal stratification. However, because a
blank input field is interpreted as zero, the program assumes
a zero input value means a default value is desired. Also,
because the same plume rise equation is used for adiabatic and
unstable conditions, a negative input value will direct the
program to use the plume rise equations for adiabatic or
unstable thermal stratification. If the first value on a data
card is not punched or is zero, a default value is used that
depends on the stability category. If the stability category
is A, B, C or D, the value is left as a zero and the
adiabatic/unstable plume rise equation is used. However, if
the stability category is E or F, the value defaulted is
0.02 degrees Kelvin per meter for E and 0.035 degrees Kelvin
per meter for F stability. When any of the second through
sixth values of DPDZ on a data card are input as a zero or are
blank, the program will default to the previous value on the
data card. If the regulatory default option is selected
(ISW(22)=0) the default values will override any user input
values.
4-22
-------
Parameter
Name
UBAR
THETA
Wind Speed—This parameter array consists of the median wind
speeds in meters per second (ui in Table 2-4) for the wind
speed categories used in the calculation of the joint
frequency of occurrence of wind speed and direction (STAR
summary). There are NSPEED values read from this card. If
any value is not punched or is zero, the program defaults to
the following set of values: 1.5, 2.5, 4.3, 6.8, 9.5 and 12.5
meters per second.
Wind Direction—This parameter array consists of the median
wind direction angles in degrees for the wind-direction
categories used in the calculation of the joint frequency of
occurrence of wind speed and direction (STAR summary). There
are NSCTOR values read from 1 to 2 data cards and if the first
two values of this array are not punched or are zero, the
program defaults to the following standard set of values: 0,
22.5, 45, 67.5, 90, . . . , 337.5 degrees (N, NNE, ME, ...,
NNW) . The wind direction is that angle from which the wind is
blowing, measured clockwise from zero degrees (north).
Wind Speed Power Law Exponent—This parameter array consists
of the wind speed power law exponent (p in Equation (2-1))
classified according to wind speed and stability categories 1
through MSTBLE. If the first value on any data card in this
set is not punched or is zero, the program defaults to the
value from the following set of values: Rural A = .07, B =
.07, C = .10, D = .15, E = .35, F = .55; Urban A = .15, B =
.15, C = .20, D = .25, E = .30, F = .30 depending on the
stability category A through F. Also, if any of the second
through last values on a card is not punched or is zero, the
value is defaulted to the previous value on the data card. If
a negative value is input, the result is a wind speed power
law exponent of zero. If the regulatory default option is
selected (ISW(22)=0) the default values will override any
user-input values.
e. Source Data. These data consists of all necessary information required
for each source. These data are divided into three groups: (1) parameters
that are required for all source types, (2) parameters that are required for
stack type sources, and (3) parameters that are required for volume sources
and area sources. The order of input of these parameters is given at the end
of this section.
4-23
-------
Parameter
Name
MUMS
DISP
TYPE
QFLG
Source Identification Number—This parameter is the source
identification number and is a 1- to 5-digit integer. If this
number is negative, the program assumes NUMS is only a flag to
terminate the card source input data. Also, if NUMS is not
punched or is zero, the program will default NUMS to the
relative sequence number of the source input. This number
cannot be defaulted if source data are also being input from
tape or data file. Sources must be input in ascending order
of the source identification number.
Source Disposition—This parameter is a flag that tells the
program what to do with the source. If this parameter is not
punched or has a value of "0", the program assumes this is a
new source for which concentration or deposition is to be
calculated. Also, if the program is using an input tape or
data file, this new source will be merged into the old sources
from file or will replace a file source with the same source
identification number. If the parameter DISP has a value of
"1", the program assumes that the file input source having the
same source identification number is to be deleted from the
source inventory. The program removes the source as well as
the concentration or deposition arrays for the source. If the
parameter DISP has a value of "2", the program assumes the
source strengths to be read from data card for this source are
to be used to rescale the concentration or deposition values
of the tape input source with the same source identification
number. The new source strengths input from card replace the
old values taken from the input tape and the concentration or
deposition arrays taken from tape are multiplied by the ratio
of the new and old source strengths. The DISP option equal to
"2" can only be used if QFLG equals zero and the tape input
source has QFLG equal to zero.
Source TYPE—This parameter is a flag that tells the program
what type of source is being input. If this parameter is not
punched or is "0", the program assumes a stack source. If
this parameter has a value of "1", the program assumes a
volume source. Similarly, if this parameter has a value of
"2", an area source is assumed.
Source Emission Option—This parameter is a flag that tells
the program how the input source emissions are varied. If
this value is not punched or is "0", the program assumes the
source emissions vary by season (or annual) and only NSEASN
values are read by the program. If this parameter has a value
of "1", the program assumes the source emissions vary by
stability category and season. If this parameter has a value
of "2", the program assumes the source emissions vary by wind
speed category and season. If this parameter has a value of
"3", the program assumes the source emissions vary by wind
speed category, stability category and season. The order of
input of the source strengths under each of these options is
discussed under the parameter Q below.
4-24
-------
Parameter
Name
DX Source X Coordinate—This parameter gives the Cartesian X
(east-west) coordinate in meters of the source center for
stack and volume sources and the southwest corner for area
sources (X in Table 2-6) relative to the origin of the
reference grid system being used.
DY Source Y Coordinate—This parameter gives the Cartesian Y
(north-south) coordinate in meters of the source center for
stack and volume sources and the southwest corner for area
sources (Y in Table 2-6) relative to the origin of the
reference grid system being used.
H Height of Emission—This parameter gives the height above
ground in meters of the pollutant emission. For volume
sources, this is the height to the center .of the source.
ZS Source Elevation—This parameter gives the terrain elevation
in meters above mean sea level at the source location and is
not used by the program unless receptor terrain elevations are
being used.
Q Source Emission—This parameter array gives the emission rate
of the source for each category specified by QFLG above. If
QFLG above is "0", NSEASM values are read from one data card.
IF QFLG is "1", NSEASN data cards are read with the source
emission values for stability categories 1 through NSTBLE read
from each card. If QFLG is "2", NSEASN data cards are read
with the source emission values for wind speed categories 1
through NSPEED read from each card. If QFLG is "3", NSPEED (1
through NSPEED) source emission values are read from each data
card and there are NSTBLE (1 through NSTBLE) data cards read
for each season. There are no default values provided for the
parameter Q and the program assumes "0" is a valid source
emission, the input units of source emission are:
PARAMETER Q
Source Type
Concentration
Deposition
Stack or
Volume
Area
mass per unit time
(g/sec)*
mass per unit time
per unit area
(g/sec«m2))*
total mass
(g)*
total mass per unit
area
(g/m2)*
*Default units
4-25
-------
Parameter
Name
NVS
VS
FRQ
GAMMA
Number of Particulate Size Categories—This parameter gives
the number of particulate size categories in the particulate
distribution used in calculating ground-level deposition or
concentration with deposition occurring. If ground-level
deposition (ISW{1) = "2") is being calculated, this parameter
must be punched and has a maximum value of 20. Also, if the
program is calculating concentration and this value is punched
greater than zero, concentration with deposition occurring is
calculated. If the parameter NVS is greater than zero, the
program reads NVS values for each of the parameter variables
VS, FRQ and GAMMA below.
Settling Velocity—This parameter array is read only if NVS
above is greater than zero. This parameter is the settling
velocity in meters per second for each particulate size
category (1 through NVS). No default values are provided for
this parameter.
Mass Fraction of Particles—This parameter is read only if NVS
above is greater than zero. This parameter is the mass
fraction of particulates contained in each particulate size
category (1 through NVS). No default values are provided for
this parameter.
Surface Reflection Coefficient—This parameter array is read
only if NVS above is greater than zero. This parameter is the
surface reflection coefficient for each particulate size
category (1 through NVS). A value of "0" indicates no surface
reflection (total retention). A value of "1" indicates
complete reflection from the surface. The reflection
coefficient range is from 0 to 1 and no default values are
provided.
Stack Source
Parameters
TS
VEL
Stack Gas Exit Temperature—This parameter gives the stack gas
exit temperature (Ts in Table 2-6) in degrees Kelvin. If
this parameter is zero, the exit temperature is set egual to
the ambient air temperature. If this parameter is negative,
its absolute value is added to the ambient air temperature to
form the stack gas exit temperature. For example, if the
stack gas exit temperature is 15 degrees Celsius above the
ambient temperature, enter TS as -15 (the minus sign is used
by the program only as a flag).
Stack Gas Exit Velocity—This parameter gives the stack gas
exit velocity in meters per second.
Stack Diameter—This parameter gives the inner stack diameter
in meters and no default is provided.
4-26
-------
Stack Source
Parameters
HB
BW
WAKE
Building Height—This parameter gives the height above ground
level in meters of the building adjacent to the stack. Thijs
parameter and BW below control the wake effects option. If HB
and BW are punched non-zero, wake effects for the respective
source are considered. However, if HB and BW are not punched
or both equal "0", wake effects for the respective source are
not considered (see Section 2.4.1.1.d).
Building Width—This parameter gives the width in meters of
the building adjacent to the stack. If the building is not
square, input the dimension of a square building of equal
horizontal area. If HB is not punched or is zero, this value
should not be punched.
Supersguat Building Wake Effects Equation Option--This option
is used to control the equations used in the calculation of
the lateral virtual distance (Equations (2-37) and (2-38))
when the effective building width to height ratio (BW/HB) is
greater than 5. If this parameter is not punched or has a
value of "0" and the width to height ratio is greater than 5,
the program will use Equation (2-37) to calculate the lateral
virtual distance producing the upper bound of the
concentration or deposition for the source. If this parameter
has a value of "1", the program uses Equation (2-38) producing
the lower bound of the concentration or deposition for the
source. The appropriate value for this parameter depends on
building shape and stack placement with respect to the
building (see Section 2.4.1.1.d).
Volume Source
Parameters
SIGYO Standard Deviation of the Crosswind Distribution—This
parameter gives the standard deviation of the crosswind
distribution of the volume source (oyo in Table 2-6) in
meters. See Section 2.4.2.3 to determine the correct value
for this parameter. No default value is provided.
SIGZO Standard Deviation of the Vertical Distribution—This
parameter gives the standard deviation of the vertical
distribution of the volume source (azo in Table 2-6) in
meters. See Section 2.4.2.3 to determine the correct value
for this parameter. No default value is provided for this
parameter.
Area Source
Parameters
XO Width of Area Source- -This parameter gives the width of the
area source (x0 in Table 2-6) in meters. This parameter
4 27
-------
XO should be the length of one side of the approximately square
Cont. area source. No default is provided for this parameter.
f. Source Data Input Order. There are from one to four data input card
groups of one or more cards each required to input the source data. The data
cards and parameters required depend on the source type (TYPE) and on the
parameters DISP, QFLG, NVS and the concentration/deposition option parameter
ISW(l). Card Group 17 is always included in the input deck for each source
input (1 to NSOURC). Card group 17a through 17c are included only if NVS on
Card Group 17 is non-zero. Card Group 17d is included only if DISP on Card
Group 17 equals "0" or "2". The order of input of these source cards is Card
Group 17 followed by those used from 17a through 17d for each successive
source input. DO NOT stack all of 17 together, all of 17a together, etc. or
the program will terminate in error.
Source Input
Card Group 17
Required Source Parameters for Card Group 17—The parameters read from
the first data card for each source and their order are:
Stack Sources — MUMS, DISP, TYPE, QFLG, DX, DY, H,
ZS, TS, VEL, D, HB, BW, WAKE, NVS
Volume Sources - NUMS, DISP, TYPE, QFLG, DX, DY, H,
ZS, SIGYO, SIGZO, NVS
Area Sources NUMS, DISP, TYPE, QFLG, DX, DY, H,
ZS, XO, NVS
If the parameter DISP on this card is set to value of "0",
all parameters on this card are expected to have the correct
value and the program may read Card Groups 17a, 17b and 17c
{depending on NVS) and will read Card Group 17d. If DISP is
set to a value of "1", only the parameters NUMS and DISP are
referenced (required) on this card, the program assumes it is
to delete an incoming tape or data file source and only this
data card is read for this source. If DISP is set up to a
value of "2", only the parameters NUMS, DISP and QFLG are
referenced (required) on this card because the program
assumes it is to read the source strengths from Card Group
17d and to rescale the concentration or deposition of an
incoming tape or data file source. Parameters not referenced
on this first data card are set from tape or date file source
data by the program.
4-28
-------
Source Input
Card Groups
17a, lib,
and 17c
Source Particulate Distribution Data—This card group
consists of three sets of one or more data cards each and is
read by the program only if DISP is set to "0" and the
parameter NVS is set to a value greater than zero for
concentration calculations with deposition occurring or for
deposition calculations. The first data card(s) contains the
values of the parameter array VS, the second contains the
values of the parameter array FRQ and the third contains the
values of the parameter array GAMMA. A total of NVS values
are read from each set of cards.
Source Input
Card Group 17d
Source Emissions—the last input card group for a source
contains the source emission values for the source. This
card group consists of one or more data cards and is read
only if the parameter DISP is not equal to "I". The number
of cards required and the order of values input depends on
the parameters QFLG and is given under the source strength
parameter Q above.
4.1.3. Output Information
The ISCLT program generates five categories of program output. Each
category is optional to the user. That is, the user controls what output
other than warning and error messages the program generates for a given run.
In the following paragraphs, each category of output is related to the
specific input parameter that controls the output category. All program
output are printed except for magnetic tape or data file output.
a. Input Parameters Output. The ISCLT program will print all of the input
data except for source data if the parameter ISW(6) is set equal to a value of
"1" or '3". An example of this output is shown in Appendix D.
b. Source Parameters Output. The ISCLT program will print the input card
and tape source data if the parameter ISW(6) is set to a value of "2" or "3".
An example of the printed source data is shown in Appendix D.
4-29
-------
c. Seasonal/Annual Concentration or Deposition. The parameter ISW(l)
specifies whether the program is to calculate concentration or deposition and
the parameter NSEASN specifies if seasonal or annual input meteorological data
is being used. The option ISW(7) is used to specify whether seasonal output
or annual output or both is to be generated. If the input meteorological data
are seasonal (winter, spring, summer, fall), the program can be directed to
produce tables of seasonal as well as annual concentration or deposition by
setting the parameter ISW(7) equal to "0" or "3". Also, only seasonal tables
are produced if ISW(7) equals "1". If the parameter NSEASM is set equal to a
value of "1" and only annual output is selected (ISW(7)="2"), the program
labels the output concentration or deposition as annual calculations.
However, if seasonal output is selected with NSEASN equal to "1", the output
tables are labeled seasonal. Also, all seasonal output is labeled season 1,
season 2, etc., requiring the user to keep track of the actual meteorological
season. Example Annual output tables are shown in Appendix D.
d. Concentration or Deposition Printed for the Maximum 10 and/or All
Receptor Points. The ISCLT program is capable of printing the concentration
or deposition calculations for each receptor point input to the program or
printing only the maximum 10 of those receptors or both. The parameter
ISW(IO) is used to determine which calculations are to be printed. Examples
of output tables giving the calculations at all points and the maximum 10 are
given in Appendix D.
e. Magnetic Tape or Data File Output. The ISCLT program will write all
input data and all concentration (deposition) calculations to magnetic tape or
data file. These data are written to the logical unit number specified by the
parameter ISW(15). This tape or data file must be assigned to the run prior
to the execution of the ISCLT program, positioned to the correct file and must
be equated to the logical unit number given in ISW(15). ISW(15) must be a
4-30
-------
positive value for magnetic tape or a negative value for mass storage. If
seasonal meteorological input data are used, the program saves only seasonal
concentration (deposition) on the output file and if input is annual, only
annual calculations are saved. This output file can be read back into the
ISCLT program to print tables not output in the original run and/or to modify
the source inventory for corrections or updates in the source emissions.
4.2 User's Instructions for the ISCLT Program
4.2.1 Program Description
The ISC long-term (ISCLT) program is designed to calculate ground-level
average concentration or total deposition values produced by emissions from
multiple stack, volume and area sources. The ground level concentration or
total deposition values can be calculated on a seasonal (monthly) or annual
basis or both for an unlimited number of sources. The program is capable of
producing the seasonal and/or annual results for each individual source input
as well as for the combined (summed) seasonal and/or annual results from
multiple groups of user-selected sources. The program calculations of
concentration or deposition are performed for an input set of receptor
coordinates defining a fixed receptor grid system and/or for discrete
(arbitrarily placed) receptor points. The receptor grid system may be a
right-handed Cartesian coordinate system or a polar coordinate system. In
either case, zero degrees (north) is defined as the positive Y axis and ninety
degrees (east) is defined as the positive X axis and all points are relative
to a user-defined hypothetical origin (normally X=0, Y=0), although the
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates may be used as the Cartesian
coordinate system).
4-31
-------
The ISCLT computer program is written in ANSI FORTRAN-77 and is designed
to execute on most medium to large scale computers with minimal or no
modifications. The program requires approximately 75,000 words (UNIVAC 1110)
of executable core for instruction and data storage. The program design
assumes a minimum of 32 bits per variable word and a minimum of four character
bytes per computer word. The program also requires from two to four
input/output devices, depending on whether the tape input/output options are
used. Input card image data is referenced as logical unit 5 and print output,
which requires 132-character print columns, is referenced as logical unit 6.
The optional tape or data file input is referenced as logical unit 2 and the
output is referenced as logical unit 3. The user has the option of either
using the default logical unit numbers given here or specifying alternate
logical unit numbers. The computer program consists of a main program (ISCLT)
and 19 subroutines as shown in Appendix F. The FORTRAN source code for the
entire model is given in Appendix B.
4.2.2 Data Deck Setup
The card image input data required by the ISCLT program depends on the
program options desired by the user. The data may be partitioned into five
major groups as shown in Figure 4-1. The five groups are:
1. Title Record (1 data card)
2. Program Option and Control Records (2 to 5 Records)
3. Receptor Data Records (the number of records included in this
group depends on the parameters ISW(4), ISW(5), ISW(12),
NXPNTS, NYPNTS and NXWYPT)
4. Meteorological Data (only if ISW(5) is less than or equal to 1)
5. Source Data Cards (this record group is included only if NSOURC
is greater than zero)
4-32
-------
(5)
MUMS, DISP, etc. (this deck consists
of al3 source data cards (Card
Group 17) and is included in the data
deck only if NSOURC >0).
FMT (this deck consists of parameter
card groups FMT (group 9) through
(4) parameter card group P (group 16)
and is included in the data deck
only if ISW(5) <. 1)
(3)
(L
XDIS, YDIS, ZDIS (discrete receptors)
Z (grid system elevations deck)
Y (grid system Y-axis deck)
f
X (grid system X-axis deck)
[ UNITS (read only if ISW(5) <_ 1)
[ IDSORC (read only if NGROUP > 0)
| NOCOMB (read only if NGROUP > 0)
f
J NSOURC, NGROUP, NXPNTS, etc.
IS'kv
(I)
\
TITLE
FIGURE 4-1. Input data deck setup for the ISCLT program.
4-33
-------
4.2.3 Input Data Description
Section 4.1.2 provides a summary description o£ all input data parameter
requirements for the ISCLT program. This section provides the user with the
FORTRAN format and order in which the program requires the input data
parameters. The input parameter names used in this section are the same as
those introduced in Section 4.1.2. Two forms of data may be input to the
program. One form is card image input data (80 characters per record) in
which all required data may be entered. The other form is magnetic tape or
mass storage. Both forms of input are discussed below.
a. Card Input Requirements. The ISCLT program reads all card image input
data in a fixed-field format with the use of a FORTRAN "A", "I" or "F" editing
code (format). Each parameter value must be punched in a fixed-field on the
data card defined by the start and end card columns specified for the
variable. Table 4-4 identifies each variable by name and respective card
group. Also, Table 4-4 specifies the card columns (fixed-field) for the
parameter value and the editing code ("A", "I" or "F" for alpha-numeric,
integer and real variables, respectively) used to interpret the parameter
value.
Card Group 1 in Table 4-4 gives the print output page heading and is
always included in the input data deck. Any information to identify the
output listing or data case may be punched into this card. If the card is
left blank, the heading will consist of only the output page number or the
heading will be taken from the input tape or data file, if used.
Card Group 2 gives the values of the program option array ISW. This card
is always included in the input data deck. However, the values of ISW(l)
through ISW(4) are automatically set by the program if you are using an input
(source/concentration or deposition inventory) tape. The options on this card
that determine whether or not some card groups are included in the input data
4-34
-------
^
w
0£
H
£-1
W
s
jrf jj
a O
< M
&4
r . i .
«•« I"** K
1 CU 0
W M §
ffl § Q
H $ §
2 H
2 itf
K A
O S
O O
Q^ ft|
cu
H
U
rH
C
o
•H
4J
CU
•H
SH
U
01
0)
Q
C
•H
•a
CO
,
SH 01
en
•o
SH -H
O SH
4-> en
0) SH
u o
0) 4J
IH Oi
0)
0) U
4-> CO
CO O
O CU
II II
rH CM
i-4
o
o
,.
J*
c
rO
rH
**
rH
M
^
^(
^-^
rM
^^
2
M
x^
•O
0)
U
CO
"ft
Ku
i-H
•H
CO
JJ
•H
J3 W
IH I-"
5 5
cu
m <"
0) u
Q) j_j
*H
U 0)
01 .p
'H 0)
^ SH
U
C 01 01
(0 SH -H
•H O T3
01 4J
0) CU S-i
4J 0) CO
CO 0) O
U tj CU
II II
rH CM
SH
0
O
>,
V
C
CO
rH
•°
rH
M
VO
*
CO
••„*
[5
w
M
CO
4->
•3
01
O
•H
4J
cO
<])
rH
0)
C
•H
CO
SH
SH
4-J
O
C
II
O
IH
O
V
^
C
CO
i-H
X)
rH
M
00
*
^4
^*
s
M
01
SH
4J 0)
0) 4-1
CU 0)
ti i C
C C
nj (0
-P 4J
-S3
c c
o o
•H -H
4J 4->
CO ro
> >
4->
II II
rH rH
1
CU
CU
CO
4->
4-1
3
CU >i
"3 '3 rH
O O C
o
SH 0)
O CU CO
3 4J
O) 4->
Cf"< , 1
3 4->
•H CU 3
4-1 CU
O 3 C
C 0 -H
II II II
O rH CM
SH
O
^
M
C
rO
i— i
-0
rH
(H
O
rH
4.M.
in
rg
w
M
01
(U
CU
CO
4->
j_)
CU
4->
3
O
TJ
C
ro
4J
3
CU
C
•H
4->
o
X)
II
ro
CO
1 >,
i— i
T3 4J C
cu 3 O
-M Pi
C C co
• H -rH 4J
SH CO
CU
4J SH 4-) CO
O 3 3 t3
C O CU
01 C 4->
0) -H 3
!H -P CU
CO 3
MH
•H
•a
cu
i?
CO
x;
u
0)
XI
4J
Q
CO
•a
ro
E
Cn
O
SH
CU
a>
(^
4J
>1
>,
rH
1— 1
CO
•H
CO
g
4->
CO
4->
(U
01
CU
SH
CO
01
SH
(U
4J
CU
e .
CO TJ
CO CQ
CU 3
Q) Cn
w C
0) 'H
x: a)
H X)
^
4-35
-------
».
8
H
W
j§ s
2 o
< M
0, H
CU
H M
_M l""* Q£
I ^x CU O
4< . 2 «>
w "c 0 Q
s§ is
H <-> 3
S5 H
c§ s
82
o
06 fa
CU
H
U
M
G
Q
•H
Oi
•H
O
01
0)
Q
0)
?$ ^ "*""
H e
CU 4-> ti
O -H O
b tj b
W •-•
W
C
-0 |
rtj *~^
o o
o
u
0)
0) 0)
6 6
(0 (0
U S3
<0
CU
a
3
O
S-i
O
T3
3
5 1
S §
C >i (0
arH
C
G
W ,0
C
O
•H f— |
*^* T3
(0 ^
5^1
n> 0 S M
Q)
01 w i— i o)
0 2 o °
•H C J5 -H
(0 (0 (0
i-H i— 1
4-1 3 4J -U 3
G U G G U
•H rH >H -H i-H
(4 fO ^-) ^ (0
Oi U ft CU 0
II II II
i-H
G
o
U
fsj •—
O OcnGO) O O O cu IN u
•H -H 0) O G ^ -rl C -rt 4J rH (0
(0 (Ot«4J£) C (0 (Or-iis
4-) 4JQWO i-lS 4J-. 4JUMC
c GWOU J2 C?!CMO
0) 0)O| S-l 0)]!:0)(0>H
U CJT30)— O U ^ U U Li 4J
C GO)^^ **•• C CO(0
O OC>-S °'H O Omr-i
OWU-H10 U UjJJs
0) ^ II Q) CO ni ^ U
O S r« r-H P| Q) I-H rH
S-I O Q (Q ^^ HJ 3 rH (Q
w£"!n-H S,, > 3oQ
&H >i°2> w -y _ o^|-| O§_, 0) 0) 0) 6 0) OT3 O
• H -H "H U 5 T3 T3 13 O T3 -HO) -H tjl >1
W-H 01 -O <]} ro 3Wi-H3OTT3O-HO3 j3J3Ur-lOXl XOJrHXCUU'O-H
§T3 (0 (ft 'O O G Sj
^ U S *~ <0 (0 Oj
II II II II II II II II II II
M rgm rHrsino«#o rH
i-i U t-i U
O 00 O
0 0 i! X
* C G
~£ 03 O
rH M (N
—» '•NO
OO CT> i-H
^^ *** **^
S 3. S
CO CO CO
M MM
4-36
-------
w c
£8
< -'
V
C/Q
1
i< 2
U O
< M
p Oi
Qi O
8§
S si
88
Oi fa
CU
H
CJ
r/1
M
C
o
•H
-U
a
•H
U
O
(Q
0)
Q
0)
JS 0 -P
Oi -P (-i
O -H O
H *•*
W
•o §
«J rH
0)
-p
il
2£
CO
Oi
Ot
3
O
o
•a
S-l
<-» (1) rH
rH £ rH
-P
'w ° w
J* & 0) rH
O o O •>->
^5* §,«
c 3 -o S
O j* G CO
o '"j aJ S-*
o S ^
CD ***• -H P.I
rH & (M -*J
S > O U O
(N
^«*
0
rH
S
CQ
M
•
_4J
c
0
u
CM «—
.c c
u o
TJ 0) O
Q) £ -P
g
O
-t_> -1-1
§ •§
§
0)
m u
O m 3
u o
to
«
w
-
MU>D)Uuua)
CJl-H (B tjl I-i 4J CO
a>orO'oo3c:o
cuuccuoox:
W Oi -H -H DJ W U 4J
II II II
O rH CSJ
o
c
CM
CM
r/i
8
,
«
°
o
(0
.3
(0 (0
.3 « -S
to
a)
o
en
m
U
0)0)
a
o>
u
Oj C Oi C
u u n
OOO
CO
(N
in
CM
-------
s
oo
w
w
< §
< M
., BS
i — . o< u
,*• . S3 W
S§ |°
H "" U S
S H
8s
a S
au
H
u
00
I-H
c
0
•H
-P
Oi
•H
U
U
01
(1)
a
CO
< O -P
ce o id
a -P §
0 -H 0
&4 'O p4
w ~--
01
•o i
S-i 3
3-3
o
u
0)
-p
3
2 P) fl) (J) 0[ J^
OH (Q O^ C 4-*
H -P (0 ^
O o O *° ^ C
pi-j t . jj CU 01 ^ 0j ~ ir^ ,O
" -H O 'H O -P .5 +* 4J
•p -H nj a) o 5 ^ u
DI(J>-P -p ucr»o u
(OO3C3C n)mti>t3
-Pi-HOOOO
CM
^^ *••»
in vo
rH rH
& s"
00 00
M H
•
-p
c
o
o
r-q «—
a) a) nj 01 T3
nl O ._ -H a)
0) 5 -H
•fl O O
SH 2 0) 4J
Pi (^ QJ
(ll /rt
Qj rS ^
CO ^^
C 1) On *lj o
•H Qi g •§ -P
"l-a, I S-S
01 „ C | <3 2 g>
•JJ 2 | > -0 T3 ^
CU (j, -H g ,j) ~
C3 ^4 r 5 r^
•H (0 | i Tj M
6 -P g (TJ g ON
CTi-r-it-i VJQ1410^
O 2] (M
I-H M
«3« vO
OO OO
1 1
oo in
OO OO
^* ^>*k
t~ 00
rH rH
sT s^
00 GO
M M
•a T)
•H -H
C C
? S
O O
T3
cu Q<
01
01 .H
•H
CO "
01 .2
ij cu ^ cu
C C
§-p g -p
01 3 01
a T3 Qi T3
II II
O rH
U
O
c
fl)
rH
M
00
OO
^«»
<3\
rH
S
00
M
4-38
-------
W C
J O
« O
C
O
•H
4->
CU
•H
i-l
u
CO
(D
Q
<3)
< O 4J
OJ 4J U
O -H O
fa 13 fa
CQ
C
•a §
t-i 3
«J .-(
°cS
S-l
cu
4-1
II
(d A}
cu
§<
o
S-i
a
•o
S-i
(0
o
0)
(Q
-
§
8
g
O
J-i i
CO
u
too
i-li-HCU
o §
Up
3 0)
4-) £ S-i
00
I
in
ix
O
on
4-39
-------
J O
SB
CO
H
S o
< M
H M
D tt
ft O
2 CO
i— I W
pH
ft! Q
r^ §
CJ it
5 g
8§
a PL,
ft
H
CO
M
Description
0)
jS ° •*•*
« 4J §
O -H o
H -
01
c?
10 1
(0 i-H
O O
o
u
4-J
0) 0)
s e
^4 J3
fTJ
ft
ft
o
o
t3
i-i
m
O
tj U
O n)
4-> i— 1
ft O
0) ft
u
0)
^ C
•H
11)
x:
4-1 01
Cn
*° 'u
Dl
r of receptors in the X-aj
system. (The number o
inates) .
o
X) -a ti
I -r> o
3 U O
2 Cn U
M
CM
1— I
1
en
^
CO
H
2
ft
^
2
U t-i
O fO
4-1 rH
ft O
0) ft
O
0)
t. C
•H
system. (The number of
inates) .
0) TJ
§-H O
U O
2 Cn u
M
^0
1— 1
1
ro
i-t
•K
CO
2
&
2
Jj (NJ
O
-P II
ft
0) ^
Q)
^ S
<0 (H
U -H
(0
ft ,3
r of discrete (arbitraril
s. This parameter is not
unless ISW(12) is non-zero.
0) 4->
XI C ro
2 ft O
M
O
CM
1
f^
rH
EH
ft
s^
2
r^
2
4J 01
3 -H
C 4-1 rH
•H
01
•H
U
0) O 4-1
Uj
§ ^
g
'H -H 0)
(6 4->
r of seasons (months)
rological data. The r
eter is 4 and if blank or 0
d)OE
X) a) m
3 0) n)
2 E ft
M
«*
(S
i
rH
CM
*
2
frf
w
CO
2
4-> TJ 4->
C C rH
•H (0 3
O (0
•r-i IH
_ a)
•G -O
0) S
5 S, «
01 5
"sl"
01 '? ^
Q)
•H T)
r of wind speed categor
ency of occurrence of
tion. The maximum is 6 an
if blank or 0.
0) 3 U 0)
X) O1 a) 3
3 fc -H «
2 IH 13 >
M
CO
CM
1
in
CM
4
Q
w
w
ft
CO
2
Q) 'O vO
X! C
4-1 IQ 01
• H
C *O .j
•ri ^ 2~i
O) 'J
ft 3
s W-S
*rl 'O "^
|'S5
m ^
u o "2
r of Pasquill stability
frequency or occurrence
tion. The maximum is 6 ai
ank or 0.
0) 4J U rH
XI G 0) XI
2 'n 'b -H
H
CM
CO
1
(ft
CM
*
pa
J
ra
w
2
01
•iH
CO
j_^
O
CM
||
If)
S
CO
[^J
ft
•H
0)
ft
(0
•H
•a
0)
Cn
I
u
0)
XI
. !
O
r^
(0
u
•a
c
(0
E
ITJ
Cn
O
ft
-------
OT
e
B
^ 2
oi o
< M
CU H
O.
H M
rf< P OS
| ^> CU 0
4- • g W
4J H W
s § a«
« o £9
^ *" S 2
*g EH
2 i<|
(Vj 5]
rh p2
O O
QH Pn
CU
H
J
0
W
M
scription
0)
Q
0)
IS ® ~u
tt! 4J !-i
O -H O
Cti *O fo
W -"
01
•0 I
U 3
fO rH
O O
u
in
0)
4->
0) 0)
E e
m m
(H S
tO
cu
CU
o
t-l
o
•a
it
(0
o
4J T3 v£>
C C rH
•H (0
O M
•l-l .rH
B -9 j.1
categories i:
wind spee
id the defaull
direction sector
occurrence of
e maximum is 16 an
TJ 4-1 £ •
G O H 0
* .8
4-4 >i C
O U 0 J ro
<1) 3 O rH
X) CT1 CU XI
E 0) lJ
3 U -r( (4-1
S <(-! T> -H
•"I"
M
\0
00
1
m
oo
«
OS
0
EH
U
W
2
oo
4-> • m sj
3d) o
cu cu c
4J OJ O
3 4J -H -~
O 4-> •-<
•H >~l
§^1I
^&
S1 CU
"3 w 2*
0 «^.«
ll D <"
•g^-S-0
h C W
ffl-s &'H
fs-i-
§" ° c
*c" §
-H OJ 0) 4J
^53'^
(0 fi
4J O O CU
3 » -H r) C3
CU 0) rH O
4-> CU CU OS
3 id CU ^ O
O 4J < O 2
^
M
0
<*
1
r~
oo
pq
j
M
fe
s
0) CU ^
u o • o
LJ S-t 0) 0)
33^-0
O O a)
w en ^ rQ
u
.-, T3 (0
•g| su
s ^-^
u w Cu
0) m x;
•rt -P
to specify the
u are using to
There are NGROUP
1 is omitted from
S "-1 .
^ .s°
« S ° "
a 2 .2 m cu
P 0) 4J -P D
x) 1 3 -rl O
it) C XI 01 S
(-. i e -H
u Q o x; u-i
< M U EH -H
^f
M
o
M
o
«* 00 00
II • • • 1
rH m r^
r~
8
sz
"t<
0) i-H 01 01
01 ro 0) -H
333
10 •"• cu
0-553 .
41 -H 2 o
n | § 0. „
r; W 01 . (0
t3 -H 0) U
T3 S-l
S,
^7 c ti x: 3
.H -H 0) CU
o -9 x: 4J 5
1 O U 4->
(0 4-1 U 4-) 4-1
U 3 (0 -rl
u c o x; e
,< -H W 4-1 O
>JO
M
OO
rH
•T3
!-j
m
o
x:
o
rv] oo m
VO rH f» 0)
II • • • 1 SH
O
rH r~ OO 4-1
f~ — •
M
»
o
OQ
Q
M
10
*#
01
•H
00
J_l
O
CM
II
tn
i
M
4-1
CU
C
-H
0)
CU
m
4J
44
•H
T3
(U
cn
(0
x;
o
CU
XI
4-1
Q
C
(Tl
IW
Q
-o
c
IT)
g
(0
!H
o>
o
S-l
CU
cu
X!
4-1
>1
£)
>,
<-t
rH
ITS
U
• H
4-1
CJ
o
4J
*
4-1
CU
01
0)
u
ft)
01
S-l
0)
4->
CU
e •
-------
W
ll W C
C <-H -H -H
O rH
•IH nj
^j (j CO 4J
.,_( -H rH Ll
w 4-> <0
agg."
S|s .
= 3°1
2 w -g o
3 'H m §
2rH° 0-
4J CD
G .a S 01
CD 10 O .H
U rH
§ cnH^J
'J= -°
aj £ u «j
J3 ^ 0) rH
«,
c » 15
•H -P ^ S
> •* 2
•H C &
Cn 3 ^
0) M
CO .i J3
U -y 4J
*J 5.
0 3^-0 .
JO g 'H <1) rH
ro "^
•C 4J 0) 3 g
U C rH (0 3
•H i— 1 <*-! rH
O Ll -H CD O
^ a<+-i -a o
<
o
rH
O
^
1
rH
CO
H
M
py
*
^
in
4-1 CU M-4 01 0)
3 X M -H ft
Oj 4J £ (0
C H 4J
•H «4H .
'H "g . IH
5 -o 4-i rj
Cn 0) rH ^* js!
C rH 3 U
CU rH (0 C CU
U -H IW 6 T3
.p "4-1 CO 3
01 *O i— i ., .
>i P. 3 -0
rH {Q ° ft «
0) rH .H C W
o m C -5 3
^ O -H
3 -H M „, CO
8^*35
aifa§:
" »& .i^
en.™ TJ "S -a <*>
c n x: a» ,
>l3|SS
"Ǥa'^
01 CO
MO"£
*J J3 rH r^ ^
S^ u « &g
s 2 « 2^
f~^ . QJ C7*
U 01 g 4J
4J (0 01 T3 3
• H Ll -H Ll CU
o c aj si i m 'g ^'g
w'^S.w «5l'H
rt. CD " 3 .
f*i c M Cn »^ ;^ trt it
w c CO i i CO II
CD CD g
u-i cn-|J4-' °i w co'Oco
•H >i C -H u <" 2
•O W .H c/J C U Q^
>i C TD H 4-> -H X
Li U -H O &i to 0) -H
< (0 CnU2<+-l4->H-ri
O
•
O
rH
CM
CO
^^
•a
u
(0
u
u
O O O 10
rH M CO 0)
II . . . I U
o
rH rH rH M-l
rH f^ ^^
X
4C
•K
^O
0)
H
T3
0)
CO
S1
•H
CD
CO
*^H
n
o
u
in
00
M
^^
4->
a
CD
a
4->
IH a
n)
8ti
TD 5
a
Li H
n) cu
U f|
4-1
"3 e
a o
••H ^-1
G
_f~*l i*
4-)
O 01
Li -H
01
T3 |^.
CO ">
li CD
•H e
§2
a
(U
u ai
to w
CD
01 J2
a -p
3
o i
U O
o^ ^
.g g
3 -1-1
e
CD Ll
01 O
0) U-l
.C C
H -H
4C
-1C
4-42
-------
w c
AMETERS,
N
QJ 0
< M
On H
04
H M
04 O
2 GO
§Q
C5
o 2
23 EH
S 5*
O 2
o o
04
EH
J
O
H
Description
0)
c§ o 1o
EH £
OS 4J Li
O -H O
H ~-
01
G
rQ £
Ll 3
OS i— I
05
Li
<1)
4J
IV (U
E S
<0 (0
to 2
o>
04
Oi
3
O
Li
O
*O
Li
(0
O
Ll Ll
O H
*
*
r-
to O
O S
4J
(l)
4J ^1
01 *~H
^1 ^
rn O
the receptor grid i
coordinates. If i
n .
0 m
20
x <*
03
i.S
3 3
0» -a
c m
•H Ll
•H
1-1 0)
(J) f-]
'O 1 '
• •
y
(N
C
^Cj
4J
NYPNTS is greater
T3
C
03
•o
Q)
x:
o
Oi
0)
Li
(0
01
Q)
3
i— I
03
>
.
(U
x:
4J
Q
Li
(0
4-1
01
0)
X!
4-1
01
•H
4J
01
Li
•H
M-i
irogram assumes the
QJ.
0)
r^
4J
O
00
1
rH
r—
O
4-1
•0
Q)
CQ
^3
is the increment
T3
o
u
0)
01
0)
4-1
•o
C
03
01
•H
^
ffj
T3
Li
fTj
U
x:
u
m
0)
Li
0
4-1
01 •
•H O
QJ II
Q
t^
CT> £-»
04
T3 >J
i-i 2
03
U.H
•H
01
•JcJ«
* 8
T3
w (0
-P 4J
C ro
•H
_c
0
0)
Li
01
O
cu
•H
03
0)
O
>i
03
U
Li
<
O
O
rH
fa
00
O
r-H
1
i-H
N
4(
4C
00
01 • 01
•H 1-1 73 -H
x: -H a) x!
H 01 4->
o o
* (p tn 4-*
« 'O C
<1> -H 4J
W T-J 01 -H
. -H
.H 4J 01
t, 3 0) l 4J Oj O
2 C
^ ° c -S
t« i fQ t-j
w °
2 O <"
04 4-1 -C
£ Li
0) 0 II 0
4-1 01 — »
• H ^ 4J
° 1*52 * §*
Li O IH O
0 ^4 0) L.
4-> 0> Ll X! (71
O) 0) -P
0) T3 X> 'O
U Ll 4-> 0) Ll
<]) (TJ ti-| (J) rrj
Ll U CD CO U
rQ
Li
OJ
U
A
U
0 00)
(N OO Q)
1 . . . | Li
O
r-l r-l IH
r-l [— -^
0)
X!
H
•
•O
0)
01
S1
•H
(1)
XI
01
ro
O
(N
e input (ISW(5) =
Cu
(0
4J
u_i (U
.^ Oi
03
'd 2
Oi
T3.S
Ll
0) 0}
u x:
4-)
JJ
3 e
& o
c *••
r^
<0 0)
X! _>^
4J
e
O 01
Ll -H
H
01
T) ^
« 0)
II
QJ
(U
Li a)
03 01
0)
01 x:
3
O to
S 0
0> 1-1
s'S
e
0) Ll
01 O
0) IH
x: c
H -H
,JJ
4C
4-43
-------
V
C/3
w
H
PJ
Jg
J? ^
(2 o
< M
On EH
CU
r . . i
T ~* o- o
<* • S M
«S a°
« 0 a Q
J5* c. *• 5
EH tj iQ,
S H
12 i^
c2 s
8s
0
OS fa
cu
H
J
O
W
I-H
escription
Q
-
0)
S 'O """^
2 O -4-*
H £
OS -P Sj
O -H O
fa "u fa
W "^
VI
g
*O £
U 3
BJ i-H
u o
U
cu
JJ
CU 0)
S £
BJ BJ
t-4 ^
BJ
CU
CU
3
O
0
•o
S-i
BJ
o
CUCUt-lCUC'OCUCU'OEH •
U-P O-P O--H4-IX S-i CU O
CO) 0) 30) BJ tH
tion along the X-axis, or the dista
in polar coordinates, of a discr
is the location along the Y-axis,
in polar coordinates, of a discr
is the elevation units (depending
discrete receptor. Each card sho
the information for 1 discr
f terrain elevations are not to
leave the last entry on each c
card groups are not entered if NXW
put tape is being used and ISW(12) =
(rt (Tj |__j d) c*
f) ^4 N p~* 01 .i-j
On% •— i ' ' v S^ 4-) I*™"* -H |...* 'O • O
4)04 QJ <* H3 DJ -H ^
CO 0) d) >*-* i^,* Q) CQ C v
•H OCDUSCOCBJO
X-M«J-PtiMOUOJ3ll
o
o
fa
ro
o o
o o-i en
,-H 1 1
1 r-H rH
i-H i-H ("4
0)
-P
CU
N ti
» O
>l 0}
- -H
X P
*
nj
CO
s
BJ
V
BJ
•O -P
S-i (Q
BJ £
O ^
O
•So
01
3 n
e i
CU U-J
J-l
T3
•H ^
it i J-)
•H O
0 C .
0) ^ ^^
a o
tQ B) •
CTv O
i— 1
>1 CU fa
BJ 3 vO
S-i O
s-i sj 01
< O -H
<
o
CM
O
00
1
i-H
c^
2J
fa
*
*
cn
CU (H
4-< >i tji O
O JJ BJ
the joint frequency of occurrence <
ed and direction for each stabili
each season expressed as a percent.
tion. See the text for the order
0) U .
Ol CU T3 BJ 01
C 01 C S-i cu
•H (0 IH 3
•T3 *~^
'^ c! £*1 BJ *d
01 « l-l >
'2 o
^i O^ ) >
BJ CO « 3
J-l 0) -U CU
U X BJ U fi
< -P O O -H
g
fa
^^
•o
S-i
BJ
U
* X
« u
O O O BJ
i-H CN1 VD 0)
II ... 1 V.
0
e-l t-t t-H M-l
i-i in ^
*
*
BJ
cu
H
T3 -P
0) 3
01 O'
3 C
0>
COl
^
•H "H
J3 CT>
01 S4
'H 8
ro
O BJ
o
c
II 0
^ H
I -
"- cu
-p 3
CU o
C .^
•""* i — I
CU
CD CU
CU (0
(0
-P • -P
-------
METERS ,
< 2
a o
< M
CU H
CU
H M
•* g «
1 --. CU U
n)
i-i 2
C 0)
rH O 3
0) M rH
« o) m
cu >
en in
1 -H
03 «>
U (V
s-i en ID
f< (0 CO
o
o
rH
fa
v£>
•O
S-I
(0
U
£
u
oo on)
rH CM vfl
rH
*
*
O
rH
OJ TJ -P
C 3
<0 Cu
m C
(0 S--H
v^\
^
„ o ,
en g,M-i
^ cu 0
0) ^J
» S ^
£ ° i t-i
c -u o
•H -H
rH
•»H QJ
UJ J3 £
-P ") -P
f! %
U> W
•H (-1
0) 73 0
£ C M-l
rt)
U T-l -^
o) TJ x
^ S <"
-1"
UJ
0)
DI T3 £
C G -P
•H -H
X S
•H 0)
S MH »
0 w
M-l
O G
O • •
•H G CO
>i -P O 0)
03 U en 3
!-l C (C rH
S-i 3 0) rO
< MH en >
O
O
rH
fa
v£>
*~*
•a
u
m
u
x:
u
o o o m
rH (NJ VD (1)
II . . . | S-i
O
rH rH rH MH
rH in -^
S
*
*
rH
rH
1 MH -P
S-l O X
0) 0)
& G ^
e o
<" -H 0)
-1-1 4J £
O -P
1-1 C
03 §
•H M. CD
*J CD
C -. W
0) t>
o 2
O4 "J J
>1
t.
MH U X
° * rn
Q)
x:
H
f
•o
(!)
CO
3
Cn
G
•rH
0)
XI
tn
r-l
^ -> g " i -
S ?» W M
•H S-I ° 0)
T3 0) 3 '-i
10 O4 >!•-< 0
S-i -p fa
&> c 'H ^ -H -P
10 rH J3 3
U 0) "3 B4
•H v; -^ c
4j en -H
sh*
S-i 03 l-i
^ ?„«
-^^^
MH C ^ °
0 -H g" a,
01 x;
>i 0) -P
0! S-l TD
SJ 3 C S-i
SJ -P -tH O
< (0 S MH
O
o
rH
fa
l£>
•o
U
OJ
U
x:
u
O O O CO
rH C-4 VO Q)
II - . . | U
0
rH rH rH MH
rH in ^-~
N
a
rt
(-M
a
*
*
CM
rH
II
IT)
S
CO
h- 1
-p
3
a
•H
Q)
QJ
03 .
-P a;
O4
M-l 03
•H .p
•^ -y
U 3
CU O4
10 .5
^ n.
t.
-------
g
M
S
*S *5
CK O
Ol
•H
S-l
U
01
(1)
Q
0)
53 'O *""»
2 o i *
2 o 1 Q) t. U
U J3 -0 3 4J
.c -9
O ^j co J] 3
r^ 0)
"O -H .C S tn
3 -S 0 2 ^
^ §5g
« ™ "g x; H •
a§^,^a,S
G 01 3
•H .H T3 n 5 O
4J -H .H > -H
U U jj 4J
to g ^5^ S
^ g 0 W H -H
U U 4-> T3
i U " U
•-5 § S s 2 S
^ ij
•a a> >i 0) b
S 01
XI 4-1
4-1 a
0) 3
'O *"^
o c
Oj -H
4->
5 «
w S
3
O O
I4-| S-l
4-1
0) U
1-
U 3
i-H S-4
0) *H
*O CQ
O 3)
S 'O
O
o
1-1
fo
o
01 S-l 0) C C 01
H fO Oj EH nJ
01
01
01
-H 3
e o
4
-
013+J
o*
U (0
«
§
C
(D
<-* -*-(
8^3
01 01
o e
& m
O1
W
a)
EH
(1)
CO
0)
.Q
n
!-l
O
(Nl
II
in
S
J-l
CU
a>
m
(0
-------
a
*.
p^
2 W
Q °
OS Q
u §
S H
2 rt!
o S
o o
CK fa
CU
H
J
O
01
M
C
O
•H
-P
CU
•H
S-l
U
01
0)
Q
0)
S ° **
EH £
0^ f * t^
O -H O
fa TJ fa
w -^
01
C
TJ g
flj r*H
CJ O
u
t^
Kl
EH
M
^3
rameter
cu
4-1
*,
c
0)
01
PM
Q
£0
• t-l
•-H
3
(0
M-l
•8
(U
£
•^
4-t
M
^
H
«
«
m
rH
4->
0)
01
rH
rH
(0
o
•H
-P
05
§
jj
jj
m
CO
•H
IT)
Oi
^
o
u
•0
(0
o
c
o
.
^J
c
0
*~*
„•-*,
•
4J
c
0
u
S-i CU
Q) .*"!
.C H
-P
m
d) ,
5 TJ
0)
O 3
01
airport
was mea
-P TJ
<0 0)
0)
"c «
3
O TJ
S-i C
Oi -H
(1)
> ^«
£_J
w
Q
.
01
QL>
01
CO
CU
U
0
CU
chemical
S
i-H
OJ •
U >i
"H (0
co a
>1 0)
£! TJ
01
O
>i q
t-i
rH O
m
> o
i
a
•H
TJ
0)
g£
CU
r;
JJ
01
c
•H
C
•H
(0
-P
0
0
^•1
2
!~i
<
o
0
rH
fa
O
rH
1
rH
p/
J2
PQ
D
*
^
rH
01 CU
CU Si
3 -P
r-H
m u
> o
-p
3 cu w
m w 5
<4-4 \ "-1
13 6 &
£ i^3 ">
C-< rH o
TJ TJ
• C a)
^ (0 CU
0 . M*
«^TJ
03 C
U v 'S
CU 00
CU . >,
\O in
01 g
CU CO S
"ai i - TJ
s-i in tj
O • m
0) fi
-P 0) (0
ro U -t-i
U (0 01
o o
CN ^O
| ... |
i-H rH
rH in
0)
£
H
B
TJ
CU
01
3
C
•rl
CU
JQ
01
•H
M
O
CM
II
^^
in
•g
w
M
-P
CU
a
• iH
CU
CU
nj .
4J 0)
CU
MH (0
•H .p
"U "3
CU CU
TJ C
"2 *
u -1-1
g
o
f£
•H c
0)
1 1 JJ
£ 01
O -H
l-i
4-1 01
TJ CU
CU 4J
4J CU
.t; «
g ^
O nj
CU
£ *
m M
10 Q)
CO [p
CU
3 j_|
0 Q
'I l
* C
(0 jj
U (0
e
cu t-<
01 o
CU <4H
x; c
H -H
«
4-47
-------
%
w
B
EH
5;
Jtf S
oe o
< M
fit ^H
p^
3«
' "* s U
SS °°
« 5 2 s
r j C_) rt«
S H
S ^
O S
O O
06 fa
Cu
H
J
U
C/3
O
•H
4-1
Cu
•rl
!-i
U
01
CU
Q
CU
c2 u 1o
CkC 4-1 S4
O -H O
pT| *^J pf)
&3 ^^
01
c
•O E
(0 rH
0)
4-1
(1) 0)
E E
n) n)
a>
CU
3
O
U
a
01 c *O 0£ cu *O in
CD -H C O »-l fH •
0) (0 H «J (0 P~
s-i T) O "O ro
O^ (U 'O IW C CO
^) W Q) ^^ fO
*O 3 Q) «ii ^^
Qj 5 W ^
tion sector angles in
irst direction category
>f occurrence of wind s;
zero degrees north) .
, if the first two va]
s defaulted to the
.0, 22.5, 45.0, ...
U <4H u ,. -a -H 0
cu ,. >i £
^ -. ;>* r-H *j;
rrl "^ C M ^01
4-1 rt) 2 rrt ^ CO
T3 X 01 o S ^ 0*
g JJ Q) r« j^ "3 C
• H ""* U >^ *0
O^ 1^ * d '*^ C
•S .5 .S .2 m 5 .2 »
C O 4-1 01 4-1 CU
>i C -n O NTJT)
o
o
03
^*,
T)
S-i
n)
o
u
O o O rO
i-H (N 00 CU
II . . . 1 u
o
rH rH rH
Cu
01 >O S-l
C 0
•o'S1"
c* •*
•S 4J
2 *n ^
o cu
4J
° o 2 •
• rl "^ (/J
^1 -|J —
C
•H
01
. source
I— 1
rH
(0
1
C
M
cu
•9
G
C
O
ntif icati
cu
•o
•H
CU
O
§
OQ
in
M
in
i
rH
_
|
*
p-*
i-H
4H
M
number.
dentif ication
•H
CU
X
4-1
<4-l
O
CU
t3
O
Cn
C
•H
*o
c
cu
u
01
(0
.
•o
0)
4-1
termina
01
•H
I
c
•H
CU
u
o
01
cu
•H
1 i
4-*
m
en
cu
01
•H
CO
c
0)
4-)
CU
_jj
efaults
the program d
zero
01
•H
S-l
0)
J3
C
01
•H
XI
4-1
<4H
M
CU
U
3
0
01
0)
X
is source in
X!
MH
O
position
0)
•H
4-)
(0
rH
0)
S-l
•a
cu
4_)
j i
•H
§
0)
-o
f-
i-H
f
O
x;
1—1
01
Cu
O
a
fO
0
o
cu
4J
3
Cu
•H
.
0
cu
01
rH
CP
CU
O
VI
'-W
o
(D
S-i 0)
Cn 01
O
4-1 01
S-i
CU
XI
E
cu
0)
a
fO
S-l
cu
X
cu
c?
4-1
0)
X
H
•d
cu
01
H1
•H
0)
J3
01
• H
rn
S-i
o
CN
II
: (ISW(5)
-l->
3
G
•H
CU
Cu
(TJ
4->
M-l
•iH
u
CU
T)
f.
(T)
U
-J-)
Cu
G
•H
CU
X
4-1
S-l
14H
•o
0)
4J
4-1
•H
£
0
cu
m
01
Cu
3
O
S-i
T3
S-l
(0
U
0)
0)
0)
X
H
f
cu
fO
4J
3
Cu
C
•H
CU
X
"^
S
o
U_l
C
CO
fc<<
fO
4-1
01
•H
01
CU
4-1
CU
m
i_t
<0
cu
01
cu
X
4-1
.
o
G
O
-H
4-1
a)
E
u
O
<4H
C
•H
4-48
-------
W G
V
CO
05
w
H
W
2 2
OS O
< M
CU EH
CU
EH M
CU O
M W
o
Q
||
S H
2 itf
CH A
O CC
O O
Ctf fri
CU
H
J
M
0
•H
-P
0,
TJ
CJ
to
CU
Q
a)
3 O 4-J
c2 o ftj
EH £
05 4-1 U
O "H O
Cn T3 frl
W ^
01
a
•0 I
(0 i— i
o o
u
S-I
0)
0) CU
£ £
n) ro
m
CU
CU
o
o
T3
CU CU ^*"* 4-* A_J C
U £ *"*• Cl 3 (ft 0
3 to i — i *H G i-j (0
O 4J -H CU
W rj W -H CU W
5 -H 01 3
M • '* "O CU G S j-
0 ? aj cu -H o, J
CU "O W .^
S " cu 1 - ^
a,^ggg^u° S
ij ^ Oi "^ ro c* *~^ ^>
Q " fO S-4 SB^* *^ *
gM^Sg"»«M -? g
w o *" Q 2 § 'Jj 'E
4JtnCi-|l4-|4J^ (flQ)
3 (0 'H CU 01 .H
O-i r^ _^ QJ •«•••* tj
C CUgr-HWCUT) CU (00)
O -HCUCU3!-ii-H CJ3(0 !-i
4JCU14-40)QCU1 E
T3 (J 4-1 S-l 0) lJ
O O O
CU CU CU
u X u X u X
3 flj 3 ftJ 3 rc3
O i-H O r- 1 O i— 1
C/3 ^3 00 £> W £t
•H rH rH
M MM
\Q [**. QQ
CU WO
C/3 CU J
M tx fa
P HO
^
jj
c
o
r- U
rH v
4-1 CU CU
•H W 01
m -a T> g
01 .H -H W
S s n)
x: *"
•1 .tj !§ •§
W 01 *
-H fO ^0 f^
b? (1) C Q) G o
rH W C 01 G 01 .H
c 'c
-------
CO
H
w
2?
|2 £3
CK O
i< M
04 H
O,
p«
1 Pj £_)
s§ §„
H ^" ° S
S EH
2 itf
o S
0 0
OS fa
0,
EH
J
0
CO
M
§
•H
4->
a
tj
u
01
0)
Q
0)
S t3 *•*
< O 4J
ce o
O) (1)
€ €
(0 n)
u 2
(0
O.
3
O
(-1
O
m
u
* -o
CO C
U (0
0)
4J „
<" X
C -H U
4J 3 flj
C u
•H U O
•O o ^
o ^ u
O . 0)
U 0) C
X £ 0
0) °
C U -M
m 01
•H 0) O)
01 u S
0) U £
4J 3 4J
U 0 3
(0 01 O
O ^ 01
o
0
1— 1
fa
OO
i-H
1
(^
X
Q
s -O 0) 1 1 tl
oic .C cocaco-HOi
tj (t 4-> CQUU4-I4-I
O) 01 O d) 0) 1-4 Q)
4-> ,„ U,, fcl 4J 4Ja)£
0)"1
S^ 4J(0 C -Hg g G
U Q) -HO) 0) -H
^ ^ g i— 4. *C C f G G iG
C5 0) H g G > -H U -H -H O
... % I4JO3OI4JO4-1
Si! C 1(0 X3HI-H 3
Hu o^ UC-HS ucxi
2(0 -H (0 0)0) OU O CUO O"H
?4J CO *U O404lg4J01 K 0) 4J 4-) C
W-^-H 4-)0) (0-H f04->> (001(0
T-i 01 g fi 4J -H "O S-l O) 4-1 > T3 J3
^JgO JJ, U4-)CO)0) (0 U-H 0)
4J3J2 6 3X> !-i 0) 30) O fOO4JO) 0)
•H i-i O U U 4J 0) II -H 01 Ol II -H
•o o ^ o> ?i OICOTJ ?oi m
u<^ -^.-OO T5IIO
O U 0) S • C II >< II G N01
O.Q)*GGGcu O 0)JO'*~*
O~C4J OftCOM O&WMJ3
I*U C-H aiHCO X 0)>CO4J
tM-yoOW
4-50
-------
w a
c
0
•H
4J
&
•H
U
u
01
o>
Q
1
w
i? 2
ce o
< M
Qj
H M
CU O
3j
2 itf ££ T3 **"*
o2 s <*2 o i *
rn £2 m r) nj
o o HS
cu o -H o
fa 13 fa
H W •"
J
O
W
M
01
•0 I
u 3
O *0
O
0)
-p
0) 0)
IH 2
&
Ot
3
o
O
•o
T) M 0) 4-1
0) U XI O
fcj 0) 4->
0) -P c
I"TJ Q) Q £? QJ
•H S XJ Zj O
w Tj SH
C-^ ^
C i * (rt ^
w -d 5
1 o-S§-2
ss.**^*
jj "» o C 0) i+I| 14-1
, OT s §i g 5 01 5
u tj o o ^ -i-1
^^W^'3^^H
o uj w -0 .2 ^
M i!l! 'H 4-1 TD
01 Xl -P <" H >1
•H H H
f\
H
O
t"^
fa
O
r~
I
to -H
O 4-1 0) 4-1 4J ti 01
01 4-1 -H O C 0) -H T3
0) j2 a) T3 .C •— i
0) -P XI U "H -P O
XI 0) .p tO 01 -H
4-i J< S-i T3 -n G SJ 4-1
(0 O -H "O O O
C j£ 4H |£ (0 O 4H 01
O ^ -H
MOO •>->
T3
C II XS
0) (N
Qj 3 S
0) PQ P3 !H
T3 O
T3 O r-t
0) II II
iw W W
Cu CU
01 >l >H
•H H H
X
EH
O
f«^
fa
^
r-
I
(—1
«
rH
4-51
-------
w c
J O
OQ O
V
^0
Oi
[j|
H
Jg
J3 2
CM O
(< 1— 1
Q,, £-t
Du
SS
a, o
§1
J3! ftf
p3 is
8 s
(V CL,
04
H
M
cription
01
2 o
program uses the equation
eral virtual distance (Equa
(U 4->
j^ n]
^J r~H
Li . ^H
Q) C rd
CU O Li
CU-H 0)
31) that will produce the u
nd of concentration or deposit
WAKE is 1, the equation of lat
1 3
^^ Q hH
4J (1)
*G i '
4->
tual distance (Equation (2-33))
1 produce the lower bound of
Ll '-(
• H *H
^ S
fi
•H
4-1
centration or deposition calcula
used (see Section 2.4.1.1.d)
, this field is left blank
C CM
O 'H f-1
o
i-H
II
w
pj
"»
H
Q) S-i ^*i
£ O Ll
4J -O
rticulate size categories in
listribution for deposition
width depletion due to
fo
04
C
o
IH " 'H
° ro n3
,-H Ll
3 4->
Ll U C
0) -H
01
•H
Li
e maximum value of this paramete:
Cj
E~<
•
fj
o
•H
4-1
•H
0}
O
CU •
Q) O
'O r>j
T) -a
C Ll
O fd II
u u
ing velocities in meters per se
iculate size category. This
d from the input data deck if NVS
,-H 4-> 0)
4J Ll 4J
1 1 rO 4-*
0
O
rH
b
OO
o o
i-H (M
1 1
i-H i-H
i-H
w
>
m
t"^
i-t
(0
u
U
O 0}
00
-------
<*•
S
00
«
w
i§
< M
a. H
&
H M
D a
cu a
2 OQ
M W
a
§1
Vrf* r5**
2
a
0)
53 *O ^"*
« O -P
CE O <0
H g
a -P ti
O -H O
fa -0 CM
w >-
CO
•a §
IH 3
fO r-H
°3
u
(1)
1 1
(1) a)
2 s?
S
Cu
3
O
t-l
0
•a
ti
(0
o
(U 0) <4-l £
-P x: o o
m -u u
3 oV^
u "^ a. .
o o -a °
O> x! i ,,
S ?! « « "
2m " w
• H tO - J"
JJ O >i >
u nj w S
2 -g & 3 ««
i^ u m H -H
"2 •«
M !_, '? •— <1>
m o £ c 'O
m ;2 ^ o
g ^ -H (0
C -P 4J
C .H 3 (0
0 XI -0
UH -H -H
O JJ W !J 4J
3 C JJ 3
X) O 01 CU
•H -H -rH C
>, !j -P >O -H
(0 -P U
u 01 m o) at
S-i -H fci X! X!
< -a m 4-> -P
o
o
rH
fa
00
^**
•o
U
m
u
x:
u
o o o m
rH i g
SS 0<4H °
£ o» o
C. CD 01
«ss'H
t1u^^
« a) > o
'll M *H
" -H „. 0>
£ « *
M-4 -a
a) a) •; s-i
O 4J g fO
" S ° " °
o 3 » » "
H^i
3iB.S
<" r. 0 C
^ -g § .2 *
ni (0 4J U
S <" 05 0 ®
y 2 a, "Q
to ip^ ^^
(i i r-H
tJ ^ C] m
h o o ou -P
S ^ u <°
01 -O
U_l
«H "~ O « <"
O rH w jj JH
0) -P
>1 0 0) rH
aj S 3 Cu g
lj -^ rH £ O
u m O s-i
< o > u MH
o
o
r-H
fa
00
^^
•a
u
(0
u
X!
U
O O O 03
rH M 00 0)
II • • 1 U
O
rH rH rH M-l
rH t~- ^-
§
0
u
r-
r-H
>1 >i W g W
XI 4-1 X) -H O rH
O !H fl
T3 t) jj ^ 2,
5 o c §,-0 «
« 5 -H & «
u § g •" tj J^
•H 2 ._»
rrt G "°y
C^ S^ ^^
•H m 0.5-0 g
st^ •§ So.
•a?S(0.|S
.S * » M H tj
g w •* "H
"g^lj"
Q) ^ - P X <"
u 3 S A eu 'O
lj ,. U 4J
3 M •'-'to
O , JJ T3 n, -P
S <" a £ 2 , CU 0) C .H
to 3 C3 a>
!H 0) rH J > O)
!j X! OJ fa -H X!
< -P > O« O< -P
O
O
r-H
fa
<^>
•0
u
<0
U
X!
O
O O O 10
rH (N v£> 0)
II . . | U
O
rH rH rH <4H
rH IP -~*
CX
T3
r-
rH
4-53
-------
deck are: ISW(4), ISW(5), ISW(12), and ISW(18). If ISW(4) is left blank or
punched zero, Card Groups 8 and 8a are omitted from the input data deck. If
ISW{5) is equal to "2" or "3" (indicating an input data tape), Card Groups 5,
6, 7, 8, and 9 through 16 are omitted from the input data deck. Also, Card
Groups 6a, 7a, and 8a are omitted if the ISW{12) option is not used or equals
blank or zero. If ISW(18) is left blank or punched zero, Card Group 9 is
omitted from the input card deck. The ISW(IO) option on this card must be set
to "1" or "2" if either the ISW(ll) or ISW(12) option is chosen. Note the
conditions on ISW(ll) given in Section 4.1.2. Also, the option ISW(9) must
always be set correctly when card input sources are used or if tape sources
are used when ISW(12) equals "1."
Card Group 3 contains the parameters that specify the number of input
sources, size of receptor arrays and the number of categories in the input
meteorological data. These parameters are regarded as options because, if any
are zero, a particular function is not performed. All of the parameters on
this record except NOFILE may alter the form of the input deck because they
specify how many data items to input to the program. The parameter NSOURC
specifies how many times the program is to read Card Groups 17 through 17d.
If NSOURC is set to a negative value ("-1"), the program will continue to read
source data from Card Groups 17 through 17d until a negative source ID-number
(NUMS) is read from Card Group 17. If NSOURC is zero. Card Groups 17 through
17d are omitted from the input data deck. The parameter NGROUP is used to
group selected sources into a combined output by summing the concentration or
deposition arrays of the selected sources. The user may specify up to a
maximum of 20 different source combinations. If NGROUP is left blank or
punched zero, the program uses all sources in any combined source output,
prints all sources for any individual source output, and Card Groups 4 and 4a
are omitted from the input card deck. If NGROUP is greater than zero, it
4-54
-------
specifies how many values are to be read from Card Groups 4 and 4a. Also
NGROUP cannot be set to a non-zero value unless one or more of the specified
conditions in Section 4.1.2 are met.
Card Groups 4 and 4a always occur together and are included in the input
card deck only if NGROUP is greater than zero. Card Group 4 is the array
NOCOMB used to specify the number of source ID-numbers used to define each
source combination. Each value in NOCOMB specifies the number of source
ID-numbers to be read from Card Group 4a (IDSORC) in consecutive order for
each source combination. A positive source ID-number punched into the array
IDSORC indicates to include that source in the combination. A negative source
ID-number indicates to include that source as well as all source ID-numbers
less in absolute value, up to and including the previous positive source
ID-number punched if it is part of the same set of ID-numbers defining a
combination. If the negative value is the first ID-number of a group of
ID-numbers, it as well as all sources less in absolute values of ID-number are
included in the source combination. See the example given under NOCOMB and
IDSORC in Section 4.1.2 and the example problems in Appendix D.
Card Group 5 is an array (UNITS) used to specify the labels printed for
concentration or deposition output units and for the input source strength
units. This card group is omitted from the input card deck if tape or data
file input is used.
Card Groups 6 through 8a specify the X, Y and Z coordinates of all
receptor points. Card Groups 6, 7 and 8 are omitted from the input card deck
if the parameters NXPNTS and NYPNTS equal zero or if an input tape is being
used. Also, Card Group 8 is omitted if ISW(4) equals "0" (no terrain
elevations are being used.) Card Groups 6a, 7a and 8a are also omitted from
the input card deck if the parameter NXWYPT is zero or if an input tape is
being used with ISW(12) equal to "0." Each of these card groups uses a 10
4-55
-------
column field. The number of data cards required for each card group is
defined by the values of the parameters NXPNTS, NYPNTS and NXWYPT. Values
input on Card Groups 6 and 7 are always in ascending order (west to east,
south to north, 0 to 360 degrees). The terrain elevations for the grid system
on Card Group 8 begin in the southwest corner of the grid system or at 0
degrees for polar coordinates. The first data card(s) contain the elevations
for each receptor on the X axis (1 to NXPNTS) for the first Y receptor
coordinate. A new data card is started for the elevations for each successive
Y receptor coordinate. A total of NYPNTS groups of data cards containing
NXPNTS values each is required for Card Group 8. See the discussion given for
parameter Z in Section 4.1.2.b for examples of the order of input for receptor
elevations in Cartesian and polar systems.
Card Groups 9 through 16 specify the meteorological data and model
constants and are included in the input data deck only if an input tape or
data file is not being used. Card Group 9 is input only if ISW{18) equals "1"
and specifies the format (FMT) which the program uses to read the card data in
Card Group 9a. If Card Group 9 is omitted from the input deck (ISW(18) equals
"0"), the program assumes the format is (6F10.0) or there are 6 values per
card occupying 10 columns each including the decimal point (period). Card
Group 9a is the set of data cards giving the joint frequency of occurrence of
the wind speed and wind direction (FREQ) by season and Pasquill stability
category. The values for each wind speed category (1 to NSPEED) are punched
across the card and are read using the format given in Card Group 9 or the
default format used when Card Group 9 is omitted. The first card is for
direction category 1 (normally north), the second card for direction category
2 (normally north-northeast), down to the last direction category (normally
north-northwest). Starting with season 1 (normally winter), the card group
contains a set of these (NSCTOR) cards for each stability category, 1 through
4-56
-------
NSTBLE. The program requires NSCTOR«NSTBLE«NSEASN data cards in this card
group. This data deck is normally produced by the STAR program of the
National Climatic Data Center (NCDC).
Card Group 10 is the average ambient air temperature (TA). NSTBLE values
are read from each data card in this group, and there is one data card for
each season, 1 through NSEASN. Card Group 11 is the median mixing layer
height (HM) for each speed and stability category and season. The program
requires MSPEED values per data card and one data card for each stability
category, 1 to NSTBLE. A group of these cards is required for each season (1
to NSEASN) for a total of NSTBLE«NSEASN data cards in Card Group 11. Card
Group 12 is the vertical gradient of potential temperature (DPDZ) for each
wind speed and stability category. NSPEED values are punched across the card
and NSTBLE cards (1 to NSTBLE} are punched for this group. Card Group 13
contains meteorological and model constants; a detailed description of these
parameters (ROTATE, TK, ZR, G and DECAY) is given in Section 4.1.2 above.
Card Group 14 is the median wind speed for each wind speed category (UBAR) and
there are NSPEED values read from this card group. Card Group 15 is the
median wind direction for each wind direction category (THETA). There are 8
values read from each data card in this group up to a maximum of NSCTOR
(normally 16) values. Card Group 16, the last of the meteorological input
card groups, provides the wind speed power law exponents (P) for each wind
speed and stability category. There are NSPEED values read per data card and
NSTBLE {1 to NSTBLE) cards read in this group.
The last card groups in the input data deck, Card Groups 17 through 17d,
consist of source related information. Card Groups 17 through 17d are always
input as a set of cards for each individual source and each of these sets (17
through 17d are input in ascending order of the source ID-number (MUMS). Card
Group 17 provides the source ID-number (MUMS), the source type (TYPE), the
4-57
-------
source disposition (DISP), etc. This data card is included in the input card
deck for each card input source, I to NSOURC. As shown in Table 4-4, some of
the card columns (43 through 78) on this card may or may not contain parameter
values, depending on the source type. The last parameter (NVS) on this card
determines whether Card Groups 17a through 17c are read or not. These card
groups are not included in the input deck if NVS equals zero. The last card
group, Card Group 17d, contains the source emissions (Q). This card group is
not included in the input data deck if the parameter DISP on Card Group 17
equals "1." The number of cards and values in this card group depends on the
parameter QFLG on Card Group 17. If QFLG equals blank or zero, the source
emissions are a function of season only and one data card is read with NSEASM
values punched across it. If QFLG is equal to "1," the program assumes the
source emissions are a function of stability category and season. In this
case, NSEASM data cards (1 through NSEASN) are required with NSTBLE values per
card. If QFLG is equal to "2," the program assumes the source emissions are a
function of wind speed and season. There are NSEASN data cards read with
NSPEED values per card. If QFLG is equal to "3," the program assumes the
source emissions are a function of wind speed, stability and season. In this
last case, the program reads NSTBLE data cards containing NSPEED values for
each season (1 to NSEASN) for a total of NSTBLE*NSEASN data cards. The
program continues to read sets of data Card Groups 17 through 17d until a
negative source ID-number is encountered or until it has read these cards
NSOURC times.
b. Disc or Tape File Input Requirements. The ISCLT program can accept a
source inventory file previously created by the ISCLT program. This is a
binary file written using the FORTRAN I/O routines and created on a previous
run of the ISCLT program. This file contains all of the program options that
affect how the model concentration or deposition calculations were performed
4-58
-------
(except ISW(9)), all of the receptor and elevation data, all of the
meteorological data, all of the source input data and the results of the
seasonal (annual) concentration or deposition calculations at each receptor
point. The program reads the data from the FORTRAN logical unit number
specified by ISW(14). The tape data are read only if option ISW(5) equals "2"
or "3." The input file requires the user to omit specified data card groups
from the input deck and makes the input of some parameter values unnecessary.
The omitted Card Groups and unnecessary parameters are indicated by a * or **
in the Card Group and Parameter Name columns of Table 4-4. The format and
exact contents of the input file are discussed in Section 4.2.4.b below.
4.2.4 Program Output Data Description
The ISCLT program generates several categories of printed output and an
optional output source/concentration or deposition inventory tape (or data
file). The following paragraphs describe the format and content of both forms
of program output.
a. Printed Output. The ISCLT program generates 11 categories of printed
output, 8 of which are tables of average ground-level concentration or total
ground-level deposition. All program printed output is optional except
warning and error messages. The printed output categories are:
• Input Source Data
• Input Data other than Source Data
• Seasonal Concentration (Deposition) from Individual Sources
• Seasonal Concentration (Deposition) from Combined Sources
• Annual Concentration (Deposition) from Individual Sources
• Annual Concentration (Deposition) from Combined Sources
• Seasonal Maximum 10 Concentration (Deposition) Values from
Individual Sources
4-59
-------
• Seasonal Maximum 10 Concentration (Deposition) Values from
Combined Sources
• Annual Maximum 10 Concentration (Deposition) Values from
Individual Sources
• Annual Maximum 10 Concentration (Deposition) Values from
Combined Sources
• Warning and Error Messages
The first line of each page of output contains the run title (TITLE) and the
page number followed by the major heading of the type or category of output
table.
The example output shown in Appendix D is generated from the example given
in Section 2.6. The tables are defined by their respective headings and are
all optional, depending on the parameters ISW(7), ISW(8), ISW(IO), and ISW(ll)
or ISW(12). Also, the ISCLT program has an option (ISW(16)) of compressing
the output tables by minimizing the number of new pages started by new
tables. This option will save on the paper output, but the user should become
familiar with the program output format before using it. Also, the program
has the option (ISW(17)) of specifying the number of lines the printer prints
per page. This value must be correct in order for the program to maintain a
correct output format. The program defaults to 57 lines per printed page. If
the printer at your installation is different, input the correct value into
ISW(17) on Card Group 2. The warning and error messages produced by the
program are generated by data errors within the ISCLT program and are not
associated with errors detected by the computer system on which the program is
being run. These errors are given in Section 4.2.6 below.
b. Master File Inventory Output. The ISCLT program will, on option,
generate an output master source/concentration or deposition inventory file.
This file is written only if the parameter ISW(5) eguals "1" or "3" and the
data are written in binary to the FORTRAN logical unit specified by ISW(15).
4-60
-------
The format and contents of the ISCLT input/output tape are shown in Table
4-5. This table gives the Logical Record, Word Number, Parameter Name and
whether the data are in an integer or floating point (real) format. The
logical record gives the order the respective data records are written to
tape. Some of the logical records shown in Table 4-5 may or may not be
present on the tape, depending on the options ISW(4) and WSEASN. Logical
record 4 is not on the tape if the parameter ISW(4) is zero. Also, records 7
through 10 are concentration or deposition records and depend on the number of
seasons, NSEASN. If the user is using annual data, only record 7 out of
records 7 through 10 will be on the tape. Records 6 through 10 are written to
the tape for each source input to the program. The last record written for a
program run has an integer 999999 in word 1 (NUMS) of the record and two end
of file marks (magnetic tape only) are written after this record.
4.2.5 Page and Tape Output Estimates
This section gives approximations to the tape output and page output for
the ISCLT program. Because of the variability of problem runs and input
parameters, the equations in this section are meant only to give an
approximation of the upper limit of the page or tape usage function.
a. Page Output. The total number of pages of output from the ISCLT
program depends on the problem being run and is given by:
Pages - A + B + C (4-4)
where*
A = 0 ; if the program input data is not printed
or
16 ; if input data other than source data is printed
(ISW(6) = "1")
*The [] symbols indicate to round up to the next largest integer if there
is any fractional part.
4-61
-------
TABLE 4-5
INPUT/OUTPUT TAPE FORMAT
Tape
Logical
Record
1
Relative
Word
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9-32
33 - 52
53 - 72
Parameter
Name
NSOURC
NXPNTS
NYPNTS
NXWYPT
NSEASN
NSPEED
NSTBLE
NSCTOR
ISW
UNITS
TITLE
Integer (I)/
Floating Point (FP)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2 1 - NXPNTS+NXWYPT X
3 1 - NYPNTS+NXWYPT Y
4* 1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS Z
+NXWYPT
FP
FP
FP
5 1 - 2304
2305 - 2328
2329 - 2472
2473 - 2508
2509 - 2514
2515 - 2550
2551 - 2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
FREQ
TA
HM
DPDZ
UBAR
P
THETA
ROTATE
G
ZR
DECAY
TK
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
*Tape logical record 4 is on the tape only if the parameter ISW(4) is non-zero.
4-62
-------
TABLE 4-5
(Cont.)
INPUT /OUTPUT TAPE
Tape
Logical
Record
6**
7**
8**
g**
10**
last
Relative
Word
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 - 33
34 - 53
54 - 73
74 - 217
218
219
1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS
+NXWYPT
1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS
+NXWYPT
1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS
+NXWYPT
1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS
+NXWYPT
1
Parameter
Name
MUMS
TYPE
DX
DY
H
ZS
TS
VEL
D
HE
BW
BL
NVS
vs
FRQ
GAMMA
Q
QFLG
WAKE
CON
CON
CON
CON
999999
FORMAT
Integer (I)/
Floating Point (FP)
I
I
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
I
FP
FP
FP
FP
I
I
FP
FP
FP
FP
I
**Records 6 through 10 are repeated for each source input to the program and 8
through 10 are omitted if the input data is annual.
4-63
-------
or
Ns ; if source data only is printed (ISW{6) = "2")
or
16 + Ns; if all input data is printed (ISW(6) =
"3") and (ISW(4) = "0"), no terrain data
or
16 + Ns + [N»/9] [Ny/(Na - 19)] [Nxy/(3 (Na - 11))] if
all input data is printed (ISW(6) = "3") and
(ISW(4) = "1" or "-1") terrain data are used
N, = total number of sources input to the program. However,
if concentration or deposition from individual sources
is not being printed (ISW(8) = "2") use Ns = [Ns/4]
Na = Number of print lines per page (ISW(17)), default is
57.
B = I (Nl + Nc) (Nx/9) (Ny + ll)/Na + Nxy/(3 (Na - 11)) + K (4-5)
I = number of seasons for which concentration or deposition
is to be printed. If seasonal output only, then I =
NSEASN; if annual output only, then 1 = 1; if both
seasonal and annual output, then I = NSEASN+1.
Nx = total number of individual source concentration or
deposition tables being printed. If ISW(8) equals "2",
then N! is set to zero. If ISW(8) equals "1" or "3",
then N! is the total number of source ID-numbers
defined under the parameter IDSORC. This includes both
implied and explicitly punched source ID-numbers in
IDSORC. Count each source ID-number only once. If the
parameter NGROUP is "0" and the array IDSORC is not
input, then N! is the total number of card plus tape
input sources. Also, if maximum 10 calculations are
being made via ISW(ll) or ISW(12), add Nl pages to the
total pages in Equation (4-5) above for the individual
source contributions to the combined maximum 10.
Nc = total number of combined source concentration or
deposition tables being printed (NGROUP). Do not count
single sources if they are already counted in Ni .
Nx = NXPNTS
Ny = NYPNTS
Nxy= NXWYPT
0; if maximum 10 values are not printed (ISW(IO) = 0)
K = or
1; if maximum 10 values are printed (ISW(IO) > 0)
C - the number of pages expected from the system plus other
processing within the job
4-64
-------
The above equations may not cover every option in the ISCLT program and,
if the system the user is using aborts runs that max-page, be generous with
the page approximation.
b. Tape Output. The total amount of tape used by a problem run depends on
the type of computer, the installation standard block length for unformatted
FORTRAN records, the number of tape recording tracks, the tape recording
density and the options and data input to the problem run. This section
provides the user with the total number of computer words output to tape or
data file and an approximation to the tape length used in feet.
The total number of computer words output to tape is given by
Words = (I + 2647 + Nx + Ny + 2Nxy
(4-6)
+ Ns {220 + Nse(Nx«My + Nxy+l)))
where
0 ; if option ISW(4) = 0
I = or
Nx«Ny + NXy+l; if option ISW(4) = 1 or -1
Ns = the total number of card and/or tape input sources
Nse= the number of seasons, NSEASN
Nx = NXPNTS
Ny = NYPNTS
Nxy= NXWYPT
Add 28 to the total number of words written for UNIVAC 1100 series
computers.
The user can approximate the length of tape required by
Length (feet) = [( Words • B)/(By • D) + .75 Words/Ba + 6.0]/12.0 (4-7)
4-65
-------
where
B = the number of bits per computer word. IBM 360, etc. is
32, UNIVAC 1100 series is 36 and CDC 6000 series is 60.
D = the tape recording density chosen by the user or
required by the I/O device, 200, 556, 800 or 1600 bpi.
B4 = the number of words per physical tape block for
unformatted FORTRAN records on the user's computer
system. Use 224 for UNIVAC 1100 series computers.
By = "6" for 7 track tape or "8" for 9 track tape
The values 0.75 and 6.0 inches are used assuming the interrecord gap is
0.75 and the end-of-file is 6 inches.
4.2.6 Program Diagnostic Messages
The diagnostic messages produced by the ISCLT program are associated only
with data and processing errors within the program and should not be confused
with those produced by the computer system on which the ISCLT program is run.
All messages begin with either the word ERROR or the word WARNING. All ERROR
messages terminate the execution of the program and WARNING messages allow the
program to continue. However, WARNING messages could indicate data errors and
should be examined thoroughly when they occur. A list of the messages are
given in Table 4-6 with the probable cause of the respective message.
4.2.7 Program Modifications for Computers other than UNIVAC 1100 Series
Computers
The ISCLT program is written in the FORTRAN language and uses the FORTRAN
features compatible with standard ANSI FORTRAN. The program can be
implemented on most computers that meet the following requirements:
• Must have the equivalent of 75,000 UNIVAC 1110 words of executable
core storage
• Must use 32 or more bits per computer word
4-66
-------
• Must use 4 or more characters (bytes) per computer word
• Must allow object time dimensioning (FORTRAN)
• Must have a 132 column line printer
The program also assumes the input card device is logical unit 5, the
output printer is logical unit 6, the input tape unit is logical unit 2 and
the output tape unit is logical unit 3. However, all but unit 5 can be
overridden with an alternate unit number by input option. If the user must
change unit 5 to an alternate number for the card input device, the variable
IUNT in the main program must be changed. This variable appears after the
input comments section in the FORTRAN listing of the main program.
The user may also adjust the computer core required by the program by
reducing or increasing the dimension (size) of BLANK COMMON in the program.
This is the first statement in the main program and, if changed, the user must
also change the value of the variable IEND in the main program. The variable
IEND appears after the input comments section in the main program. Also, the
user must change the value of E in Equations (4-1), (4-2) and (4-3) in the
body of this text. Program capabilities can be limited if the size of BLANK
COMMON is reduced.
It is not possible to give all changes required to implement this program
on all computers. However, changes necessary to implement this program on IBM
and CDC medium to large scale computers are given below:
Changes required for use on IBM 360 or above computers:
• Change the call ACOS to ARCOS in subroutine DISTR
Changes required for use on CDC 6000 or above series computers:
• Add the following line on the first line of the main program
PROGRAM ISCLT (INPUT, OUTPUT, TAPEnn, TAPEmm)
4-67
-------
TABLE 4-6
ISCLT WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES
1. ERROR - MAX STORAGE = n, USER REQUESTED m REDUCE NO. OF CALC. POINTS. The
program execution is terminated because the run required n locations of
BLANK COMMON and only m are available. See Equation (4-1) in Section
4.1.2 for the core usage equation. See, also, Equations (4-2) and (4-3)
that may place additional restrictions on the user.
2. ERROR - NUMBER OF SETTLING VELOCITIES FOR SOURCE n IS ZERO. Deposition is
being calculated and the parameter NVS on Card Group 17 is zero for source
n. Set NVS to the number of settling velocity categories and rerun.
3. WARNING - FREQ. OF OCCURRENCE OF SPD VS. DIR IS NOT 1.0 FOR SEASON n, PROG
DIVIDES BY xxx.x TO NORMALIZE. The sum over all categories of the joint
frequency of occurrence of wind speed and wind direction for season n is
not exactly 1.0 and the program normalizes the frequency distribution by
the factor xxx.x; execution continues.
4. WARNING - DISTANCE BETWEEN SOURCE n and POINT X, Y = xx.x, yy.y IS LESS
THAN PERMITTED. This is a warning message to inform the user that the
program attempted to calculate concentration or deposition at the point
xx.x, yy.y for source n, but the distance is less than the model allow and
no calculations were made, but execution continues. The user should
ignore calculations at xx.x, yy.y for source n or any source combination
including source n.
5. ERROR - DISP CANNOT EQUAL 2 WHEN QFLG IS GREATER THAN 0, OFFENDING SOURCE
= n, PROG. TERMINATED. An attempt was made to rescale concentrations that
do not vary only by season. The program saves only seasonal concentration
on tape and cannot rescale with source strengths that vary by wind speed
and/or stability. Input all of the source data via card setting DISP
equal to zero and NUMS equal to the respective tape input source
ID-number. The tape source will be replaced by the card source.
6. ERROR - DISP GREATER THAN 0 FOR SOURCE n, NO MORE TAPE SOURCES, PROG.
TERMINATED. The program has found a source input card (Card Group 17)
that indicates it is to update or delete a tape source, but it has run out
of tape sources. Check your input source deck and make sure you have the
correct input tape.
7. ERROR - DISP GREATER THAN 0 FOR SOURCE n, CANNOT FIND CORRESPONDING TAPE
SOURCE, PROG. TERMINATED. The program has found an input source card
(Card Group 17) that indicates it is to update or delete source n, but
that source is not on the tape. Check the sequence of the input source
data as they must be in ascending order of the source ID-number. Also,
make sure you have the correct input tape.
4-68
-------
TABLE 4-6
(Cont.)
ISCLT WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES
8. WARNING - HW/HB > 5 FOR SOURCE n, PROG. USES LATERAL VIRTUAL DIST. FOR
UPPER BOUND OF CONCENTRATION (DEPOSITION). The program is informing the
user that the supersguat building wake effects option (WAKE) on Card Group
17 was set to blank, "0" and the program defaulted to those equations for
the lateral virtual distance that produce the upper bound on the
concentration or deposition. The lower bound may be calculated in another
run by setting WAKE = 1.
9. ERROR - AVAILABLE CORE = n, PROBLEM REQUIRES m OR MORE LOCATIONS. The
program has determined that m locations of BLANK COMMON are requires for
the run, but only n locations are available. See Equations (4-1), (4-2)
and (4-3) in Section 4.1.2.
10. ERROR - MAX. NO. OF SOURCES EXCEEDED FOR NGROUP OF ISW(ll) = 2 OPTION.
The number of sources the program has input exceeds the number the program
is capable of processing under the special condition c, under the
parameters NGROUP or ISW(ll) = "2". See Equations (4-2) and (4-3) in
Section 4.1.2.
11. ERROR - STACK DIAMETER < = 0 FOR SOURCE n. Stack sources require a stack
diameter greater than zero. Check the order of the input source deck.
12. WARNING - EXIT VELOCITY IS < = 0 FOR SOURCE n, PROG. SETS TO l.OE-5 AND
CONTINUES. The program sets a zero exit velocity for stacks to l.OE-5,
because it is used as a divisor in the plume rise equations. If you did
not intend to set the exit velocity to zero for no plume rise, check the
offending card and the order of the input source deck.
13. ERROR - SIGYO < 0 FOR SOURCE n. Volume sources must have SIGYO greater
than zero. Check the order of the input source deck.
14. ERROR - SIGZO < 0 FOR SOURCE n. Volume sources must have SIGZO greater
than zero. Check the order of the input source deck.
15. ERROR - XO < 0 FOR SOURCE n. Area sources must have XO greater than
ZERO. Check the order of the input source deck.
16. ERROR - SOURCE n LESS IN VALUE THAN LAST SOURCE n READ. Source input deck
is out of order or miss punched.
17. ERROR - DISP CODE FOR SOURCE n IS OUT OF RANGE. The parameter DISP must
equal 0, 1 or 2. Check card and order of input source deck.
18. ERROR - TYPE CODE FOR SOURCE n IS OUT OF RANGE. The parameter TYPE must
equal 0, 1 or 2. Check card and order of source input deck.
19. ERROR - QFLG CODE FOR SOURCE n IS OUT OF RANGE. The parameter QFLG must
equal 0, 1, 2 or 3. Check card and order of source input deck.
4-69
-------
Where TAPEnn and TAPEmm are the names used on the tape REQUEST card
and nn and mm are the logical unit numbers used to reference the
input and output tapes, respectively. See the CDC FORTRAN Extended
Reference Manual for your machine for variations in this card and
alterations of this card by the LGO runstream card
The program uses the END= clause in the read statement for card
source input data
READ (IUNT, 9023, END = 1120) NUMS1, DISP. etc.
If your FORTRAN does not recognize this statement, remove the ",END
= 1120" from this statement in sub-routine MODEL. Also, if this
clause is removed from this statement, the user must insure the
program never tries to read beyond the last input card source or the
program will error off. Also, the END= clause is used in some of
the tape read statements at program listing sequence numbers —
ISC08570, ISC16340, ISC16830, ISC16900, ISC17030, ISC18060, and
ISC18330. If your FORTRAN does not recognize the END= clause, it
must be removed from these statements. The removal of the END=
clause from these statements will eliminate the capability of the
ISCLT program in some cases to position a tape to the correct file
via the input parameter NOFILE when multiple passes are required
through the tape data. This problem can be overcome by writing the
ISCLT output data to a mass-storage file and then copying the
mass-storage file to an output tape file when the program has
terminated.
4-70
-------
• Two successive file marks are written at the end of execution. The
program uses the FORTRAN BACKSPACE command to back the output tape
back over the last end of file mark written. If your FORTRAN
BACKSPACE command does not back over end of file marks, the tape
will be left positioned after the second end of file mark at the end
of execution. However, if the program must make multiple passes
through the tape for the output reports, the tape will be left
positioned after the first file mark at the end of the data set.
The program will make multiple passes through the data file, if
Condition c under ISW(ll) or NGROUP does not apply to the run and
Condition a was selected.
4-71
-------
SECTION 5
REFERENCES
Barry, P. J. , 1964: Estimation of Downwind Concentration of Airborne
Effluents Discharged in the Neighborhood of Buildings. AECL Report
No. 2043, Atomic Energy of Canada, Ltd., Chalk River, Ontario.
Bowers, J.F. and A.J. Anderson, 1981: An Evaluation Study for the Industrial
Source Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model. EPA-450/4-81-002, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North
Carolina 27711.
Bowers, J.F., A.J. Anderson and W.R. Hargraves, 1982: Tests of the Industrial
Source Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model at the Armco, Middletown, Ohio
Steel Mill. EPA-450/4-82-006, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Bowers, J.F., J.R. Bjorkland and C.S. Cheney, 1979: Industrial Source Complex
(ISC) Dispersion Model User's Guide. Volume I, EPA-450/4-79-030, U.S.
Envrionmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North
Carolina 27711.
Bowers, J.F., J.R. Bjorkland and C.S. Cheney, 1979: Industrial Source Complex
(ISC) Dispersion Model User's Guide. Volume II, EPA-450/4-79-031,
U.S. Envrionmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North
Carolina 27711.
Briggs, G.A., 1969, Plume Rise, USAEC Critical Review Series, TID-25075,
National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia 22161.
Briggs, G. A., 1971: Some Recent Analyses of Plume Rise Observations, In
Proceedings of the Second International Clean Air Congress, Academic
Press, New York.
Briggs, G.A., 1972: Discussion on Chimney Plumes in Neutral and Stable
Surroundings. Atmqs. Environ. 6:507-510.
Briggs, G.A., 1974: Diffusion Estimation for Small Emissions. In ERL, ARL
USAEC Report ATDL-106. U.S. Atomic Energy Commission, Oak Ridge,
Tennessee.
Briggs, G. A., 1975: Plume Rise Predictions. Iri Lectures on Air Pollution
and Environmental Impact Analysis, American Meteorological Society,
Boston, Massachusetts.
Budney, L. J. , 1977: Guidelines for Air Quality Maintenance Planning and
Analysis, Volume 10 (revised): Procedures for Evaluating Air Quality
Impact of New Stationary Sources. EPA-450/4-77-001, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North
Carolina 27711.
Catalano, J.A., 1986: Single-Source (CRSTER) Model, Addendum to the User's
Manual. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina 27711.
5-1
-------
Chico, T. and J.A. Catalano, 1986: Addendum to the User's Guide for MPTER.
Contract No. EPA 68-02-4106, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Cramer, H.E., et al., 1972: Development of Dosage Models and Concepts. Final
Report Under Contract DAAD09-67-C-0020(R) with the U.S. Army, Deseret
Test Center Report DTC-TR-609, Fort Douglas, Utah.
Dumbauld, R. K. and J. R. Bjorklund, 1975: NASA/MSFC Multilayer Diffusion
Models and Computer Programs — Version 5. NASA Contractor Report No.
NASA CR-2631, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, George C.
Marshall Space Center, Alabama.
Dumbauld, R. K., J. E. Rafferty and H. E. Cramer, 1976: Dispersion-Deposition
from Aerial Spray Releases. Preprint Volume for the Third Symposium
on Atmospheric Diffusion and Air Quality, American Meteorological
Society, Boston, Massachusetts.
Environmental Protection Agency, 1977: User's Manual for Single Source
(CRSTER) model. EPA-450/2-77-013, U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Gifford, F.A., Jr. 1976: Turbulent Diffusion - Typing Schemes: A Review.
Nucl. Saf., 17' 68-86.
Halitsky, J., 1963: Gas Diffusion Near Buildings. ASHRAE Transcript 69,
Paper No. 1855, 464-485.
Halitsky, J., 1978: Comment on a Stack Downwash Prediction Formula. Atmos.
Environ., 12, 1575-1576.
Holzworth, G. C., 1972: Mixing Heights, Wind Speeds and Potential for
Urban Air Pollution Throughout the Contiguous United States.
Publication No. AP-101, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Huber, A. H. and W. H. Snyder, 1976: Building Wake Effects on Short Stack
Effluents. Preprint Volume for the Third Symposium on Atmospheric
Diffusion and Air Quality, American Meteorological Society, Boston,
Massachusetts.
Huber, A. H., 1977: Incorporating Building/Terrain Wake Effects on Stack
Effluents. Preprint Volume for the Joint Conference on Applications
of Air Pollution Meteorology, American Meteorological Society, Boston,
Massachusetts.
McDonald, J. E., 1960: An Aid to Computation of Terminal Fall Velocities of
Spheres. J. Met., 17, 463.
McElroy, J.L. and F. Pooler, 1968: The St. Louis Dispersion Study. U.S.
Public Health Service, National Air Pollution Control Administration,
Report AP-53.
National Climatic Center, 1970: Card Deck 144 WBAN Hourly Surface
Observations Reference Manual 1970, Available from the National
Climatic Data Center, Asheville, North Carolina 28801.
5-2
-------
Pasguill, F., 1976: Atmospheric Dispersion Parameters in Gaussian Plume
Modeling. Part II. Possible Requirements for Change in the Turner
Workbook Values. EPA-600/4-76-030b, U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Pierce, T.E. and D.B. Turner, 1980: User's Guide for MPTER - A Multiple Point
Gaussian Dispersion Algorithm With Optional Terrain Adjustment.
EPA-600/8-80-016, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Pierce, T.E. and D.B. Turner, 1982: PTPLU - A Single Source Gaussian
Dispersion Algorithm User's Guide. EPA-600/8-82-014, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North
Carolina 27711.
Randerson, D. , Ed., 1984: Atmospheric Science and Power Production.
DOE/TIC-27601, Office of Scientific and Technical Information, U.S.
Department of Energy, Oak Ridge, Tennessee.
Sherlock, R. H. And F. A. Stalker, 1941: A Study of Flow Phenomena in the
Wake of Smokestacks. Eng. Res. Bull. No. 29, Department
Engineering, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
of
Turner, D.B., 1964:
83-91.
A Diffusion Model for an Urban Area. J._Apj3l_i_Met_._, 3,
Turner, D. B., 1970: Workbook of Atmospheric Dispersion Estimates. PHS
Publication No. 999-AP-26. U. S. Department of Health, Education and
Welfare, National Air Pollution Control Administration, Cincinnati,
Ohio.
Turner, D. B. and A. Busse, 1973: User's Guide to the Interactive Versions of
Three Point Source Dispersion Programs: PTMAX, PTDIS and PTMPT.
Draft EPA Report, Meteorology Laboratory, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Turner, D.B. and J.H. Novak, 1978: Users' Guide for RAM, Volume II, Data
Preparation and Listings. EPA--600/8-78-016b, ESRL/ORD/USEPA, Research
Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711.
Vincent, J. A., 1977: Model Experiments on the Nature of Air Pollution
Transport Near Buildings. Atmos. Environ., ri(8), 765-774.
5-3
-------
TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
(Please read Instructions on the reverse before completing)
1. REPORT NO.
EPA-450/4-86-005a
3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
Industrial Source Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model
User's Guide - Second Edition -- Volume I
5. REPORT DATE
June 1986
6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
7. AUTHOR(S)
D. J. Wackter and J. A. Foster
8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO.
TRC Project 3350-R81
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
TRC Environmental Consultants, Inc.
800 Connecticut Boulevard
East Hartford, Connecticut 06108
10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO
Contract No. 68-02-3886
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
Source Receptor Analysis Branch
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
Final
14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
16. ABSTRACT
The Second Edition of the Industrial Soruce Complex Dispersion (ISC) Model
User's Guide provides a detailed technical discussion of the revised ISC Model.
The ISC Model was designed in response to the need for a comprehensive set of
dispersion model computer programs that could be used to evaluate the air quality
impact of emissions from large industrial source complexes. Air quality impact
analyses for industrial source complexes often require consideration of factors
such as fugitive emissions, aerodynamic building wake effects, time-dependent
exponential decay of pollutants, gravitational settling, and dry deposition.
The ISC Model consists of two computer programs that are designed to consider
these and other factors so as to meet the dispersion modeling needs of air
pollution control agencies and others responsible for performing dispersion
modeling analyses. Major features in the revised model code include: (1) a
regulatory default option which incorporates regulatory guidance contained in
the Guideline on Air Quality Models as revised in 1986; (2) a calms processing
procedure; (3) a new Urban Mode 3 which utilizes urban dispersion parameters
published by Sriggs based on observations of McElroy and Pooie" in St. Louis,
and (4) revised sets of wind speed profile exponents for rural and urban
scenarios.
17.
KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
DESCRIPTORS
b.IDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS
c. COSATI Field/Group
Air pollution
Turbulent diffusion
Meteorology
Mathematical models
Computer model
Industrial Sources
Deposition
Downwash
Dispersion
18. DISTRIBUTION STATEMEN1
Release Unlimited
19. SECURITY CLASS I This Report I
Unclassified
21 NO. OF PAGES
255
20 SECURITY CLASS /Tins page/
Uncl ass' ^ied
22. PRICE
EPA Form 2220-1 (Rev. 4-771 PREVIOUS EDITION 15 OBSOLETE
-------
INSTRUCTIONS
1. REPORT NUMBER
Insert the EPA report number as it appears on the cover of the publication.
2. LEAVE BLANK
3. RECIPIENTS ACCESSION NUMBER
Reserved for use by each report recipient.
TITLE AND SUBTITLE
"tie should indicate clearly and briefly the subject coverage of the report, and be displayed prominently. ?et subtitle, if used, in smaller
ae or otherwise subordinate it to mam title. When a report is prepared in more than one volume, repeat -,ie primary title, add volume
mber and include subtitle for the specific title.
5. REPORT DATE
Eaoli report shall carry a date indicating at least month and year. Indicate the basis on which it was select :a (e.g , date of issue, date of
Pi oval, date of preparation, etc.).
6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
Leave blank.
7. AUTHOR(S)
Give name(s) in conventional order (John R. Doe, J. Robert Doe, etc.). List author's affiliation if it differ from the performing organi
zation.
8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NUMBER
Insert if performing organization wishes to assign this number.
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
Give name, street, city, state, and ZIP code. List no more than two levels of an organizational hirearchy.
10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NUMBER
Use the program element number under which the report was prepared. Subordinate numbers may be mended in parentheses.
11. CONTRACT/GRANT NUMBER
Insert contract or grant number under '.vhich report was prepared.
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
Include ZIP code.
13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
Indicate interim final, etc., and if applicable, dates covered. *
14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
Insert appropriate code.
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
Enter information not included elsewhere but useful, such as: Prepared in cooperation with. Translation »r. Presented at conference of,
To be published in. Supersedes, Supplements, etc.
16. ABSTRACT
Include a brief (200 words or less) factual summary of the most significant information contained m the r- oort. if the report Contains a
significant bibliography or literature survey, mention it here.
17. KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
------- |